SM_MFC465CN_MFC685CW_MFC885CW SM MFC465CN MFC685CW MFC885CW

User Manual: SM_MFC465CN_MFC685CW_MFC885CW shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/Brother/Fax/

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 453

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT

SERVICE MANUAL
MODELS: MFC885CW/685CW
MFC680CN/465CN
MFC265C/260C/235C

Confidential

© Copyright Brother 2007
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any
form or by any means without permission in writing
from the publisher.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Confidential

Preface
This Service Manual is intended for use by service personnel and details the specifications,
construction, theory of operation, and maintenance for the Brother machines noted on the front cover.
It includes information required for troubleshooting and service--disassembly, reassembly, and
lubrication--so that service personnel will be able to understand equipment function, repair the
equipment in a timely manner and order spare parts as necessary.
To perform appropriate maintenance so that the machine is always in the best possible condition for
the customer, service personnel must adequately understand and apply this manual.

The table below shows the functional comparison between the models covered by this manual.
Model

MFC885CW MFC685CW

RAM

MFC680CN

MFC465CN

MFC265C

32M

4.2-inch wide

MFC235C

16M

Color LCD

LCD

MFC260C

3.3-inch wide

Monochrome LCD
(16 characters x 1 line)

2.0-inch

Wired LAN

√

---

Wireless LAN (WLAN)

√

---

√

---

1 unit *

---

Backup battery

√

---

TAD

√

---

PhotoCapture Center

√

---

PictBridge/USB flash
memory drive

√

Movable platen

√

---

Photo tray

√

---

ADF

√

---

Low yield ink cartridge

---

√

Handset
(Hook switch PCB, Hook
switch sensor, Sensor
actuators)
Cordless handset
(Cordless PCB)

* Number of cordless handsets that the machine has as standard. Up to four cordless handsets including optional ones
can be registered.

This manual describes the models and their versions destined for major countries. The specifications and functions are
subject to change depending upon each destination.

Confidential

How this manual is organized
This manual is made up of nine chapters and appendices.
CHAPTER 1

PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Contains external views and names of components and describes their functions. Information about
the keys on the control panel is included to help you check operation or make adjustments.
CHAPTER 2

SPECIFICATIONS

Lists the specifications of each model, which enables you to make a comparison of different models.
CHAPTER 3

THEORY OF OPERATION

Gives an overview of the scanning and printing mechanisms as well as the sensors, actuators, and
control electronics. It aids in understanding the basic principles of operation as well as locating
defects for troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4

ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Details error messages and codes that the incorporated self-diagnostic functions display if any error
or malfunction occurs. If any error message appears, refer to this chapter to find which components
should be checked or replaced.
The latter half of this chapter provides sample problems that could occur in the main sections of the
machine and related troubleshooting procedures. This will help service personnel pinpoint and
repair defective components.
CHAPTER 5

TRANSFER OF DATA LEFT IN THE MACHINE TO BE SENT FOR REPAIR

Describes how to transfer data left in the machine to be sent for repair. The service personnel
should instruct end users to follow the transfer procedure given in this chapter if the machine at the
user site cannot print received data due to the printing mechanism defective. End users can transfer
received data to another machine to prevent data loss.
CHAPTER 6

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND LUBRICATION

Details procedures for disassembling and reassembling the machine together with related notes. The
disassembly order flow provided enables you to see at a glance the quickest way to get to
component(s) involved.
At the start of a disassembly job, you check the disassembly order flow that guides you through a
shortcut to the target components.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points to which the specified
lubricants should be applied during reassembly jobs.
CHAPTER 7

ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS, REQUIRED AFTER PARTS
REPLACEMENT

Details adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the head/carriage unit, main PCB
and some other parts have been replaced.
CHAPTER 8

CLEANING

Provides cleaning procedures not covered by the User's Guide. Before starting any repair work,
clean the machine as it may solve the problem concerned.

Confidential

CHAPTER 9

MAINTENANCE MODE

Describes the maintenance mode which is exclusively designed for the purpose of checks, settings
and adjustments of the machine using the keys on the control panel.
In the maintenance mode, you can update memory (EEPROM: electrically erasable programmable
read-only memory) contents for optimizing the drive conditions of the head/carriage unit or the
paper feed roller and paper ejection roller in the engine unit, if those units have been replaced, or
for setting the CIS scanner area, for example. You can also customize the EEPROM according to
the shipment destination of the machine concerned. In addition, you can perform operational checks
of the LCD, control panel PCB or sensors, perform a print test, display the log information or error
codes, and modify firmware switches (WSW).
For models with a cordless handset, the maintenance functions dedicated to cordless handsets are
provided.
Appendix 1

Reading Labels

Shows the location of labels put on some parts and describes the coding information for serial
number, property data, and manufacturing information.
Appendix 2

Firmware Installation

Provides instructions on how to change firmware stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB or load
firmware to a new main PCB from the host PC.
Appendix 3

EEPROM Customizing Codes

Provides instructions on how to set up the EEPROM customizing codes for the various preferences
exclusively designed for each destination. The specified customizing code is stored in the EEPROM
mounted on the main PCB. If the main PCB is replaced, therefore, you need to set up the proper
customizing code with the machine in the maintenance mode.
Customizing codes customize firmware for individual models, enabling the common firmware to be
used for various models. A list of EEPROM customizing codes comes with the firmware data
provided by Brother Industries.
Appendix 4

Firmware Switches (WSW)

Describes the functions of the firmware switches, which can be divided into two groups: one is for
customizing preferences designed for the shipping destination (as described in Appendix 3) and the
other is for modifying preferences that match the machine to the environmental conditions. Use the
latter group if the machine malfunctions due to mismatching.
Appendix 5

Wiring Diagrams

Provides the wiring diagrams that help you understand the connections between PCBs.
Appendix 6

Circuit Diagrams

Provides the circuit diagrams of the MJ PCB and power supply PCB.
Appendix 7

Deletion of Personal Information

Provides instructions on how to delete personal information recorded in the machine and cordless
handset(s).

iii

Confidential

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
To use the machine safely

Please refer to these instructions for later reference and before attempting any maintenance.

Confidential

vii

Confidential

viii

Confidential

Legal limitations for copying

Confidential

CHAPTER 1
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Confidential

CHAPTER 1 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter contains external views and names of components and describes their functions.
Information about the keys on the control panel is included to help you check operation or make
adjustments.

CONTENTS
1.1

OUTLINE.....................................................................................................................1-1

1.2

CONTROL PANEL ......................................................................................................1-4

1.3

COMPONENTS .........................................................................................................1-16

Confidential

1.1 OUTLINE
Fax machine
Front view
(8) ADF & document cover ASSY (For models with ADF)
Document cover (For models without ADF)

(1) Control panel

(7) Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

(2) Ink cartridge cover

(3) Paper tray
(4) Media slots for
PhotoCapture Center*1
(5) Port for PictBridge/USB flash memory drive

(6) Handset*2

(9) External telephone
line jack

(10) Telephone line jack
(front_handset_e)

Back view

(13) Jam clear cover

(12) USB interface connector
(11) LAN cable connector*3

(back_view_e)

*1 For models with PhotoCapture Center
*2 For models with handset
*3 For wired LAN-enabled models

1-1

Confidential

No.

Name

Description

(1)

Control panel

Use the keys to operate the machine. The liquid crystal display
(LCD) shows the machine operation status.

(2)

Ink cartridge cover

Open to replace ink cartridges.

(3)

Paper tray

Load paper here. Paper will be fed into the machine, sheet by
sheet.

(4)

Media slots for PhotoCapture
Center*1

Insert a memory card here.

(5)

Port for PictBridge/USB flash
memory drive

Connect a digital camera (with PictBridge) to this connector using
the USB cable.
Insert a USB flash memory drive here.

(6)

Handset*2

Use for telephone conversations.

(7)

Scanner cover (Scanner unit)

Open to remove jammed paper.

ADF & document cover ASSY
(For models with ADF)

ADF (Only for models with ADF): Load documents (originals)
here. Documents will be fed into the machine, page by page.

Document cover
(For models without ADF)

Document cover: Open to place the document (original) on the
scanner glass.

(9)

External telephone line jack

Plug in the modular plug on the external telephone line here.

(10)

Telephone line jack

Plug in the modular plug on the telephone line here.

(11)

LAN cable connector*3

Connect the LAN cable here.

(12)

USB interface connector

Connect the USB cable here.

(13)

Jam clear cover

Open to remove paper jammed inside the machine.

(8)

*1 For models with PhotoCapture Center
*2 For models with handset
*3 For wired LAN-enabled models

1-2

Confidential

Cordless handset (For models with cordless handset)
(1) Cordless handset

(Cordless_handset)

No.
(1)

Name
Cordless handset

Description
Use for telephone conversations.

1-3

Confidential

1.2 CONTROL PANEL
MFC885CW
11

MFC685CW
11

MFC680CN
11

(For keys exclusive to the European models, see page 1-8.)

1-4

Confidential

1-5

Confidential

1-6

Confidential

1-7

Confidential

European Models of MFC885CW and MFC680CN
The European models of MFC885CW/680CN do not have the Hold/Intercom, Hold, Ink, On/Off, Message
Center, or Erase key, but they have the following keys that are not on the U.S.A. models.
2 R
Use this key to gain access to an outside line or transfer a call to another extension when it is connected to
a PBX.
8 Ink Management
Lets you clean the print head, check the print quality, and check the available ink volume.
11 Power Save
You can turn the machine on or off. This key lets you put the machine into Power Save mode.
12 Digital TAD
Turns the Telephone Answering Device (TAD) on or off. Will also flash if you have new messages.
12 Erase/Mute
Puts the current phone call on hold. Also, deletes voice messages.

1-8

Confidential

MFC465CN

(For keys exclusive to the European models, see page 1-11.)
9

1-9

Confidential

1-10

Confidential

European Models of MFC465CN
The European models of MFC465CN do not have the Hook, On/Off, or Ink key, but they have the following
keys that are not on the U.S.A. models.
2 Tel/R
This key is used to have a telephone conversation after picking up the external handset during the F/T
pseudo-ring. Also, use this key to gain access to an outside line, or transfer a call to another extension when
it is connected to a PBX.
6 Power Save
You can turn the machine on or off. This key lets you put the machine into Power Save mode.
9 Ink Management
Lets you clean the print head, check the print quality, and check the available ink volume.

1-11

Confidential

MFC265C/260C/235C

(For keys exclusive to the European models, see the next page.)

1-12

4 5

Confidential

European Models of MFC260C/235C
The European models of MFC260C/235C do not have the Hook, Ink, or On/Off key, but they have the
following keys that are not on the U.S.A. models.
1 Tel/R
This key is used to have a telephone conversation after picking up the external handset in F/T pseudo-ring.
Also, use this key to gain access to an outside line, or transfer a call to another extension when it is
connected to a PBX.
5 Ink Management
Lets you clean the print head, check the print quality, and check the available ink volume.
11 Power Save
You can turn the machine on or off. This key lets you put the machine into Power Save mode.

1-13

Confidential

Cordless handset (For models with cordless handset)

(For keys exclusive to the European models,
see the next page.)
1-14

Confidential

(U.S.A. model only)

Cordless Handset for the European Model of MFC885CW
The cordless handset for the European model of MFC885CW does not have the Flash/Callwait or
Hold/Intercom key, but it has the following keys that are not on the U.S.A. model.
9 R
Use this key to gain access to an outside line to recall the operator, or transfer a call to another extension
when it is connected to a PBX.
13 Int (Mute/Intercom)
Puts the current phone call on hold. Also, press this key to speak on the intercom or to transfer an incoming
call to the cordless handset.
1-15

Confidential

1.3 COMPONENTS
The machine consists of the following major components:
ADF & document cover ASSY (For models with ADF)
Document cover (For models without ADF)

Wide color LCD type

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Control panel
ASSY
Color LCD
unit

Jam clear cover

Color LCD type
Scanner cover
damper
Scanner cover
support

Control panel
ASSY
Color LCD
unit

Antenna & cordless
PCB ASSY* 2

Handset*1

Monochrome LCD type

Speaker

Control panel
ASSY

Cordless
handset* 2
Handset mount*1

Cover sensor PCB

Ink cartridge cover
WLAN PCB*4
Front cover

Upper cover*3
Upper cover*1*2

Engine unit
Media module cover
Maintenance unit
Ink absorber box

Head/carriage
unit
Charge stand
ASSY* 2
Flushing box

Ink refill ASSY

Registration sensor
PCB

Hook switch PCB* 1
Lower cover

PF encoder PCB
MJ PCB
Main PCB ASSY

*1 For models with handset
*2 For models with cordless handset
*3 For models without handset and
cordless handset
*4 For wireless LAN-enabled models

MJ/PS shield box
Power supply PCB

1-16

Paper tray ASSY
(COMPONENTS_MFC_e)

Confidential

CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS

Confidential

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter lists the specifications of each model, which enables you to make a comparison of
different models.

CONTENTS
2.1

2.2

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1

General Specifications .....................................................................................2-1

2.1.2

Paper Specifications ........................................................................................2-4

2.1.3

Printable Area ..................................................................................................2-7

SPECIFICATIONS LIST ..............................................................................................2-8

Confidential

2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 General Specifications
Memory Capacity
Models with color LCD:
Models with monochrome LCD:

32 MB
16 MB

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Up to 10 pages

Paper Tray

100 sheets, 80 g/m2 (20 lb)

Printer Type

Ink Jet

Print Method

Piezoelectric, 376 nozzles
(47 nozzles x 2 lines staggered, for each color)

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
MFC885CW:
MFC685CW/680CN:
MFC465CN:
MFC265C/260C/235C:

4.2-inch wide color
3.3-inch wide color
2.0-inch color
16 characters x 1 line, monochrome

Operating Environment

50 to 95°F (10 to 35°C)

Best Print Quality

68 to 91°F (20 to 33°C)

Power Source

100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (U.S.A./Canada)
220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (Europe/Asia)

Power Consumption

MFC885CW
MFC685CW
MFC680CN
MFC465CN
MFC265C
MFC260C
MFC235C

USA/Canada
Minimum Standby
6.5W
10W
6W
7W
----4W
6W
4W
6W
---------

2-1

Peak
35W
31W
--31W
29W
-----

Europe/Asia
Minimum Standby
8.5W
11W
5W
8W
5W
8W
5W
8W
5W
8W
5W
8W
5W
7W

Peak
38W
33W
33W
33W
32W
32W
21W

Confidential

Dimensions (W x D x H)
Models with ADF
MFC465CN/265C/260C
(with paper tray flap opened)

398 x 370 x 180 mm
398 x 443 x 180 mm

(15.7 x 14.6 x 7.1 inches)
(15.7 x 17.4 x 7.1 inches)
370 mm (14.6 inches)

180 mm
(7.1 inches)

398 mm (15.7 inches)

443 mm (17.4 inches)
(dimensions_ADF)

MFC885CW (with cordless handset)
(with paper tray flap opened)

476 x 370 x 180 mm
476 x 443 x 180 mm

(18.7 x 14.6 x 7.1 inches)
(18.7 x 17.4 x 7.1 inches)
370 mm (14.6 inches)

180 mm
(7.1 inches)

351 mm (13.8 inches)
443 mm (17.4 inches)

398 mm (15.7 inches)
476 mm (18.7 inches)

(dimensions_ADF_cordless)

MFC685CW/680CN (with handset)
(with paper tray flap opened)

468 x 370 x 180 mm
468 x 443 x 180 mm

(18.4 x 14.6 x 7.1 inches)
(18.4 x 17.4 x 7.1 inches)
370 mm (14.6 inches)

180 mm
(7.1 inches)

398 mm (15.7 inches)
468 mm (18.4 inches)

443 mm (17.4 inches)
(dimensions_ADF_handset)

Models without ADF
MFC235C
(with paper tray flap opened)

398 x 360 x 150 mm
398 x 443 x 150 mm

(15.7 x 14.2 x 5.9 inches)
(15.7 x 17.4 x 5.9 inches)
360 mm (14.2 inches)

150 mm
(5.9 inches)

443 mm (17.4 inches)

398 mm (15.7 inches)

(dimensions_235C)

2-2

Confidential

Weight
MFC885CW
MFC685CW
MFC680CN
MFC465CN
MFC265C
MFC260C
MFC235C

8.7 kg (19.2 lb)
8.4 kg (18.5 lb)
8.5 kg (18.7 lb)
8.1 kg (17.9 lb)
7.9 kg (17.4 lb)
8.0 kg (17.6 lb)
7.3 kg (16.1 lb)

2-3

Confidential

2.1.2 Paper Specifications
Recommended Paper

Brother Paper
Paper Type

Item

Letter Plain

BP60PL (USA only)

Letter Glossy

BP61GLL

Letter Inkjet (Photo Matte)

BP60ML (USA only)

4 x 6 inch Glossy Photo

BP61GLP

Transparencies: 3M Transparency Film

Paper Type and Size for Each Operation
Paper Type

Paper Size

Usage
mm (inches)

Cut Sheet

Cards

Envelopes

Transparencies

Fax

Copy

PhotoCapture

Printer

Letter

216 x 279 (8 1/2 x 11)

Yes

210 x 297 (8.3 x 11.7)

Yes

Legal

216 x 356 (8 1/2 x 14)

Yes

Executive

184 x 267 (7 1/4 x 10 1/2)

Yes

JIS B5

182 x 257 (7.2 x 10.1)

Yes

148 x 210 (5.8 x 8.3)

Yes

105 x 148 (4.1 x 5.8)

Yes

Photo

102 x 152 (4 x 6)

Yes

Photo L

89 x 127 (3 1/2 x 5)

Yes

Photo 2L

127 x 178 (5 x 7)

Yes

Index Card

127 x 203 (5 x 8)

Yes

Post Card 1

100 x 148 (3.9 x 5.8)

Yes

Post Card 2 (Double)

148 x 200 (5.8 x 7.9)

Yes

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 (6.4 x 9)

Yes

DL Envelope

110 x 220 (4.3 x 8.7)

Yes

COM-10

105 x 241 (4 1/8 x 9 1/2)

Yes

Monarch

98 x 191 (3 7/8 x 7 1/2)

Yes

JE4 Envelope

105 x 235 (4.1 x 9.3)

Yes

Letter

216 x 279 (8 1/2 x 11)

Yes

210 x 297 (8.3 x 11.7)

Yes

2-4

Confidential

Paper Weight, Thickness and Capacity

Paper Type
Cut Sheet

Weight
2

Thickness

No. of sheets

Plain Paper

64 to 120 g/m
(17 to 32 lb)

0.08 to 0.15 mm
(0.003 to 0.006 inch)

100*

Inkjet Paper

64 to 200 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb)

0.08 to 0.25 mm
(0.003 to 0.01 inch)

Glossy Paper

Up to 220 g/m2
(Up to 58 lb)

Up to 0.25 mm
(Up to 0.01 inch)

Photo
4 x 6 inches

Up to 240 g/m2
(Up to 64 lb)

Up to 0.28 mm
(Up to 0.01 inch)

Index Card

Up to 120 g/m2
(Up to 32 lb)

Up to 0.15 mm
(Up to 0.006 inch)

Post Card

Up to 200 g/m2
(Up to 53 lb)

Up to 0.23 mm
(Up to 0.01 inch)

Envelopes

75 to 95 g/m2
(20 to 25 lb)

Up to 0.52 mm
(Up to 0.02 inch)

Transparencies

Cards

* Up to 100 sheets for paper of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
Up to 50 sheets for Legal size paper of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)

Output Paper Capacity of the Paper Tray Cover*

Paper Tray Cover*

Up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) (Letter)
- Transparencies or glossy paper must be picked up from the
paper tray cover* one page at a time to avoid smudging.
*Photo tray on some models

2-5

Confidential

DO NOT use the following kinds of paper:
Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped paper
2 mm
(0.08 inch)
or longer
2 mm
(0.08 inch)
or longer

Extremely shiny or highly textured paper
Paper already printed on by a printer
Paper that cannot be arranged uniformly when stacked
Paper made with a short grain

DO NOT use envelopes:
that are of a baggy construction
that are embossed (have raised writing on them)
that have clasps or staples
that are preprinted on the inside

2-6

Confidential

2.1.3 Printable Area

The printable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below show the
unprintable areas on cut sheet paper and envelopes.
Cut Sheet Paper
(3)

Envelopes
(3)

(4)

(1)

(4)

(1)

(2)

unprintable area

Paper

(1) Top

(2) Bottom

(3) Left

(4) Right

Cut sheet

3 mm (0.12 inch)
0 mm (0 inch)*

Envelopes

12 mm (0.47 inch)

24 mm (0.95 inch)

3 mm (0.12 inch)

* When you set the borderless printing feature to ON.
Printable area depends on the printer driver settings.
The figures above are approximate and the printable area may vary depending on the
type of cut sheet paper you are using.
The borderless feature is not available for envelopes.

2-7

Confidential

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS LIST
AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-680CN

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

GENERAL

Print Head

BH7 (KKCCMMYY) 47 nozzles / line x 2 (each color)

Technology

Inkjet

Scanning Method

CIS

CPU Speed

RISC 133MHZ

Back up Clock

Yes
50 - 95˚F / 10 - 35 ˚C (68 - 91˚F / 20 - 33 ˚C)

Operating
Environment
Temperature
(BestPrintQuality
)
Humidity

20 - 80 %(w/o condensation)

On/Off Switch

Yes

Demo Model

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Panel Key for
demo sheet

N/A

FAX+COPY

N/A

FAX+COPY

N/A

FAX+COPY

N/A

FAX+COPY

N/A

LCD Demo

N/A

Simultaneous
Operation

Yes

Test Sheet

Yes:Print Quality/Alignment (in Ink Key)

Support OS
version
(Windows)

2K/XP/XP Professional X64/Vista

Support OS
version
(Mac)

Mac OSX 10.2.4(greater)

Min. Input of ADF
( Width/Height)

N/A

148/148mm
(5.8/5.8")

Max. Input of
ADF
( Width/Height)

N/A

215.9/355.6mm
(8.5/14")

Max. Input of
Glass
( Width/Height)

215.9/297mm
(8.5/11.7")

Min. Output of
Auto Cut sheet
Feeder(Width/He
ight)

89/127mm
(3.5/5.0")

Max. Output of
Auto Cut sheet
Feeder(Width/He
ight)

216/356mm
(8.5/14.0")

Min. Output
Photo Paper
Tray(Width/Heigh
t)

N/A

89/127mm
(3.5/5.0")

Max. Output
PhotoPaper
Tray(Width/Heigh
t)

N/A

101.6/152.4mm
(4.0/6.0")

Min. Output
LowerTray(Width
/Height)

N/A

2-8

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-680CN

Sheet Weight
(Paper tray)

64-220g/m2 ( 17-58 lb. )

Sheet Weight
(Lower tray)

N/A

64N/A90g/mm2 (17N/A24lb.)

N/A

Sheet Weight
(Photo Paper
Tray)
ADF (pages)

64 N/A220 g/m2 ( 17 N/A 58 lb. )

N/A

Yes(10)

100 (80 g/m2)

Paper Capacity
(sheets)

Output Paper
Capacity
(sheets)
Brother Paper
(for Plain,Glossy
and Inkjet)

A4 Plain
A4 Glossy
A4 Inkjet
4x6in Glossy

LTR Plain
LTR Glossy
LTR Inkjet
4x6in
Glossy

A4 Plain
A4 Glossy
A4 Inkjet
4x6in Glossy

LTR Plain
LTR Glossy
LTR Inkjet
4x6in
Glossy

Recommended
Paper Only for
Transparency

LCD Size

A4 Plain
A4 Glossy
A4 Inkjet
4x6in Glossy

A4 Plain
A4 Glossy
A4 Inkjet
4x6in
Glossy

LTR Plain
LTR Glossy
LTR Inkjet
4x6in
Glossy

A4 Plain
A4 Glossy
A4 Inkjet
4x6in
Glossy

LTR Plain
LTR Glossy
LTR Inkjet
4x6in
Glossy

A4 Plain
A4 Glossy
A4 Inkjet
4x6in Glossy

3M 3410 Transparency film

16x1line

LCD Back Light
& Color

LCD Language

MFC-885CW

N/A

Max. Output
LowerTray(Width
/Height)

Sheet Weight
(ADF)

MFC-685CW

Wide3.3"Col
orLCD

2.0" ColorLCD

16x1line

N/A

Depend on
each
country

Selectable
Wallpaper

English

Depend on
each
country

English

English
Depend on
French for
each
CAN model
country

English

Depend on
English
each
French for
country
CAN model

N/A

English

English
Depend on each country
French for
CAN model

Yes

Fax/Scan/Copy/Photo Capture

Fax/Scan/Copy/Photo Capture/MC

Illuminated Mode
Key Color

Yellow Green

Status LED Color

N/A

16MB

Memory
Capacity
(physical:
Mbytes)

Wide4.2"ColorLCD

Yes

English
French for
Canada
model

Illuminated Mode
Key

Wide3.3"ColorLCD

32MB

Memory Backup
(with battery 24
hours )

N/A

Back Up
Print:ON/OFF
(in function
Menu)

N/A

Yes

Memory Security

N/A

Transmission
Lock

Yes

Yes
For with MC or Fax Preview Only

Yes

N/A

2-9

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C
Power Source

Power
Consumption
(Operating/Stand
by/Off mode)

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

AC 220-240 V 50/60Hz AC100-120 AC 220-240 V 50/60Hz AC100-120 AC 220-240 V 50/60Hz AC 220-240 AC100-120 AC 220-240 AC100-120 AC 220-240 V 50/60Hz
V 50/60Hz
V 50/60Hz
V 50/60Hz V 50/60Hz V 50/60Hz V 50/60Hz

21W / 7W / 5.0W

29W / 6W /
4.0W

32W / 8W / 5.0W

31W / 6W /
4.0W

Energy Star
Compliant

33W / 8W / 5.0W

33W / 8W / 31W / 7W / 33W / 8W / 35W / 10W
5.0W
6.0W
5.0W
/ 6.5W

38W / 11W / 8.5W

N/A

Machine Noise
(Operating)

Ink Guige
Indication

MFC-680CN

50dBA (Maximum)

Yes
(In ink key/Status
Monitor)

Yes
(In ink key/Status Monitor)

Yes
(Icon in standby mode/In ink key/Status
Monitor)

Yes
Yes
Yes
(Icon in
(Icon in standby mode/In (Icon in standby mode/In ink key/Status
standby
Monitor)
ink key/Status Monitor)
mode/In ink
key/Status
Monitor)

LIST/REPORT

Activity
Report/Journal
Report

Yes(up to 200)

Transmission
Verification
Report

Yes

Help List

Yes

Caller ID List

Yes

Quick Dial List

Yes

Tel Index List

N/A

ABC

User Setting List

Yes

Order Form

N/A

Network Config

N/A

Yes

INTERFACE

Host Interface
LAN

N/A

Yes

Wireless LAN

N/A

Yes

Cable included

N/A

PictBridge

Yes

USB Memory

Yes

Acceptable
Media Card

N/A

CF / MS / SD(MMC) / xD

SUPPLIES/ OPTIONS

Ink Cartridge

Supply Ink
Cartridge (Life /
Yield)

LC970BK
LC970C
LC970M
LC970Y

LC37BK
LC37C
LC37M
LC37Y
N/A

LC51BK
LC51C
LC51M
LC51Y
Approximate
ly
500/400
pages
(Normal
@5%)

LC970BK
LC970C
LC970M
LC970Y

LC37BK
LC37C
LC37M
LC37Y

LC51BK
LC51C
LC51M
LC51Y

LC1000BK
LC1000C
LC1000M
LC1000Y

LC57BK
LC57C
LC57M
LC57Y

N/A

LC1000BK
LC1000C
LC1000M
LC1000Y

LC51BK
LC51C
LC51M
LC51Y

LC57BK
LC57C
LC57M
LC57Y

LC51BK
LC51C
LC51M
LC51Y

LC1000BK
LC1000C
LC1000M
LC1000Y

LC57BK
LC57C
LC57M
LC57Y

Approximately
500/400 pages
(Normal @5%)

2-10

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

Supply Ink
Cartridge
(Life / Yield)
*HighCapacity

Supply Ink
Cartridge
(Life / Yield)
*LowCapacity

MFC-680CN

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

N/A

Approximately
350/300 pages
(Normal @5%)

N/A

Approximately
350/300 pages
(Normal @5%)

SERVICE INFORMATION

Monthly Volume

2500 pages

Machine Life
(year)

30000 pages or 5years

MTBF
(Mean Time
Between
Failures)

4000 hours

MTTR
(Mean Time To
BE Repaired)

30 minutes

TELEPHONE

Handset

Yes(Detach
able)

N/A

Digital Cordless
Phone
Hook

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

SKYPE/VOIP

N/A

Power Failure
Phone

N/A

Power Failure
Dialing

N/A

Chain Dialing

Yes

PBX Feature
(EUR Only)

Handset Volume

Yes
3 times/5 min

Yes

N/A

Yes
1 time/5 min

N/A

Yes
3 times/5 min

Yes

N/A

Yes
1 time/5 min

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes
1 time/5 min

Yes
3 times/5
min

Yes
1 time/5 min

N/A

Yes(2steps
+Amplify)

N/A

Yes
3 times/5 min

Yes

N/A

Yes (3 steps +OFF)

Hold/Mute Key

N/A

Yes

Music on Hold

N/A

Monitoring the
Line on Hold with
Music

N/A

One-Touch Dial

Resisterable
Number Of
Characters

Yes

Yes (3 steps +OFF)

Ring Volume

Figures of
OneN/ATouch &
Speed Dial

Yes

Yes
3 times/5
min

Yes
3 times/5 min

N/A

Speaker Volume

Speed Dial

N/A

Duplex Speaker
Phone

Automatic Redial

Yes(Detachable)

N/A
40

80x2number

100x2number

20 digits

16 characters

2-11

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-680CN

Group Dial (Up to
X groups)

Yes(6)

Telephone Index
(Search/Speed
dial key)

Yes

Backup Caller ID
list

MFC-685CW

N/A

Tel service

Yes

N/A

Yes

Caller ID

Yes

Call Waiting
Caller ID

N/A

Call from Caller
ID List

N/A

Yes

Call from Call List

N/A

Yes

Call waiting
Ready
External TAD
Interface
Distinctive
Ringing

MFC-885CW

N/A
Yes

Yes
Denmark /
United
Kingdom
only

Yes
Australia /
New
Zealand /
Singapore /
Hong Kong
only

Yes

Yes
Denmark /
United
Kingdom
only

Yes
Australia /
New
Zealand /
Singapore /
Hong Kong
only

Yes

Yes
Denmark /
United
Kingdom
only

Yes
Australia /
New
Zealand /
Singapore /
Hong Kong
only

Yes
Denmark /
United
Kingdom
only

Yes

Yes
Australia /
New
Zealand /
Singapore /
Hong Kong
only

Yes

Yes
Denmark /
United
Kingdom
only

Yes
Australia /
New
Zealand /
Singapore /
Hong Kong
only

COLOR FAX

Modem Speed
(bps)

14,400 (Fax)

Transmission
Speed (sec.)

Approx.6sec (Brother#1,MMR)

ITU-T Group

Display FAX RX

N/A

Yes

Display FAX TX

N/A

Yes

Yes
(by H/S or
SPK)

Yes
(by H/S or SPK)

Coding Method

Fax/Tel Switch

Mono: MH/MR/MMR
Color: JPEG
Yes (Tel)

Yes (Hook
key)

Yes (Tel)

Yes (Hook
key)

Yes (Tel)

Yes (Hook
key)

Super Fine

Yes (TX&RX:B&W only)

Gray Scale

Mono: 64
Color: 256

Contrast
(Auto/S.Light/S.D
ark)

Yes

Dual Access

Yes (B&W only)

Enhanced
Remote Activate

Yes

Station ID
(20 digits/20
characters)
Remote
Maintenance

Yes 20 digits/20 characters

N/A

Yes

RX Mode
Indication

LCD

Resolution
Indication

LCD

2-12

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

Paper Handling
Size

LTR, A4+
LEGAL(with ADF)

Document
Scanning Width

208mm

MFC-680CN

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

Up to 50 / B&W only

Delayed Timer
(up to 50: B&W
only)

N/A

Up to 50 / B&W only

Up to 50 /
B&W only

Polled Sending
(type)
*B&W only

N/A

Yes
(Std/Secure)

Yes
(Std/Secure
)

Batch
Transmission

N/A

Yes (B&W only/not color)

Yes
(Std)

Yes
(Std/Secure
)

Yes (B&W Yes (B&W only/not color)
only/not
color)

Yes
(Std/Secure)

Yes
(Std)

Yes (B&W only/not color)

Approx.4.72sec/page@LTR
Approx. 5.02 sec./page@A4

Quick-Scan
(Memory
transmission)

Memory
Transmission
(ITU-T Test Chart
#1/MMR)

Up to 170pages

Up to 400 pages

Up to
400pages

Up to 400pages

Memory
Transmission
(Brother Chart/
MMR)

Up to 200pages

Up to 480 pages

Up to 480
pages

Up to 480 pages

Yes(210
locations)

Yes(210 locations)

Yes(250 locations)

ECM (Error
Correction Mode)

Yes

Error ReTransmission

N/A

Broadcasting
(Speed+OneTou
ch+Manual)

Yes(90 locations)

Yes(210 locations)

Manual
Broadcasting

Yes(50locations)

Easy
Receive/Fax
Detect

Yes

Polling Receiving
(type)
*B&W only

N/A

Yes
(Std./Seq)

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Std/Seq/Secure/Timer) (Std/Seq/Se (Std./Seq) (Std/Seq/Se (Std./Seq)
cure/Timer)
cure/Timer)

Yes
(Std/Seq/Secure/Timer)

Yes

Auto Reduction
Out-of-Paper
Reception
(ITU-T Test Chart
#1/MMR)

Up to
170 pages

Up to 400 pages

Out-of-Paper
Reception
(Brother Chart/
MMR)

Up to
200 pages

Up to 480 pages

Remote Access

N/A

Yes

Fax Retrieval

N/A

Yes(B&W only)

Fax Forwarding

N/A

Yes(B&W only)

Paging

N/A

Color FAX
(Document
Send/Receive)

Yes/Yes(ITU-T color FAX)

Color FAX
(Memory
Send/Receive)

No /Yes(ITU-T color FAX)

Yes(FAX&V
oice

N/A

Yes(FAX&V
oice

N/A

COLOR PRINTER

2-13

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

Color/Mono

Color

Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)

up to 1200x6000 dpi

Speed (ppm)

25/20 ppm
(Mono/Color: 600x150
dpi)

27/22 ppm
(Mono/Color: 600x150 dpi)

MFC-680CN

30/25 ppm
(Mono/Color: 600x150 dpi)

MFC-685CW

30/25ppm
30/25 ppm
(Mono/Color (Mono/Color:600x150dpi)
: 600x150
dpi)

Fonts CD Based

Yes (35 True Type)

Paper Handling
Size
(Paper Tray)

A4, LTR, LGL, EXE,
JISB5, A5, A6, Photo(102x152mm/4x6"), Indexcard(127x203mm/5x8"), Photo L(89x127mm/3.5x5"),
Photo2L(127x178mm/5x7"), Post Card 1(100x148mm/3.9x5.8"),
Post Card 2 (Double)(148x200mm/5.8x7.8"), C5 Envelope, Com-10,
DL Envelope, Monarch,
JE4 Envelope.

Paper Handling
Size
(Lower Tray)

N/A

Paper Handling
Size
(Photo Paper
Tray)
Media Type
(Paper Tray)

MFC-885CW

30/25 ppm
(Mono/Color: 600x150 dpi)

4"x6"

Plain, Inkjet, Brother Photo,
Other Photo Transparency

N/A

Media Type
(Lower Tray)

N/A

Media Type
(Photo Paper
Tray)

Plain, Inkjet, Glossy

Borderless
ON: 0, 0, 0, 0*
OFF: 3, 3, 3, 3 mm/0.12, 0.12, 0.12, 0.12"**

Print Paper
Margin
(upper, lower,
left, right)

* Borderless For A4, LTR, A6, Photo(102x152mm/4x6"), Indexcard(127x203mm/5x8"), Photo L(89x127mm/3.5x5"), Photo 2L(127x178mm/5x7"), Post Card 1(100x148mm/3.9x5.8") only
** 12, 24, 3, 3 mm/0.47, 0.95, 0.12, 0.12" for Envelops

N/A

Japan Original
Print

Yes (3 sizes)

Variable Dot
Print

1.5 pl

Minimum Droplet
Size

Yes

Color
Enhancement
COLOR COPY

Color

Color/Mono

Speed (cpm)
*time calculated
including paper
feeding
**EU's default is
calculated by
"normal
mode"speed.

18/16 cpm

20/18 cpm

22/20 cpm

Yes (99)

Multi Copy
(Stack)
Multi Copy (Sort)

22/20cpm

N/A

Yes(Mono Only)

Yes

Reduction/Enlarg
ement (%)

25 -- 400 in 1% increments

Resolution
(Mono)
(horizontal x
vertical)

Print: Max. 1200x1200 dpi
Scan: Max. 600x1200 dpi

Resolution
(Color)
(horizontal x
vertical)

Print: Max. 600x1200 dpi
Scan: Max. 600x1200 dpi

2-14

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C
N in 1

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-680CN

2in1/4in1
A4/LTR/Legal only
*Mono only

MFC-885CW

2in1/4in1, A4/LTR/Legal, Mono&Color

Poster

Yes (3x3)

Image
Enhancement

N/A

Paper Handling
Size (Paper
Tray)
Paper Handling
Size
(Lower Tray)

Letter/Legal/A4/A5/10(W)x15(H)cm(4"x6")

Paper Handling
Size
(Photo Paper
Tray)

N/A

Letter/Legal/A4/A5

N/A

4"x6"

Media Type
(Paper Tray)

Plain, Inkjet, Brother Photo,
Other Photo Transparency

Media Type
(Lower Tray)

N/A

Media Type
(Photo Paper
Tray)

Plain, Inkjet, Glossy

N/A

Print Paper
Margin
(upper, lower,
left, right)
Resolution
Indication

MFC-685CW

3, 3, 3, 3 mm
(0.12, 0.12, 0.12, 0.12")

LCD

N/A

LCD

COLOR SCANNER

Color/Mono

Color

Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)

600x2400 dpi

Interpolated
Resolution (dpi)

up to 19200x19200 dpi
(For XP, with special tool. 1200x1200 dpi for XP w/o special tool)

Gray Scale

256

Document
Scanning width

210 mm

Scan Image

Yes (Scan Key)

Scan / OCR

Yes (Scan Key)

Scan to E-mail

Yes (Scan Key)

Scan to File

Yes (Scan Key)

Scan to Media
(Media = Card or
USB memory)

N/A

Yes (Scan Key)

N/A

Scan speed
(Mono/Color)
*@100dpi

Max.3.59/5.66 sec (Letter)
Max.3.82/6.02 sec (A4)

Color Depth
(Input/Output)

36/24 bit color processing

MESSAGE CENTER

TAD

N/A

Yes

2-15

Yes

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-680CN

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

ICM Recording
Time

N/A

Toll Saver

N/A

Yes

Recording
Conversation

N/A

Yes

N/A

OGM
(MC/TAD,F/T)

N/A

Yes

User Recording
OGM TIME
(MC/TAD, F/T)

N/A

Yes(20sec)

Max.29minutes Or Max.99 msgs (Max.180sec./1msg)

PC FAX

Supplier

Brother

Color/Mono

Mono

Sending

Yes

Yes (Network/USB)

Receiving

N/A

Yes (Network/USB)
NA for MAC

PC-Fax Protocol

TX: PC-FAX Driver

Broadcasting

RX: Class 2
TX: PC-FAX Driver
Up to 50

PHOTO CAPTURE CENTER

Acceptable
Media Card &
Size

Compact Flash (Type-1only, - for Type2&Micro-Drive): 4MB-8GB
Memory Stick: 16MB-128MB (Duo with Adopter)
Memory Stick Pro: 256MB-8GB
(MagicGate: Yes if not use MG function)
Secure Digital (SD & MMC): 16MB-2GB (MiniSD with Adopter)
Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC): 4-8GB
xD Picture Card: 16MB-512MB
xD Picture Card Type M/Type H: 256MB-2GB

N/A

Acceptable USB
flash memory
Size

Up tp 8GB

Paper Handling
Size & Type
(Paper Tray)

Letter
10x15 cm (4x6")
13x18 cm (5x7")
A4

Plain Paper
Inkjet Paper
Brother Photo
Other Photo

Paper Handling
Size & Type
(Photo Paper
Tray)

N/A

Print Paper
Margin
(upper, lower,
left, right)
Available paper
size for full (Max)
size printing
Direct Print Size
for A4/LTR

4"x6"

Borderless (For all size)
ON: 0, 0, 0, 0
OFF: 3, 3, 3, 3 mm/0.12, 0.12, 0.12, 0.12"

10x15cm (4x6")/
13x18cm (5x7") only

All size

10x15cm (4x6")/
13x18cm (5x7") only

10x8 cm (4x3")
13x9 cm (5x3.5")
15x10 cm (6x4")
18x13 cm (7x5")
20x15 cm (8x6")

10x8 cm (4x3")
13x9 cm (5x3.5")
15x10 cm (6x4")
18x13 cm (7x5")
20x15 cm (8x6")
Max.Size

Borderless /
Cropping (Full
Auto)

Yes/Yes

Media Format

DPOF, Exif DCF

Image Format
Print by Media
Card/USB
memory

Photo Print: JPEG/JPEG

2-16

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C
Color
Enhancement

MFC-265C

N/A

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

MFC-680CN

N/A

Removable Disk Yes (read & write)(USB
(Media Card/USB memory only, Card is
memory)
N/A)

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

Yes

Yes (read & write)/Yes (read & write)

Scan to Media
(Media = Card or
USB memory)

N/A

Color: JPEG/PDF
B&W: TIFF/PDF

Network Media
Card/USB
memory access

N/A

Yes (read & write)

Rotate Function

N/A

Yes

Monochrome/Se
pia

N/A

Yes

Trimming

N/A

Yes

Search from date

N/A

Yes

Slide-show

N/A

Photo Enhance

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes: Standard

NETWORK

COMMON

Standard/Option
(User Option or
Dealer Option)
ITU SUB
Addressing

N/A

Printer

N/A

Yes

Scanner

N/A

Yes

PC FAX

N/A

Yes

Internet FAX
(Firmware)

N/A

Format (Scan to
E-mail server)

N/A

TCP/IP
(IPv4)

Protocols

N/A

ARP/RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA, NetBIOS, WINS

Protocols

N/A

LPR/LPD, Port9100

Protocols

N/A

mDNS, FTP,
TELNET, SNMP, TFTP, Scanner port

Support
Protocols

Protocols

N/A

LDAP

N/A

Network
Management
(BRAdmin Light)

N/A

Yes

Network
Management
(Network Remote
Setup)

N/A

Yes

Network
Management
(MIBN/AII as well
as Brother
private MIB)

N/A

Yes

Network reset

N/A

Yes (for WLAN & WIRED at once)
(in LAN Menu )

N/A

Embedded (NC-150h)

WIRED

Model name
(Ether)

2-17

Confidential

AREA

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Europe

USA /
Canada

Asia /
Oceania

USA /
Canada

Europe

Asia /
Oceania

Model name
MFC-235C
Network
connection
(Ether)

MFC-265C

MFC-260C

MFC-465CN

N/A

MFC-680CN

MFC-685CW

MFC-885CW

Ethernet 10/100BASE-TX Auto Negotiation

WIRELESS

Model name
(Wireless)

N/A

Network
connection
(Wireless)

N/A

IEEE 802.11b/g

Wireless
Security

N/A

SSID (32 chr)
WEP 64/128bit
WPA-TKIP/AES

Wi-Fi
Certification

N/A

Secure EZ Setup

N/A

Embedded(NC-160w)

**NO LEAP**
Wifi B and G
Yes
(for W-LAN model)
N/A

WCN
N/A

AOSS

Yes
N/A

Auto Switch WLAN/WIRED LAN

Others

N/A

Cordless Phone

Remote
Setup(USB)

Yes
(up to 4units)

N/A

Yes

Web translator

N/A

Face Filter
Application (CDROM)

Yes

PictBridge

Paper Size

A4/Letter/4"x6"/Printer Setting

Paper Type

Plain Paper/Inkjet Paper/Glossy/Printer Setting

8"x6"(20cmx15cm)

Direct Print Size
for A4/LTR

Max.Size Only

Yes/No

Borderless /
Cropping (Full
Auto)
Index Print

N/A

DPOF

Yes

Colour
Enhancement
Print Quality

N/A

Yes

Normal/Fine/Printer Setting

2-18

Confidential

CHAPTER 3
THEORY OF OPERATION

Confidential

CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION
This chapter gives an overview of the scanning and printing mechanisms as well as the sensors,
actuators, and control electronics. It aids in understanding the basic principles of operation as
well as locating defects for troubleshooting.

CONTENTS
3.1

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................3-1

3.2

MECHANICAL COMPONENTS.................................................................................3-2
3.2.1

Scanner Mechanism ......................................................................................3-5

3.2.2

Printing Mechanism .......................................................................................3-8

3.2.2.1

Ink supply and ink jet mechanism ............................................................3-9

[1]

Overview ..............................................................................................3-9

[2]

Features ............................................................................................. 3-10

[3]

Head/carriage unit ............................................................................... 3-11

[4]

Ink cartridges ...................................................................................... 3-18

[5]

Ink refill assembly................................................................................ 3-20

[6]

Ink supply tubes .................................................................................. 3-21

3.2.2.2

Head maintenance mechanism.............................................................. 3-22

[1]

Overview ............................................................................................ 3-22

[2]

Maintenance unit components............................................................... 3-22

[3]

Mechanisms constituting the head maintenance mechanism .................... 3-24

[4]

Purge mechanism details ..................................................................... 3-29

3.2.2.3

Carriage drive mechanism.................................................................... 3-34

3.2.2.4

Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms ............... 3-38

3.2.3
3.3

Sensors and Actuators ................................................................................ 3-44

CONTROL ELECTRONICS.................................................................................... 3-47
3.3.1

Components ............................................................................................... 3-47

Confidential

3.1 OVERVIEW

Cordless
handsets

Host

WLAN

USB
interface

*5
WLAN
PCB

LAN

- Compact Flash
- Memory Stick
- SD Memory Card
- xD-Picture Card

- Digital camera
(with PictBridge)
- USB flash memory
drive

*1
Monochrome
LCD

Control
panel

Color
LCD

*3
Backup
battery

*4
Cordless
PCB

Fax Control Section

LAN
interface

*7
PhotoCapture
Center

USB
interface

Printer Control Section

SDAA

Print data
Line

Speaker

MJ PCB
*4
Charge
PCB

*8
Handset

Scanner unit
- CIS unit
- CIS motor
*9

ADF unit
- ADF motor

Ink jet printer unit
- Head/carriage unit
- Carriage PCB with
head flat cables
- Carriage motor
- Ink refill ASSY
- Maintenance unit

Paper feeding
mechanism
- Paper feed
motor

Power
supply

(Mini3e_MFC_Overview)

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9

3-1

For models with monochrome LCD
For models with color LCD
For models with backup battery
For models with cordless handsets
For wireless LAN-enabled models
For wired LAN-enabled models
For models with PhotoCapture Center
For models with handset
For models with ADF

Confidential

3.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
This machine consists of the following mechanisms and uses motors (four in models with ADF and
three in models without ADF), two encoders, various sensors, and thermistors.
Scanner Mechanism
Document path for ADF scanning

(Left)

(Right)

Document for flat-bed scanning

(3_01)

Printing Mechanism
Ink supply and ink jet mechanism, head maintenance mechanism, and carriage drive mechanism.

(Rear)

(Front)

- Ink supply and ink jet mechanism
- Head maintenance mechanism
- Carriage drive mechanism
(3_01_1)

3-2

Confidential

Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms

Recording paper path

(Rear)

(Front)

(Section_PF)

3-3

Confidential

Scanner Mechanism
(See Section 3.2.1.)

Printing Mechanism
(See Section 3.2.2.)

- Document scanning mechanism

CIS motor
(stepping motor)

- Automatic document feeder (ADF)
mechanism*1

ADF motor*1
(stepping motor)

- Ink supply and ink jet mechanism
(See Section 3.2.2.1.)
- Head maintenance mechanism
(head capping, carriage lock, purge, head
wiper, and air removing)
(See Section 3.2.2.2.)

Paper feed motor
(DC motor)

- Carriage drive mechanism
(See Section 3.2.2.3.)

Carriage motor
(DC motor)

- Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and
ejecting mechanisms
(See Section 3.2.2.4.)

Paper feed motor
(DC motor)

Encoders
(See Section 3.2.3.)

- Carriage motor (CR) encoder
- Paper feed motor (PF) encoder

Sensors
(See Section 3.2.3.)

- Document front and rear sensors*1
- Scanner/ink cartridge cover sensor
- Registration sensor
- Paper width (media) sensor
- Ink cartridge sensors
- Purge cam switch
- Hook switch*2

Thermistors
(See Section 3.2.3.)

- Head thermistor
- Casing internal temperature thermistor
*1 For models with ADF
*2 For models with handset

3-4

Confidential

3.2.1 Scanner Mechanism

This mechanism consists of the automatic document feeder (ADF)*, document cover, and scanner
unit (scanner cover).
The scanner unit consists of a scanner top cover, CIS unit, CIS drive assembly, and scanner base.
The detailed illustration on the next page shows the components making up the ADF: document
pull-in roller, document separation roller, document feed rollers, ADF motor, and document front
and rear sensors.
For further details on the sensors, see Section 3.2.3.

ADF unit*

Document cover

144424443

*For models with ADF

ADF & document
cover ASSY

144424443

White reference film
Scanner top cover

CIS drive assembly
(CIS motor)

CIS drive belt
CIS flat cable

Scanner unit
(Scanner cover)

Scanner base

CIS idle pulley
CIS unit
CIS rail

(3_02_e)

3-5

Confidential

Models with ADF

Document ejection pinch rollers
Document feed roller 1
Separation pad
Document front sensor actuator
Document rear sensor actuator

ADF pull-in piece

Document path for
ADF scanning

Document feed roller 2

(Left)
Pinch rollers 2
ADF motor
Document pull-in roller
Document separation roller
Pinch rollers 1

CIS unit

Document rear sensor actuator

Document ejection pinch rollers
Document feed roller 1
Separation pad
Document front sensor actuator
ADF pull-in piece
ADF motor

Ejected document support section
Document guides
Document cover

Document feed roller 2
(Right)

(Left)

Pinch rollers 2
Document for flat-bed scanning
CIS unit

Document pull-in roller
Document separation roller
Pinch rollers 1

(3_02_1)

Models with ADF offer two types of scanning: ADF scanning and flat-bed scanning. They
automatically switch to the former at the start of a scan operation if the document front sensor
inside the ADF detects a document. Models without ADF offer only flat-bed scanning.

3-6

Confidential

(1) ADF scanning: Document moves across stationary CIS unit (Only for models with ADF)
Placing a document face down in the ADF activates the document front sensor, switching to ADF
scanning.
The CIS drive mechanism (details below) operates for each scanning command executed. First, the
CIS motor moves the CIS unit to the white reference film for white level compensation. Secondly,
the ADF motor rotates the document pull-in roller* to pull the document into the ADF. (*This roller
is added to this series of machines in order to pull in documents horizontally placed.) Thirdly, the
CIS motor again moves the CIS unit to the ADF scanning position.
The document separation roller feeds the pages one at a time, starting from the bottom, to the
document feed rollers (1 and 2), which rotate to move the page in a curve left, up, and right. The
page is scanned as it passes over the CIS unit. It then leaves the machine face up onto the ejected
document support section of the document guides. The machine ejects subsequent pages under this
one to preserve the document page order.

(2) Flat-bed scanning: CIS unit moves under stationary document
The user lifts the document cover, places a page (or open book) face down on the glass plate, and
closes the document cover.
The CIS drive mechanism (details below) operates for each scanning command executed. The CIS
unit first moves to the white reference film for white level compensation. It then moves right,
scanning as it goes. It returns to its home position after the scan.

CIS drive mechanism
The contact image sensor (CIS) unit rides along the CIS rail, driven by the CIS drive belt.
Clockwise motion of the CIS motor moves the unit to the right; counterclockwise motion, to the left.
This unit consists of the document illumination LED array, the lens array gathering the light
reflected from the scanned image, and the CIS PCB converting the light input to pixel data output.

3-7

Confidential

3.2.2 Printing Mechanism

The printing mechanism consists of the following.

Ink supply and ink jet mechanism (Section 3.2.2.1)
Head maintenance mechanism (Section 3.2.2.2)
Carriage drive mechanism (Section 3.2.2.3)
Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms (Section 3.2.2.4)

The ink supply mechanism supplies ink to the head/carriage unit, in which the ink jet mechanism
sprays ink droplets from the head nozzles onto paper.
The major components of the ink supply mechanism are:
- Ink refill assembly: This secures the ink cartridges and connects them to the corresponding ink
supply tubes.
- Ink supply tubes: These supply the head/carriage unit with ink fed from the ink cartridges via the
ink refill assembly.
The major components of the ink jet mechanism (head/carriage unit) are:
- Front end: This is an ink-jet head consisting of piezoelectric plate (PZT), metal plates, nozzle
plate, and head driver. It jets out ink to produce images on paper.
- Back end: This consists of damper assemblies and an air vent unit. Each damper assembly
dampens the ink pressure fluctuations in the corresponding ink supply tube and collects air
bubbles that result from pressure changes on the ink.
To keep the optimum head performance, the head maintenance mechanism caps the head nozzles
to prevent them from drying up, purges for removing air bubbles from the head/maintenance unit,
and wipes off any ink remaining on the head nozzle surface.
The carriage drive mechanism moves the head/carriage unit with a DC motor (carriage motor)
along the recording paper. It has a CR encoder sensor that scans the CR encoder strip and monitors
the current head position relative to the home position and the current travel speed.
The paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms are driven by a single DC
motor (paper feed motor).
The major components are:
- Paper tray: Recording paper is stored in this tray.
- Paper pull-in rollers and their holder: These pull in paper into the machine.
- Bank ASSY: This separates paper, sheet by sheet to feed it into the printer section.
- Jam clear cover: Removing this cover allows the user to access paper jammed. It also guides
paper pulled in from the paper tray into the printer section.
- Paper feed roller: This roller performs paper registration and feeds paper to the printer section
precisely.
- Paper ejection roller: This roller ejects paper and keeps paper tension tight.
- Paper feed motor: This motor is the drive source for rollers.
- Clutch gear: This gear switches the transmission route of the paper feed motor rotation torque
between three gears--SF changeover gear, HS changeover gear, and purge gear, enabling the
torque to be applied to the various mechanisms.
- PF rotary encoder: This generates a signal indicating the rotation speed of the PF roller gear. The
signal is sent to the controller and used for controlling the paper feed position and speed.
3-8

Confidential

3.2.2.1
[1]

Ink supply and ink jet mechanism

Overview

The ink supply and ink-jet mechanism consists of the head/carriage unit, four ink cartridges, ink
refill assembly, and ink supply tubes.
The head/carriage unit scans the surface of the recording paper, jetting out ink supplied through the
ink supply tubes onto the paper to produce images. For further details, see "[ 3 ] Head/carriage
unit" below.
The four ink cartridges (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta) are mounted on the ink refill assembly.
For further details, see "[ 4 ] Ink cartridges" below.
The ink refill assembly secures the ink cartridges and connects them to the corresponding ink
supply tubes. For further details, see "[ 5 ] Ink refill assembly" below.
The ink supply tubes supply the head/carriage unit with ink fed from the ink cartridges via the ink
refill assembly. For further details, see "[ 6 ] Ink supply tubes" below.

(Maintenance unit)

(Ink absorber box)
Head/carriage unit

(Flushing box)

Ink supply tubes

Ink refill assembly
(3_03)

3-9

Confidential

[2]

Features

A distinct feature of this machine is the use of ink supply tubes between the ink cartridges and the
head/carriage unit. Relieving the head/carriage unit of the task of carrying heavy ink cartridges back
and forth across the page, the approach generally adopted by other ink-jet printers, offers the
following advantages.
- Smaller unit size--lower height, in particular
- Lower power consumption
- Lower noise levels
- Lower vibration
During print operation, the ink-jet mechanism inside the head/carriage unit sprays ink droplets from
the head nozzles. The loss of this ink from the head produces a negative pressure that replenishes
the head with ink from the ink tank through the supply tubes.
Note, however, that the above ink flow is only possible when the ink supply tubes are full of ink.
The factory therefore primes the ink supply path by applying strong suction to the head nozzles with
the maintenance unit to suck both air and ink through the ink supply tubes.
Leaving too long interval between this priming and actual use, however, risks air bubbles, increased
viscosity, and other quality issues with the ink in the supply tubes. Before using this machine for the
first time, therefore, this machine automatically replaces the ink supply path contents with fresh ink
using an initial purge, a repeat of this priming operation.
When the machine is on standby, a constant negative pressure (which is produced according to the
difference in height between the head/carriage unit and ink cartridges) is applied to the rear of the
print head, thus preventing ink from leading out of those nozzles.
NOTE: The above applies only as long as this machine rests on a horizontal surface. Standing this
machine on end or even just tilting it backwards with the print head uncapped risks overcoming this
slight negative pressure preventing ink leakage from the head nozzles.
Piezoelectric ceramic actuators inside the print head convert this ink to droplets sprayed onto the
paper. For further details, see "[ 3 ] Head/carriage unit" below.

3-10

Confidential

[3]

Head/carriage unit

The head/carriage unit consists of a front end (ink-jet head) and a back end (buffer and air vent unit)
as shown below.
The front end consists of metal plates laminated together and etched to form ink flow channels.
Piezoelectric ceramic actuators generate the spray pressure. The response of individual front ends
to applied voltages and waveforms varies, however, because of the nature of piezoelectric materials,
fluctuation in manufacturing accuracy, and other factors. The front end therefore leaves the
production line with head property labels giving property data. The manufacturer writes this data to
the EEPROM on the main PCB incorporating this unit to insure consistent performance without
fluctuations.

Back end
(Buffer and
air vent unit)

Head driver

Filter
Piezo plate

Metal plates

Nozzle plate

3-11

Front end
(Ink-jet head)

(Head)

Confidential

Front end

Front end components and their main roles
- Piezoelectric plate
Applying a voltage stretches the plate, serving as the actuator for spraying ink. Consisting of thin
piezoelectric plates laminated together, this plate can be driven even by a low voltage.
- Filter
This removes foreign materials from the ink.
- Metal plates
These form the head nozzle pressure chambers, ink flow paths, and manifolds.
- Nozzle plate
This plate has a total of 376 nozzles, 47 nozzles x 2 lines staggered x 4 colors (black, yellow,
cyan, and magenta).
- Head driver
This flexible circuit board holds the piezoelectric driver chip.
Nozzle array (head bottom plate viewed from the top)
Print head travel direction

Cyan

Yellow

Magenta

Paper feed direction

Black

Yellow

Cyan

Magenta

0.1693

Channels

Nozzles

0.1693

3.2173
2.8787
6.096
2.8787
8.9747

Ink-jet unit (Viewed from the top)

3-12

(Nozzle)

Confidential

Ink spray function
The head employs drop-on-demand ink-jet printing.
Print commands to the drive circuit apply a bias voltage to the layer electrodes on the piezoelectric
ceramic surface stretching the elements perpendicular to that surface. Drive signals removing this
voltage for specific channel electrodes allow the piezoelectric elements to return to their original
shape, sucking ink into the corresponding channels*. Reapplying the bias voltage stretches the
elements once again, applying pressure to the ink, spraying it from the head nozzle. The ink drop
hits the paper on the platen, forming a dot.
* Pressure chambers for individual nozzles

3-13

Confidential

Back end

Damper ASSY (Black)

Right chamber
Left chamber

Damper ASSY (Yellow)

Right chamber

Shut-off valves

Left chamber
Air vent unit
Damper ASSY (Cyan)

Left chamber
Right
chamber

Damper ASSY (Magenta)

(Air vent rods)
Left chamber

(Air vent cap)

(A part of maintenance unit)
Right chamber
(BackEnd)

Back end components and their main roles
- Damper assemblies
Each assembly has two roles: dampening the ink pressure fluctuations* in the ink supply tube as
the carriage moves and collecting air bubbles that grow in the ink flow path.
* Ink pressure fluctuations: As the head/carriage unit travels, inertia means that the ink remains in the same
place, temporarily raising or lowering the pressure in the right chamber.

- Air vent unit
At regular scheduled intervals, this vents any air bubbles that have accumulated in the damper
assemblies. The air vent rods in the maintenance unit push up the shut-off valves, opening the air
vent flow paths.

3-14

Confidential

Damping
Without damping, ink pressure fluctuations directly affect the size of ink-jet head droplets, risking
lower print quality.
Each damper assembly has two chambers. The one on the right in the illustration below has a loose
film across its top and serves as a damper. The film immediately flexes in and out in response to
falls and rises in pressure, adjusting the chamber volume to counteract pressure fluctuations in the
ink supply tubes.
Film

This loose film flexes in and out in
response to changes in ink pressure.

Left chamber

(DamperFunc)

Air buffering
Liquid ink contains trace amounts of air. These molecules coalesce into air bubbles as the
piezoelectric ceramic actuators vary the pressure on the ink in the ink-jet head channel. (See the
illustration on page 3-12.) Removing as many of these bubbles as possible before the ink reaches
the ink-jet head is essential to maintaining proper print quality. The above illustration shows how
the damper assemblies provide air buffers, the chambers on the left, for consolidating these air
bubbles away from the ink-jet head and vent flow paths for purging them at regular scheduled
intervals.

3-15

Confidential

[ Tip: Air bubble growth ]
Liquid ink contains trace amounts of air. The amount varies with the pressure on the ink because
increasing the pressure raises the ink's ability to absorb air from its surroundings and lowering the
pressure forces the ink to give up some of this air.
The ink pressure fluctuations caused by the piezoelectric ceramic actuators repeatedly expand and
contract any air bubbles, growing them larger gradually. This is because the amount of the air per
unit area passing through the boundary surface between the ink and the bubble is always constant
but the boundary surface area decreases or increases when the bubble contracts or expands,
respectively.
That is, when the pressure becomes high, the bubble contracts so that the amount of air moving from
the bubble to the ink decreases in proportion to the boundary surface area decreased. On the
contrary, when the pressure becomes low, the bubble expands so that the amount of air moving from
the ink to the bubble increases in proportion to the boundary surface area increased.
The design therefore compensates by allowing the purging/flushing of air bubbles during printing to
keep the amount of air dissolved in the ink to a minimum.

Ink pressure in the ink supply tubes
High

Low
Bubble

Bubble

Ink

: Pressure

Ink

(GrowthBubble)

(GrowingBubble)

: Air flow

3-16

Confidential

[ Tip: What's so bad about air bubble growth? ]
Pressure fluctuations do not affect the volume of a liquid (ink), but Boyle's Law says that the
volume of a gas (air) varies with the pressure on it. The main issue with air bubbles in the ink flow
path is their damping effect, absorbing the pressure from the piezoelectric ceramic actuators and
thus degrading ink-jet performance.
Piezoelectric element

Pressure chamber
(Channel)

Bubble (Without pressure)

Bubble (High pressure)

(Head_bubble)

The above illustration shows an example of an extremely large air bubble reaching the head nozzle
from the channel ink flow path; the dotted line, the changes resulting from applying a voltage to the
laminated electrode, expanding the piezoelectric ceramic actuator. Note how contraction of the air
bubble absorbs the pressure from the piezoelectric ceramic actuator, preventing ink ejection.

3-17

Confidential

[4]

Ink cartridges
Ink empty

Filled with ink

Disc valve S

Air
Sensor actuator
Ink cartridge
sensor
Ink

(Ink_cartridge)

Disc valve D

Ink cartridge features
This machine uses four ink cartridges: a black one and three color ones with a slightly lower
capacity. It features horizontal insertion in the ink refill base over plastic needles.
Each cartridge has two ports: one supplying the ink for printing and another supplying air to replace
that ink. Both ports have a disc valve preventing ink leakage. Mounting a cartridge over the plastic
needles in the ink refill base forces these valves open to secure flow paths for both the ink and the
air.

Inks
"Removing air"
An earlier page explained how too much air in the ink risks air bubbles degrading ink-jet
performance. The manufacturing process prevents such air bubbles with a step, deaeration, that
removes air from the ink before injection into the cartridge. Vacuum packaging then prevents air
contamination during shipping and storage.
"Pigment-based ink"
Previous Brother machines used only dye-based inks. This one switches to a pigment-based ink for
black only, reducing fuzziness from print character outlines, boosting resolution for black dots, and
producing clearer images on plain paper.
This machine provides separate head caps and individual vent unit drive mechanisms for this black
pigment-based ink and its dye-based color counterparts. Such special design measures are
necessary because any mixing of the two types triggers a chemical reaction producing residue
clogging head nozzles, filters, maintenance unit piping, and other components, degrading print
performance.

3-18

Confidential

Ink cartridge components and their main roles
- Disc valve S
A plastic needle in the refill base opens this valve to supply air to the ink cartridge. Removing
the ink cartridge closes this valve to prevent leakage due to ink backflow.
- Disc valve D
A plastic needle in the refill base opens this valve to allow ink to flow out of the ink cartridge.
Removing the ink cartridge closes this valve to prevent leakage.
- Sensor actuator
This actuator indicates the amount of ink remaining. Certain positions cut the light beam to the
ink cartridge sensor on the ink cartridge PCB inside the ink refill assembly.
Filled with ink

Ink near empty

No ink cartridge loaded

Sensor actuator

Ink cartridge sensor
(InkCartridgeSensor)

These ink cartridges are single-use affairs. There is no provision for refilling them. The design
reduces environment load by using no metals and only burnable materials yielding no toxic
substances.

Ink near-empty detection
The ink refill assembly has four ink cartridge sensors (photosensors of transparent type) that
monitor the ink levels with sensor actuators inside the ink cartridges.
Attached to one end of the sensor actuator is a float. When there is ink in the cartridge, buoyancy
lifts the float, rotating the sensor actuator about a pivot near the center of the actuator to block the
light beam to the sensor, indicating that there is ink. As the ink level in the ink cartridge drops,
however, the float falls, eventually moving the sensor actuator out of the beam.
Light hitting the sensor is the signal that ink is running low ("Ink near-empty"), activating a firmware
counter tracking ink usage during ink-jet printing, purges, and other operations. When this counter
reaches a predetermined limit, the firmware considers the "ink empty" and prompts the user to
replace it.

3-19

Confidential

[5]

Ink refill assembly

Ink refill case

Ink cartridge PCB

Ink cartridge sensors
Cartridge lock levers

Ink absorber felt

Ink refill base
Ink tube joints
(3_04)

3-20

Confidential

Ink refill assembly components and their main roles
-

Ink refill case
Cartridge lock levers
Ink refill base
Ink tube joints
Ink cartridge sensors (on the ink cartridge PCB)
Ink absorber felts

Inserting the ink cartridges into the ink refill case and securing them with the cartridge lock levers
forces the cartridges' ink supply ports into close contact with the ink refill base to prevent ink
leakage.
The ink from the ink cartridges flows through the ink refill base into the ink supply tubes connected
to the ink tube joints. As the ink level in an ink cartridge drops, the pressure inside falls, drawing air
in the ink cartridge.
An ink cartridge sensor actuator blocking light to an ink cartridge sensor indicates that there is ink
in the ink cartridge. When ink runs low, the actuator moves out of the beam, activating the sensor
("Ink near-empty"). (Note that the firmware also interprets a missing ink cartridge as running low on
ink.)
At the back of and beneath the ink refill case are ink absorber felts that absorb any ink that leaks
from the ink cartridges, limiting its spread and thus reducing the risk of damage to other components.

[6]

Ink supply tubes

These are made of an elastomer providing a highly impermeable barrier against air ingress and
drying out of the ink during extended periods of nonuse. This material is also soft and highly
flexible to better withstand the sharp and frequent bending associated with high-speed head
operation repeatedly over extended periods.

3-21

Confidential

3.2.2.2
[1]

Head maintenance mechanism

Overview

The head maintenance mechanism consists of the maintenance unit and the ink absorber box. (See
the illustration below.)
The maintenance unit has the following mechanisms.
- Head capping mechanism (See page 3-24.)
- Carriage lock mechanism (See page 3-25.)
- Purge mechanism (See page 3-25.)
- Head wiper mechanism (See page 3-27.)
- Air removing mechanism (See page 3-28.)
The ink absorber box absorbs the ink sucked out by purge operations.
Maintenance unit

Ink absorber box
(Head/carriage unit)

(Ink supply tubes)

Flushing box

(Ink refill assembly)
(3_05)

[2]

Maintenance unit components

See the illustration given on the next page.
- Pump switching unit
This switches the application target of the negative pressure generated by the tube pump (see the
next page) between the head cap for black ink, the one for color ink, and the air vent cap. Usually
the pump switching unit is switched to the opening tube to the atmospheric air so that the
pressure in the head caps and air vent cap is equal to the normal atmospheric pressure.
- Purge cam
This rotating cam drives the carriage lock, the pump switching unit, the air vent rods, the head
wiper, etc.
- Head/carriage lock
This locks the head/carriage unit in its home position so that the head cap unit (see the next page)
protects the head nozzles.
3-22

Confidential

- Purge gear and purge bevel gear
These gears transmit the power from the clutch gear (detailed in [ 4 ] later) to the planetary arm.
- Planetary arm
This switches power to the tube pump or pump switching unit depending on the direction of paper
feed motor rotation.
- Tube pump
A roller squeezes the main drain tube looped inside, forcing their contents toward the ink
absorber box and creating negative pressure.
- Head cap unit
When the power is off or the machine is not printing, the head cap unit fits tightly over the print
head to prevent the head nozzles from drying up and to seal the head nozzles for purge operations
to suck up old ink.
- Air vent cap and rods
During air venting with the tube pump, the air vent cap fits tightly over the air vent unit in the
head/carriage unit so that the negative pressure applies to the air vent unit. Pushing up the air
vent rods opens the shut-off valves inside the air vent unit, removing air trapped in the damper
assemblies. (For the air vent unit, see Section 3.2.2.1, [ 3 ].)
- Head wiper
As the head/carriage unit moves, this wipes off any ink remaining on the head nozzle surface.
- Head cap holder
This moves to the right together with the head/carriage unit as the latter returns to its home
position. Rightward motion of the head cap holder turns the lift arms, fitting the head cap unit
tightly over the print head to seal the head nozzles.

Viewed from the top

Viewed from the bottom
Pump switching unit

Air vent cap

Head cap unit
Air vent rods

Tube pump

Purge cam

Purge gear

Head wiper

Head cap holder

Purge bevel gear
Planetary arm
Purge gear

Head/carriage lock
(3_05_1)

3-23

(3_05_2)

Confidential

[3]

Mechanisms constituting the head maintenance mechanism

(1) Head capping mechanism

When the power is off or the machine is not printing, this mechanism fits the head cap unit (which
contains two head caps) tightly over the print head to prevent the head nozzles from drying up and
to keep dust off the head nozzle surface.
This mechanism is driven by the head/carriage unit. When the head/carriage unit returns to its home
position, it presses against the head cap holder in the maintenance unit. The lift arms in the
maintenance unit raise the head cap unit, fitting it tightly over the head nozzle surface to protect it.

Head/carriage unit

Head cap holder
Head cap unit
(Containing two
head caps)

Lift arms

(Purge_3_1)

Print head

Head cap for black ink
Head cap for color ink
Black drain tube

Pump switching unit
To opening to
atmospheric air
Color drain tube
To air vent cap
Main drain tube
(Purge_3_2)

3-24

Confidential

(2) Carriage lock mechanism

This mechanism locks the head/carriage unit to prevent the head nozzles from getting out of the
head cap unit accidentally due to external vibration or impact when the machine is not printing,
when the power is off, or during transport.
Driving the purge cam causes the carriage lock to pop up in order to lock the head/carriage unit
when the head caps are tightly pressed against the ink-jet units.
Maintenance unit

(Front)
Purge cam

(3_09)

Carriage lock

(3) Purge mechanism

Driving the purge cam to the pump switching unit's black or color ink drain position reverses the
paper feed motor and activates the tube pump, producing negative pressure to drain the air and old
ink from the head nozzles and channels into the ink absorber box.
Purge cam

Pump switching unit
Air vent tube

Main drain tube

Opening tube to
the atmospheric air

Purge bevel gear
Color drain tube
Tube pump
Black drain tube
Main drain tube

3-25

(3_10)

Confidential

(3.1) Switching pump
The pump switching unit switches the application target of the negative pressure generated by the
pump between the head cap for black ink, the one for color ink, and the air vent cap.

When the purge cam is in a head capping position and the carriage lock fits the head cap unit tightly
over the print head, the pump switching unit is switched to the opening tube to the atmospheric air
so that the pressure in the head caps and air vent cap returns to the normal atmospheric pressure.
Print head

Head cap for black ink
Head cap for color ink
Black drain tube

Pump switching unit
To opening to
atmospheric air
Color drain tube
To air vent cap
Main drain tube
(Purge_3_2)

(3.2) Draining ink
The tube pump consists of a pump gear and tube roller. As the pump gear rotates, the tube roller on
its circumference squeezes the main drain tube looped around the pump gear, forcing its content
toward the ink absorber box and creating negative pressure.
Main drain tube
Pump gear

Tube pump

Tube roller
(TubePump)

For details about the purge mechanism, see [ 4 ] below.

3-26

Confidential

(4) Head wiper mechanism
After the purge operation, the purge cam pushes up the head wiper, wiping off any ink remaining on
the head nozzle surface as the head/carriage unit moves from right to left.

Maintenance unit

Head wiper
Purge cam

3-27

(3_11)

Confidential

(5) Air removing mechanism
Another position of the purge cam shifts the slide cams, producing vertical motion of the air vent
rods. Pushing up the air vent rods opens the shut-off valves inside the air vent unit of the
head/carriage unit. Simultaneously adding negative pressure from the tube pump removes air
trapped in the damper assemblies.
Maintenance unit
Clutch gear
Air vent rods
Air vent cap

Purge gear

Slide cam
for black ink

Slide cam
for color ink

(3_12)

Purge cam

Damper ASSY (Black)

Right chamber

Left chamber

Damper ASSY (Yellow)

Right chamber

Shut-off valves

Left chamber
Air vent unit

Damper ASSY (Cyan)

Left chamber
Right
chamber

Damper ASSY (Magenta)

(Air vent rods)
Left chamber

(Air vent cap)

(A part of maintenance unit)
Right chamber
(BackEnd)

3-28

Confidential

[4]

Purge mechanism details

This mechanism draws its power from the paper feed motor on the left side of the engine chassis.
Power transmission route from paper feed motor to maintenance unit
The paper feed motor drives the PF roller gear L that rotates the paper feed roller. At the right end
of the roller (left in the illustration because the view is from the rear) is the PF roller gear R which
always meshes with the clutch gear.
The clutch gear also meshes with the SF changeover gear when the mode switching lever is in the
leftmost position (as viewed from the front). When the head/carriage unit travels from the left to
right to reach the purge position, a tab on the carriage rear panel pushes the mode switching lever to
the right (left in the illustration). The clutch gear spring pushes the clutch gear to the right, away
from the SF changeover gear and HS changeover gear, to mesh with the purge gear. This way, the
clutch gear switches the operation mode to the purge mode.
The power transmission route and operation mode switching are detailed in Section 3.2.2.4.

PF roller gear L
Paper feed roller

(Front)

Paper feed motor

PF roller gear R

(Right)

Mode switching lever

Clutch gear spring
Switching lever spring

SF changeover gear

Clutch gear

HS changeover gear

Purge bevel gear
Purge gear
(3_06)

3-29

Confidential

Purge mode
In the purge mode, the motor rotational torque is transmitted to the purge gear, purge bevel gear, and
planetary arm to drive the pump switching unit or tube pump (depending upon the motor rotational
direction).
PF roller gear L

PF roller gear R
Maintenance unit
Paper feed motor

Pump switching unit
Planetary arm

SF changeover gear

Tube pump

HS changeover gear

Purge bevel gear
Purge gear
(3_07)

When the head/carriage unit moves left from the purge position, the tab on the carriage rear panel
releases the mode switching lever, allowing the switching lever spring to force the mode switching
lever and the clutch gear to the left (see the illustration on the previous page). The switching lever
spring is stronger, so forces the clutch gear spring back, disengaging it from the purge gear.
Mode switching lever

Clutch gear

Maintenance unit
Purge gear (engaged with the
purge bevel gear)

SF changeover gear
(Front)
HS changeover gear
Purge cam

(3_09_1)

3-30

Confidential

Switching the power transmission with the planetary arm in the maintenance unit
When the paper feed motor is driving the maintenance unit, the counterclockwise (when viewed
from the output gear side) rotation meshes the planetary arm with the tube pump; the clockwise
rotation, with the purge cam.

Air vent tube
Pump switching unit

Purge bevel gear
Purge cam

Planetary arm

Color drain tube
Purge cam switch

Tube pump
Main drain tube
Black drain tube
Opening tube to
the atmospheric air
(3_08)

Purge cam mechanism
The purge cam is so designed that:
- the carriage lock pops out to lock the head/carriage unit before purging and pops in before
cleaning with the head wiper (this lock also secures the head/carriage unit during transportation),
- the pump switching unit switches the application target of the negative pressure generated by the
pump between the head cap for black ink, the one for color ink, the air vent cap, and the opening
tube to the atmospheric air,
- the head wiper comes out to clean the nozzle surface, and
- the air vent rods are pushed up via the slide cams to remove air trapped.
The purge cam switch detects the cam drive positions. (See Section 3.2.3.)

3-31

Confidential

Purge types, ink usage, purge counts, and purge codes

Purge Types
Normal purge

Periodical reset
purge

Power purge

Initial purge

Description

Ink Usage

Purge Counts

This purge operation removes Black:
0.21 mL Black:
dried ink sticking to the head Per color: 0.13 mL Total of
nozzles.
colors:

This purge operation removes Black:
0.44 mL Black:
any bubbles that have
Per color: 0.32 mL Total of
accumulated in the ink supply
colors:
tubes.

More powerful than a
periodical reset purge, this
purge operation is for
removing stubborn clogging
from the head nozzles and ink
supply tubes.

Black:
0.59 mL Black:
Per color: 0.38 mL Total of
colors:

When the user loads ink
Black:
2.92 mL Black:
cartridges for the first time,
Per color: 2.59 mL Total of
this purge operation
colors:
automatically runs to refill the
ink supply tubes and print
head with fresh ink.

163

432

Engine setup
purge

163

3-32

Black:
2.92 mL Black:
Per color: 2.59 mL Total of
colors:

User reset purge This purge operation should
Black:
0.50 mL Black:
be performed if the print
Per color: 0.32 mL Total of
quality problem persists after
colors:
a user has performed the
purge operation repeatedly by
pressing the Ink (Ink
Management) key.
This purge operation refills
the ink supply tubes with ink
when there is no ink in those
tubes.

Purge Codes
(In the maintenance
mode, Function
code 76)

432

Confidential

Ink cartridge capacities
Ink Cartridge Type
Standard type
Starter and spare
ink cartridges
Low yield type*2

Contents

Usable Portion

Black ink cartridge

18.2 mL

16.3 mL or more*1

Color ink cartridges

9.0 mL

5.9 mL or more*1

Black ink cartridge

14.1 mL

Color ink cartridges

6.8 mL

12.16 mL or more*1
4.9 mL or more*1

*1 These are the values measured with an actual machine, not the guaranteed ones.
Number of printable pages per ink cartridge
Print conditions:

600 x 600 dpi ("Normal" print quality), continuous printing, 5% coverage

Ink Cartridge Type
Standard type

Low yield type*2

Number of Printable Pages per Ink Cartridge*3
Black ink cartridge

Approx. 500 pages

Color ink cartridge

Approx. 400 pages

Black ink cartridge

Approx. 350 pages

Color ink cartridge

Approx. 300 pages

*2 For models with low yield ink cartridges
*3 When the ink cartridge is not used for an initial purge

■

The contents and usable portion of ink cartridges are subject to change without notice.

■

The ink consumption differs depending on individual machines and ambient environmental
conditions. The numbers of printable pages per ink cartridge listed above are typical values under
ordinary conditions.

3-33

Confidential

3.2.2.3

Carriage drive mechanism

The head/carriage unit, which integrates the print head unit and carriage, is supported and guided by
the CR guide rail and CR support chassis. The CR timing belt transmits the carriage motor rotation
to the head/carriage unit. Clockwise motor rotations move the head/carriage unit to the right;
counterclockwise ones to the left.
The CR encoder sensor on the top of the head/carriage unit scans the CR encoder strip above the
CR support chassis to monitor the current head position relative to the home position. The
controller uses this signal for robust control ensuring uniform speed.
The CR encoder strip is a clear film striped in a 1/150 inch cycle. It offers a choice of two travel
speeds of the head/carriage unit, 43.3 and 21.7 ips, to match the print resolution.

CR encoder strip
CR guide rail
CR encoder sensor

Head/carriage unit
(Paper feed roller)

Idle pulley

(Front)
CR timing belt
CR support chassis

Carriage motor

Carriage motor
pulley
(3_13_e)

3-34

Confidential

Adjusting the print head angle relative to carriage
For optimal image printing, the print head nozzle array must be perpendicular to the head/carriage
unit's line of travel. Manufacturing limitations, however, make perfect alignment impossible during
mass production. The angle must be adjusted at the individual machine level.
The following describes this adjustment mechanism's components and their roles.
Slider L, the slider, and the rib attach the head/carriage unit to the CR support chassis. The rib acts
as a pivot for the slider's damping springs pressing the head/carriage unit to the rear. Slider L has a
head skew adjuster knob that shifts the slider back and forth, adjusting the angle of this backward
pressure. Rotating the head skew adjuster knob tilts the entire head/carriage unit, thus adjusting the
head nozzle vertical angle relative to the carriage unit's line of travel.
This knob offers 15 settings, from -7 to +7.

Viewed from the bottom

Head skew adjuster knob

Damping springs

Rib
CR encoder strip
Slider L

Slider
CR timing belt
(Front)

3-35

(3_14)

Confidential

Height adjustment of the head/carriage unit
For optimal image printing, a pair of slider cams mounted on the head/carriage unit switches the
height of the head/carriage unit against the CR guide rail and support chassis between three levels
for "Brother premium glossy photo paper," "thick paper and envelopes" and "other types of paper"
in order to bring the optimum distance between the head nozzle surface and paper.
The slider cams can be switched by hitting against the stoppers at the right and left ends of the CR
guide rail and CR support chassis.
Head/carriage unit
Slider cam

CR guide rail

Slider cam
CR support chassis

(3_15_1)

For "Brother premium glossy photo paper":
When printing on Brother premium glossy photo paper, the machine uses ink droplets of 1.5
picoliters (pL) and switches the head/carriage unit to the lowest position to make the distance ("a"
in the illustration below) narrower than the one ("b") specified for other types of paper. This enables
jetted minimal ink droplets to accurately hit the target position on paper.
For "thick paper and envelopes" and "other types of paper":
The machine adjusts the height of the head/carriage unit to keep the distance ("b") constant.
For "Brother premium glossy
photo paper"
Head nozzle surface

For "other types of paper"
(Paper except Brother premium glossy For "thick paper and envelopes"
photo paper, thick paper and envelopes)
Head nozzle surface

Head nozzle surface

"b"

"a"
Paper

Paper

Platen

(3_15_2)

Head/carriage unit (top view)
Slider cam

(Front)

Slider cam

(3_15_3_e)

3-36

Confidential

As listed below, the printer driver on the connected PC or the paper type setting on the machine
controls the slider cams to determine the height of the head/carriage unit.
Adjustment for:
Controlled by:

Brother premium glossy photo
paper

Thick paper and envelopes

Printer driver (in printing from PC)

Yes

Paper type setting (in copying and
printing via PhotoCapture Center*)

Yes

* For models with PhotoCapture Center

3-37

Confidential

3.2.2.4

Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms

These mechanisms are driven by a single paper feed motor located on the left side of the engine
chassis via a gear train. (See the illustration on the next page.)
The following illustration is a cross-sectional view of the machine viewed from the right. Place the
recording paper face down in the paper tray. This paper first proceeds to the rear, bends upward,
heads back toward the front, passes under the head/carriage unit for printing, and finally comes out
onto the top of the paper tray cover.

Recording paper path

Star wheel holder ASSY
Head/carriage unit
Paper feed roller
Jam clear cover

Registration sensor actuator

Paper tray cover
(Front)

Bank ASSY
Paper ejection roller
Paper tray

Platen

Paper pull-in roller holder

Paper pull-in rollers
(PrintingMechanism)

The machine supports two paper feed modes--"normal SF mode" and "high-speed feed mode." The
latter mode applies when the "Fast" print quality is selected and the former mode, when any other
print quality is selected.

3-38

Confidential

Power transmission route and motor rotational direction

The rotation torque of the paper feed motor is transmitted via the PF roller gear L and paper feed
roller to the PF roller gear R which always meshes with the clutch gear, as described in Section
3.2.2.2, [ 4 ].
The clutch gear also meshes with the SF changeover gear, HS changeover gear, or purge gear when
the mode switching lever is in the leftmost position, 2nd position from the left, or right position,
thereby switching the operation mode to the normal SF, high-speed feed, or purge mode,
respectively.
Mode switching lever
(Normal SF mode position)
(High-speed feed mode position)
(Purge mode position)
Clutch gear
PF roller gear R

Purge gear

HS idle gear
HS changeover gear
Mode switching lever
SF changeover gear
Head/carriage unit
SF idle gears

Paper pull-in gear shaft

SF changeover gear
Paper pull-in rollers
SF idle gears

Paper feed roller
Paper feed motor

Paper pull-in gear shaft

PF roller gear L
(Front)

Paper pull-in gear

PF motor gear
(3_16_e)

Ejection idle gear
PF timing belt

Paper ejection roller

3-39

Confidential

Normal SF mode

High-speed feed mode

Purge mode

Paper feed motor
[CCW/CW]

[CW]

[CW/CCW]

Motor rotation
CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counterclockwise

PF roller gear L

Paper feed roller
[Reverse/Forward]

[Forward]

[Forward/Reverse]

PF roller gear R

Clutch gear

Switching to normal SF mode,
high-speed feed mode, or
purge mode

SF changeover gear

HS changeover gear

Purge gear

SF idle gears

HS idle gear

Purge bevel gear

Paper pull-in gear shaft

Planetary arm
[CCW]

[CW]

Gear train in the paper
pull-in roller holder

Switching depending upon
the motor rotational direction

Purge cam Tube pump
Maintenance unit

Paper pull-in rollers
[Reverse/Forward]

[Forward]

Switching operation modes--Normal SF, high-speed feed, and purge modes

The table below shows the relationship between the position of the mode switching lever, the
rotational directions of the paper feed motor, paper feed roller, and paper pull-in rollers, and the
maintenance unit components driven.
Position of mode
switching lever
Leftmost position
(Normal SF mode)

Operation

Paper feed motor
(viewed from the
output gear side)

Paper feed
roller

Paper feeding

Counterclockwise

Reverse

Forward

---

Printing

Clockwise

Forward

(Reverse)*

---

Clockwise

Forward

---

Counterclockwise

Reverse

---

Clockwise

---

Purge cam

Counterclockwise

---

Tube pump

2nd position from the High-speed paper
feeding & printing
left
(High-speed feed
Paper reversing
mode)
Right position
(Purge mode)

Paper pull- Component
driven in
in rollers
maintenance unit

Purging
*The paper pull-in rollers are idling in the reverse direction.
3-40

Confidential

Normal SF mode

1st stage

The paper feed motor rotates counterclockwise (when viewed from the output gear side)
and its rotational torque is transmitted to the PF roller gear L that rotates the paper feed
roller in the reverse direction. (See the illustration on page 3-39.)
At the right end of the paper feed roller is the PF roller gear R that always meshes with
the clutch gear. The clutch gear also meshes with the SF changeover gear when the mode
switching lever is placed in the normal SF mode position (Leftmost position).
The rotational torque is further transmitted from the SF changeover gear via the SF idle
gears to the paper pull-in gear shaft and gear train in the paper pull-in roller holder.
Consequently, the paper pull-in rollers turn in the forward direction to pull in a sheet of
paper loaded in the paper tray.

2nd stage After the pulled-in paper pushes the registration sensor actuator to turn the sensor on,
the motor further rotates counterclockwise for the predetermined period to align
(register) the leading edge of the paper with the paper feed roller rotating in the reverse
direction.
3rd stage The paper feed motor changes the rotational direction to clockwise to rotate the paper
feed roller in the forward direction to feed the paper to the printing start position.
The rotational torque of the PF roller gear L is also transmitted via the ejection idle gear
and PF timing belt to the paper ejection roller that rotates in the forward direction to
eject the paper printed.
High-speed feed mode

1st stage

The paper feed motor rotates clockwise (when viewed from the output gear side) and its
rotation is transmitted to the PF roller gear L that rotates the paper feed roller in the
forward direction.
At the right end of the paper feed roller is the PF roller gear R that always meshes with
the clutch gear. The clutch gear also meshes with the HS changeover gear when the
mode switching lever is placed in the high-speed feed mode position (2nd position from
the left).
The rotational torque is further transmitted from the HS changeover gear via the HS idle
gear to the paper pull-in gear shaft and gear train in the paper pull-in roller holder. Just
as in the normal SF mode, the paper pull-in rollers turn in the forward direction to pull
in a sheet of paper loaded in the paper tray.
Registration sensor activation has no effect on the paper feeding operation in the highspeed feed mode.
The paper feed roller keeps rotating in the forward direction; therefore, the paper
continues to advance to the printing start position.
Just as in the normal SF mode, the rotational torque of the PF roller gear L is also
transmitted via the ejection idle gear and PF timing belt to the paper ejection roller that
rotates in the forward direction to eject the first sheet of paper printed.
Even after the first sheet of paper leaves the paper tray, the paper pull-in rollers keep
rotating in the forward direction to continuously pull in paper sheet by sheet. At the
completion of the first printing sequence, another sheet of paper has been halfway pulled
in. The paper feed roller always rotates faster than the paper pull-in rollers; therefore,
the trailing edge of the preceding sheet will not overlap with the leading edge of the
subsequent one.
2nd stage When the registration sensor actuator returns to the no-paper state after completion of a
sequence of printing operation, the paper feed motor starts rotating counterclockwise to
rotate the paper pull-in rollers in the reverse direction so that the halfway-pulled-in
paper goes back into the paper tray. The paper hits the paper length guide provided in
the paper tray and goes back into place.
3-41

Confidential

Movable platen*

*Only for models with movable platen

The movable platen has movable ribs that move in synchronization with the leading or trailing edge
of advancing paper. It realizes the following.
- Increased printing speed in borderless printing
- Eliminating paper deflection that could occur in printing on the trailing edge of paper
Synchronization with leading edge of paper
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the movable rib drive position, the head/carriage unit
moves to the left end of its travel and pushes the upper end of the movable platen lever, releasing
its lower end that blocks the rotation of the movable platen cam gear. This triggers driving the
movable platen mechanism.
The mechanism transmits the paper feed motor rotation to the movable ribs. They move from the
home position (center) to the upstream limit of the movable range to wait for the leading edge of the
paper to come. They move in synchronization with the leading edge of the paper advancing. When
they reach the downstream limit, they return to the home position. This is a sequence of the
movable rib operation.
Synchronization with trailing edge of paper
When the registration sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper, the motor further feeds the paper
for the predetermined amount. After that, the head/carriage unit pushes the upper end of movable
platen lever again. Just as for the leading edge of paper, the movable ribs move to the upstream
limit of the movable range to wait for the trailing edge of the paper advancing to come and then
move in synchronization with the trailing edge. When the movable ribs have reached the downstream
limit and the printing operation has completed, they return to the home position.
Head/carriage unit
CR guide rail
Paper feed roller

Movable platen

(Front)

Movable platen lever

Movable ribs
Upstream limit

Home position
(Center)
Downstream limit

3-42

(3_17_e)

Confidential

Other controls

Paper feed position and speed control
A PF encoder disk with the resolution of 300 dpi (0.084 mm pitch) is mounted on the PF roller gear
L. The PF encoder sensor uses it to generate a signal indicating the gear rotation speed--in other
words, the paper feed roller speed--to the controller for use in controlling paper feed position and
speed.
Paper stop position control
The controller uses the PF encoder signal for proportional, integration, differential (PID) control of
the paper feed motor to produce high-resolution precision paper positioning during printing. This
signal also determines the motor parameters for rapidly and precisely positioning the paper.
Fixed-speed paper feed
This operation rotates the paper feed roller to feed the paper at a constant speed regardless of load
fluctuations. The primary application is ejecting paper when printing is complete--in other words, in
situations where precision stop position control is not needed.
Paper feeding amount control
There is variation in the head nozzle pitch of individual head/carriage units, as well as in the shape
of the paper feed and ejection rollers. To make those parts match each other, therefore, updating the
paper feeding correction value and correcting the positioning error of the head/carriage unit are
necessary (see Chapter 7).

3-43

Confidential

3.2.3 Sensors and Actuators

This machine uses the following sensors and thermistors.
Sensor Name

Sensor Type

Location

Document front sensor*1

Photosensor

Document rear sensor*1

Photosensor

Scanner/ink cartridge cover sensor

Photosensor

Paper width sensor (media sensor)

Photosensor

Head thermistor

Thermistor

CR encoder sensor

Photosensor

Registration sensor

Photosensor

On the registration sensor PCB

PF encoder sensor

Photosensor

On the PF encoder PCB

Purge cam switch

Mechanical switch

On the maintenance unit

Ink cartridge sensors (four)

Photosensor

Casing internal temperature thermistor

Thermistor

On the ink cartridge PCB inside
the ink refill assembly

Hook switch*2

Photosensor

In the ADF unit*1
On the cover sensor PCB
On the carriage PCB

On the hook switch PCB*2 in
the lower cover

*1 For models with ADF
*2 For models with handset
• The document front sensor detects whether there is a document in the ADF.
• The document rear sensor detects the leading and trailing edges of document pages, indicating to
the control circuitry the point at which to start reading and when page scanning is complete.
• The scanner/ink cartridge cover sensor detects whether the scanner cover (scanner unit) and the
ink cartridge cover are properly closed.
• The paper width (media) sensor detects the size of recording paper. With this sensor signal, the
controller prevents the print head from printing on the outside of paper in borderless printing. It
also protects the platen from no-paper printing when a paper jam occurs, preventing stains on the
platen and the back side of paper.
• The head thermistor detects the temperature of the print engine. According to the sensor
information, the controller adjusts the head driver to compensate for changes in ink viscosity.
• The carriage motor (CR) encoder sensor monitors the head/carriage unit's current position and
speed. If the controller detects a head's travel speed error, it interprets the error state as a paper
jam and stops the operation.
• The registration sensor detects the leading and trailing edges of paper for use in determining print
start and end timings and detecting paper jams.
• The paper feed motor (PF) encoder sensor monitors the PF roller rotation angle and speed for
use in optimizing paper feed amount and speed.
• The purge cam switch detects the drive positions of the purge cam.
• There are four ink cartridge sensors, one for each color. The sensor actuator inside the ink
cartridge usually blocks the light path to indicate the presence of ink. When ink runs low (nearempty), the arm moves out of the beam, activating the sensor. The same signal also indicates
whether there is an ink cartridge present.
3-44

Confidential

• The casing internal temperature thermistor monitors the temperature inside the machine. With
this thermistor signal, the controller determines the periodical automatic purge interval since the
casing internal temperature is almost equal to the ambient temperature of ink inside the ink
cartridges.
• The hook switch* detects whether the handset is on the handset mount.
*For models with handset

Most sensors are photointerrupters consisting of a light-emitting diode and a light-sensitive
transistor as shown below. The only exception is the paper width sensor, which uses reflective type.
The illustration on the next page gives the sensor and actuator locations.

Actuator's end

Light-emitting Light-sensitive
diode
transistor

3-45

Confidential

Document front sensor *1
Document front
sensor actuator *1

ADF & document
cover ASSY *1

Document rear sensor actuator *1
Document rear sensor *1

(Sensors&ActuatorsADF_J)

(Carriage PCB on which the
head thermistor is also mounted)
CR encoder sensor
CR encoder strip
Paper width
sensor

(Maintenance unit)
Purge cam switch
Scanner cover sensor
actuator
Scanner/ink cartridge
cover sensor

Registration sensor actuator
Registration sensor
(Registration sensor
PCB)

Ink cartridge cover
sensor actuator

PF encoder disk
PF encoder sensor
(PF encoder PCB)

(Cover sensor PCB)
Ink cartridge sensors
Hook switch actuator *2
(Hook switch PCB) *2
Hook switch *2
(Head/carriage unit)

(Ink cartridge PCB on which
the casing internal temperature
thermistor is also mounted)

(3_18_MFC_J)

*1 For models with ADF
*2 For models with handset
Sensors and Actuators Locations

3-46

Confidential

3.3 CONTROL ELECTRONICS
3.3.1 Components

The following illustration shows the hardware components. The corresponding wiring diagrams
appear in Appendix 5.
WLAN
LAN

*1
WLAN PCB

Power supply
PCB

AC line

*2
LAN I/F

USB
4-wire

4-wire in 6-wire
connector housing

Antenna *3

2-wire
SDAA

2-wire

External telephone

18-wire

Cordless PCB

2-wire

Main
ASIC

SDRAM
32MB *7
16MB *6

Line

MJ PCB

Speaker

*4 7-wire
*5 5-wire

Cover sensor PCB
Scanner/ink cartridge
cover sensor

Control panel PCB
2-wire

Monochrome LCD

ROM

MODEM

8MB *7 *8
4MB *6

*7
*8

28-wire
18-wire

Color LCD

INK JET PRINTING & PAPER FEEDING
EEPROM

Carriage PCB
CR encoder sensor
Paper width sensor
Head thermistor

12-wire (Head 3)
14-wire (Head 1)
13-wire (Head 2)

Head/
carriage
unit

2-wire

DC motor driver

Carriage motor
Ink refill ASSY
Ink cartridge PCB
Ink cartridge sensors

9-wire

Casing internal temperature thermistor

Main PCB

Maintenance unit
Purge cam switch

2-wire

4-wire PF encoder PCB

PF encoder sensor
7-wire
3-wire

DC motor driver

Registration sensor PCB
Registration sensor

2-wire

Paper feed motor

2-wire

Charge PCB

6-wire

Hook switch PCB

SCANNING
12-wire

Stepping motor driver

CIS unit

4-wire

CIS motor

*10

ADF unit

Stepping motor driver

*12
PictBridge

Media 1
(xD/SD/MS
card)

3-wire

Document front sensor

3-wire

Document rear sensor

4-wire

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
*12

For wireless LAN-enabled models
For wired LAN-enabled models
For models with cordless handsets
For models with TAD
For models without TAD
For models with monochrome LCD
For models with wide color LCD
For models with 2.0-inch color LCD
For models with handset
For models with ADF
For models with backup battery
For models with PhotoCapture Center

ADF motor

*12
Media 2
(CF card)

4-wire

Backup battery

USB

*11
(Mini3e_MFC_BlockDiagram)

- Digital camera
- USB flash memory drive

3-47

Confidential

CHAPTER 4
ERROR INDICATION AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

Confidential

CHAPTER 4 ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter details error messages and codes that the incorporated self-diagnostic functions
display if any error or malfunction occurs. If any error message appears, refer to this chapter to
find which components should be checked or replaced.
The latter half of this chapter provides sample problems that could occur in the main sections of
the machine and related troubleshooting procedures. This will help service personnel pinpoint
and repair defective components.

CONTENTS
4.1

ERROR INDICATION ...............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1

Equipment Errors ..........................................................................................4-1
[1]

Error messages appearing on the LCD ...................................................4-1

On the machine ..........................................................................................4-1
On cordless handsets (For models with cordless handset).............................4-6
[2]
4.1.2

Error codes contained in "MACHINE ERROR X X" messages...................4-7

Communications Errors................................................................................ 4-21
Definition of Error Codes on the Communications List.................................. 4-22

4.2

TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................... 4-28
4.2.1

Introduction................................................................................................. 4-28

4.2.2

Precautions ................................................................................................ 4-28

4.2.3

Checking Prior to Troubleshooting ................................................................ 4-28

4.2.4

Troubleshooting Based on Problem Type ...................................................... 4-30

4.2.5

[1]

Control panel and LCD problems .......................................................... 4-30

[2]

Telephone problems ............................................................................ 4-30

[3]

Communications problems.................................................................... 4-31

[4]

Paper/document feeding problems........................................................ 4-31

[5]

Print-image problems........................................................................... 4-32

[6]

PC-driven printing problems.................................................................. 4-37

[7]

Printing from memory cards--Compact Flash, Memory Stick, SD Memory
Card, or xD-Picture Card (For models with PhotoCapture Center)........... 4-37

[8]

Wireless LAN (WLAN)* ........................................................................ 4-38

[9]

Others ................................................................................................ 4-38

Problems Encountered Frequently in the Past................................................ 4-39
Confidential

4.2.6

[1]

Paper jams ......................................................................................... 4-39

[2]

"MACHINE ERROR 4F" error message................................................. 4-40

[3]

Ink-related problems............................................................................ 4-40

[4]

Auto document feeder (ADF) malfunction (For models with ADF) ............ 4-41

Possible Component Defects and Resulting Problems.................................... 4-43
[1]

ADF mechanism (For models with ADF) ................................................ 4-43

[2]

Scanner mechanism............................................................................. 4-44

[3]

Head/carriage unit drive and purge mechanisms..................................... 4-45

[4]

Print head mechanism.......................................................................... 4-46

[5]

Sheet feeder (SF) mechanism .............................................................. 4-47

[6]

Paper feeding mechanism .................................................................... 4-47

[7]

Speaker.............................................................................................. 4-47

[8]

Control panel and LCD......................................................................... 4-48

[9]

PCBs.................................................................................................. 4-48

[ 10 ] Adjustments/data in the memories ........................................................ 4-49

Confidential

4.1 ERROR INDICATION
To help the user or the service personnel promptly locate the cause of a problem (if any), the
machine incorporates the self-diagnostic functions which display error messages for equipment
errors.

4.1.1 Equipment Errors

If an equipment error occurs in the machine, the machine emits an audible alarm (five short beeps
twice) and shows the error message on the LCD. If an equipment error occurs in the cordless
handset(s), the cordless handset shows the error message on the LCD. For the error messages, see
[ 1 ] below.
To display detailed error information, use Function code 82 described in Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.23 (that is, make the machine enter the maintenance mode and then press the 8 and 2 keys).
Following the MACHINE ERROR, one of the error codes listed in [ 2 ] will appear on the LCD.

[1]

Error messages appearing on the LCD

On the machine

Error Message

Cause

Action

BT Call Sign is set to ON.
You cannot change the
Receive Mode from Manual
to another mode.

Set BT Call Sign to OFF.

Comm. Error

Poor telephone line quality
caused a communication
error.

Send the fax again or connect the
machine to another telephone line. If the
problem continues, call the telephone
company and ask them to check your
phone line.

Connection Fail

You tried to poll a fax
machine that is not in Polled
Waiting mode.

Check the other fax machine's polling
setup.

Cover is Open

The scanner cover (scanner
unit) or ink cartridge cover is
not closed completely.

Lift the scanner cover and then close it
again.

BT Call Sign On
(UK models only)

4- 1

Firmly close the ink cartridge cover
until it clicks.

Confidential

Error Message
Data Remaining

Cause

Action

Print data is left in the
machine's memory.

Re-start printing from your computer.

Print data is left in the
machine's memory. The USB
cable was unplugged while
the computer was sending the
data to the machine.

Press Stop/Exit. The machine will
cancel the job and clear it from the
memory. Try to print again.

Disconnected

The other person or other
person's fax machine stopped
the call.

Try to send or receive again.

Document Jam

The document was not
inserted or fed properly, or the
document scanned from the
ADF was too long.

Remove the jammed document.
(Only for models with ADF.)

DR Mode in Use

The machine is set to
Distinctive Ring mode. You
cannot change the Receive
Mode from Manual to another
mode.

Set Distinctive Ring to off.

High Temperature

The print head is too warm.

Allow the machine to cool down.

Hub is Unusable.

A Hub or USB flash memory
drive with a Hub has been
connected to the USB direct
interface.

A Hub or USB flash memory drive
with a Hub is not supported. Unplug
the device from the USB direct
interface.

Image Too Long.

The proportions of your
photo are irregular so effects
could not be added.

Choose a regularly proportioned
image.

Image Too Small.

The size of your photo is too
small to trim.

Choose a larger image.

4- 2

Confidential

Error Message

Cause

Action

Ink Empty

One or more of the ink
cartridges is empty. The
machine will stop all print
operations. While memory is
available, black and white
faxes will be stored in the
memory. If a sending machine
has a color fax, the machine's
"handshake" will ask that the
fax be sent as black and white.
If the sending machine has the
ability to convert it, the color
fax will be stored in the
memory as a black and white
fax.

Replace the empty ink cartridges.

Low Temperature

The print head is too cool.

Allow the machine to warm up.

Media Error *

The memory card is either
corrupted, improperly
formatted, or there is a
problem with the memory
card.

Put the card firmly into the slot again to
make sure it is in the correct position. If
the error remains, check the media drive
by putting in another memory card that
you know is working.

Media is Full.

The memory card* or USB
flash memory drive you are
using has no available
memory to scan the
documents.

Delete the data stored in your memory
card or USB flash memory drive to
make some space.

Near Empty

One or more of the ink
cartridges are running out of
ink. If a sending machine has
a color fax, the machine's
"handshake" will ask that the
fax be sent as black and
white. If the sending machine
has the ability to convert it,
the color fax will be received
into the memory as a black
and white fax.

Order a new ink cartridge.

No Caller ID

There is no incoming call
history. You did not receive
calls or you have not
subscribed to the Caller ID
service from your telephone
company.

If you want to use the Caller ID feature
call your telephone company.

* For models with PhotoCapture Center
4- 3

Confidential

Error Message

Cause

Action

No Cartridge

An ink cartridge is not
installed properly.

Reinstall the ink cartridge.

No File

The memory card* or USB
flash memory drive loaded in
the machine does not contain
a .JPG file.

Put the correct memory card or USB
flash memory drive into the machine
again.

No Paper Fed

The machine is out of paper
or paper is not properly
loaded in the paper tray.

Do one of the following:
• Refill the paper in the paper tray, and
then press Black Start (Mono Start)
or Color Start.
• Remove the paper and load it again
and then press Black Start (Mono
Start) or Color Start.

Paper is jammed in the
machine.

Remove the jammed paper.

No Response/Busy

The number you dialed does
not answer or is busy.

Verify the number and try again.

Not Registered

You tried to access a Speed
Dial number that is not
programmed.

Set up the Speed Dial number.

Out of Memory

The machine's memory is
full.

Fax sending or copy operation in
progress
Do one of the following:
• Press Stop/Exit and wait until the
other operations in progress finish and
then try again.
• Clear the data in the memory. To gain
extra memory, you can turn off
Advanced Fax Operation.
• Print the faxes that are in the memory.
Printing operation in progress
Reduce print resolution.

Paper Jam

Paper is jammed in the
machine.

Open the jam clear cover (at the back
of the machine) and remove the
jammed paper.

* For models with PhotoCapture Center

4- 4

Confidential

Error Message
(On color LCD) *

Unable to Change XX
Unable to Clean XX
Unable to Init. XX
Unable to Print XX
Unable to Scan XX
Unable to use Phone XX

Cause

Action

The machine has a
mechanical problem.

Open the scanner cover and remove any
foreign objects inside the machine.

If the error message continues, see
Chapter 5, Section 5.1
"TRANSFERRING RECEIVED FAX
DATA" before disconnecting the
machine so you will not lose any
important messages. Then, disconnect
the machine from the power for several
minutes and then reconnect it. (The
machine can be turned off for
approximately 24 hours without losing
faxes stored in the memory.)

A foreign object such as a
clip or ripped paper is in the
machine.

(On monochrome LCD) *

Change Unable XX
Clean Unable XX
Init. Unable XX
Print Unable XX
Scan Unable XX
(On color LCD)

A broken device has been
connected to the USB direct
interface.

Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface, then press On/Off (Power
Save) to turn the machine off and then
on again.

Please Disconnect
USB Device.

A USB flash memory drive
that is not supported has been
connected to the USB direct
interface.

Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface.

Wrong Paper Size

Paper is not the correct size.

Load the correct size of paper (Letter,
Legal or A4), and then press Black
Start (Mono Start) or Color Start.

Unusable Device
Disconnect device
from front connector
& turn machine off &
then on
(On monochrome LCD)

Unusable Device
Disconnect device
from front connector.
Turn the machine off
& on by pressing
On/Off button on
control panel.
Unusable Device

* XX represents one of the error codes shown in "[ 2 ] Error codes contained in "MACHINE ERROR X X"
messages."

4- 5

Confidential

On cordless handsets (For models with cordless handset)

Error Message
Base Unit in use

Cause

Action

The machine (base unit) is being
used for intercom calling.

Wait until the line is free.

The machine (base unit) is being
set up for cordless handset
registration.

Wait until the registration is finished.

The machine (base unit) is being
used for Message Center
functions such as OGM
recording or ICM playing.

Wait until the machine (base unit) is
back in standby mode.

Cannot register
handset

You failed to register the
cordless handset.

Try to register the cordless handset
again.

Line in use

Another person is on the phone
line using the machine's (base
unit) speaker phone or another
cordless handset.

Wait until the line is free.

The machine (base unit) is
receiving faxes.

Wait until the line is free.

Put handset
on cradle

The battery of the cordless
handset is low.

Charge the battery.

No Caller ID

No caller ID is recorded.

Dial with the numerical keypad.

Searching for
Base Unit

The cordless handset is too far
from the machine (base unit).

Bring the cordless handset closer to the
machine (base unit).

(Base Unit
not detected)

The On/Off key on the machine
(base unit) is off.

Check that the machine (base unit) is
plugged in and the On/Off key on the
machine (base unit) is on.

You have not registered the
cordless handset.

4- 6

Confidential

[2]

Error codes contained in "MACHINE ERROR X X" messages

Using Function code 82 (described in Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.23) displays the most recent error in
the format of "MACHINE ERROR XX." The XX represents one of the error codes listed in this
section.
XX in error messages "Unable to Change XX" to "Unable to Scan XX" and "Change Unable XX" to
"Scan Unable XX" given in item [ 1 ] also represents one of these error codes.
NOTE: When checking a PCB as instructed in the "Solution" column, also check its harness.
NOTE: To check sensors, use Function code 32 described in Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.8 (that is,
press the 3 and 2 keys in the maintenance mode).
Error Code
(Hex)

Symptom

Not used.

26
27
28
29

Cannot detect ink
cartridges.

2A-2F

Not used.

Head/carriage unit travel
error.

Probable Cause

Solution

Running out of ink or the
ink cartridge not set in
place
26: Black ink
27: Yellow ink
28: Cyan ink
29: Magenta ink

Replace or reload ink
cartridges, referring to
the User's Guide.

Ink cartridge PCB
defective

Replace the ink refill
ASSY.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Software malfunction

Open and close the
scanner cover.
Unplug and plug the AC
cord.

Any obstacles on the
travel path of the
head/carriage unit
CR motor harness not
connected correctly

Clean and lubricate the
CR guide rail and CR
support chassis.
Correct the connection.

CR timing belt come off

Set the CR timing belt
into place.
Replace the CR encoder
strip.
Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.
Replace the head/carriage
unit.
Replace the carriage
motor.
Replace the main PCB.
Replace the power supply
PCB.
Replace the maintenance
unit.

CR encoder strip stained
or scratched
Carriage PCB defective
Head/carriage unit
broken
Carriage motor defective
Main PCB defective
Power supply PCB
defective
Maintenance unit
defective
4- 7

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
40

Symptom
The casing internal
temperature thermistor has
detected abnormal
temperature in the
machine.

Replace the main PCB.

Casing internal
temperature thermistor
defective

Replace the ink refill
ASSY.

Piezoelectric ceramic
actuator or head driver
defective

Replace the head/carriage
unit.

Carriage PCB defective

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Head flat cables not
connected correctly

Correct those flat cables.

Head flat cables broken

Replace the carriage
PCB ASSY.

Carriage PCB defective

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

The temperature of the
print head driver has risen
abnormally.

Head property
parameters incorrect in
the EEPROM

Enter the correct
parameter values.

The head driver chip
temperature sensor in the
head driver detects
abnormally high
temperature.

Air bubbles in the
head/carriage unit

Perform the initial purge.

Head flat cables and
carriage-head flat cable
not connected correctly

Correct those flat cables.

Head flat cables broken

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Carriage-head flat cable
broken

Replace the head/carriage
unit.

Head/carriage unit
broken

Replace the
head/carriage unit.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Not used.

The head drive voltage has
not dropped from the high
to low level within the
specified period.

Solution

Main PCB defective

Probable Cause

The head thermistor has
been opened or shorted
abnormally.

Not used.

4- 8

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
46

Symptom

Probable Cause

The number of performed
purge sequences has
reached the limit.

Purge counter overflown

The ink absorber box may
be filled with drained ink.
The number of flushing
operations has reached the
limit.

Flushing counter
overflown

Solution
Replace both the ink
absorber box and
flushing box and reset
their counters. (When
you need to replace the
ink absorber box or
flushing box, replace
both.)

The flushing box may be
filled with drained ink.
47

Not used.

Weak connection of the
head flat cables.

Head flat cables or
carriage-head flat cable
broken or not
connected

Correct the connection
of the head flat cables.
Replace the carriage
PCB ASSY.
Replace the
head/carriage unit.
Replace the main PCB.

The head drive voltage has
not risen to the specified
level.

Head flat cables and
carriage-head flat cable
not connected correctly

Correct those flat cables.

Head/carriage unit
defective

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.
Replace the head/carriage
unit.

4A-4E

Not used.

The head drive voltage has
dropped from the high to
low level in an abnormally
short period.
The head drive voltage has
not risen to the specified
level within the specified
period in the selfdiagnosis.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB
defective

Replace the power supply
PCB.

Piezoelectric ceramic
actuator defective
(Cracks or rare short)

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Main PCB defective

4- 9

Replace the head/carriage
unit.
Replace the main PCB.

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
50
51

Symptom

Probable Cause

Solution

The purge cam switch
does not come ON or OFF
even after the purge cam
has been driven by the
specified number of
pulses.

Planetary arm assembly
not engaged correctly

Set the maintenance unit
into place.

The purge cam switch
does not come ON at each
detection point.

If the planetary arm does
not move smoothly,
clean it.
Purge cam switch
harness not connected
correctly

Correct the connection.

Purge cam switch broken

Replace the purge cam
switch.

Gear(s) on the
maintenance unit broken

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Paper feed motor
defective

Replace the paper feed
motor.

Power supply PCB
defective

Replace the power
supply PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Planetary arm assembly
not engaged correctly

Set the maintenance unit
into place.
If the planetary arm does
not move smoothly, clean
it.

Purge cam switch
harness not connected
correctly

Correct the connection.

Purge cam switch broken

Replace the purge cam
switch.

Gear(s) on the
maintenance unit
broken

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Abnormal load applied
to the purge cam

Paper feed motor broken

Replace the paper feed
motor.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Not used.

4- 10

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
54
55

Symptom
The tube pump rotates
abnormally.

Probable Cause

Solution

Foreign materials in the
machine

Remove foreign materials.

Clutch gear broken

Replace the clutch gear.

PF encoder disk being in
contact with the upper
cover and deformed

Replace the PF encoder
disk.

PF encoder PCB
defective

Replace the PF encoder
PCB.

Main drain tube bent

Replace the main drain
tube.

Purge cam gear broken

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Abnormal load applied
to the purge cam
Planetary arm assembly
broken

Not used.

After a purging operation,
the head/carriage unit will
not return to the home
position (capping
position).

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB
defective

Replace the power supply
PCB.

Paper feed motor
defective
PF roller gear L broken

Replace the paper feed
motor.
Replace the engine unit.

Head cap unit, head
wiper or other parts on
the maintenance unit
interfering with the
head/carriage unit

Set these parts back into
place.
If any part on the
maintenance unit does not
operate smoothly, replace
the unit.

CR encoder strip stained

Clean the CR encoder
strip.

Any obstacles on the
travel path of the
head/carriage unit

Clean the CR guide rail
and CR support chassis.

Carriage motor defective

Replace the carriage
motor.

Head/carriage unit
defective

Replace the head/carriage
unit.

Main PCB defective
Power supply PCB
defective

Replace the main PCB.
Replace the power supply
PCB.

4- 11

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)

Symptom

58, 59

Not used.

The purge cam stops
abnormally when it is in
operation.

The tube pump stops
abnormally during air
venting.

The tube pump stops
abnormally during purging
operation.

Current protection for the
driver IC activated when the
purge cam was being
driven.

Probable Cause

Solution

Foreign materials in the
machine

Remove foreign materials.

Clutch gear broken

Replace the clutch gear.

PF encoder disk being in
contact with the upper
cover and deformed

Replace the PF encoder
disk.

PF encoder PCB
defective

Replace the PF encoder
PCB.

Main drain tube bent

Replace the main drain
tube.

Purge cam gear broken

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Abnormal load applied
to the purge cam
Planetary arm assembly
broken

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB
defective

Replace the power supply
PCB.

Paper feed motor
defective
PF roller gear L broken

Replace the paper feed
motor.
Replace the engine unit.

The driving current has
exceeded the limit due to
an abnormal load applied
to the maintenance unit.

Remove foreign materials.
Replace the clutch gear.
Replace the PF encoder
disk.
Replace the PF encoder
PCB.
Replace the main drain
tube.

Replace the maintenance
unit.

Current protection for the
driver IC activated when the
pump was in operation.

Replace the main PCB.
Replace the power supply
PCB.
Replace the paper feed
motor.
Replace the engine unit.

4- 12

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)

Symptom

Not used.

60
61
62

Paper width sensor (media
sensor) error.

63-7D

Not used.

No head parameters stored
in the EEPROM.
(This code may appear only
in the maintenance mode.)

Not used.

At the start of FAX
message printing, the
controller detects that
paper is smaller than A4
size in width.

Probable Cause

Solution

Paper width sensor
defective

Replace the carriage
PCB ASSY.

Head flat cables broken

Replace the carriage
PCB ASSY.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

No head property data
has been entered

Enter the head property
data.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Paper smaller than the
specified size loaded in
the paper tray

Load the correct size of
paper.

Paper width sensor
defective

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Paper width sensor not
adjusted

Adjust the margin for
borderless printing with
Function code 66 in the
maintenance mode.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Not used.

Recording paper jam in
paper pull-in operation.

Foreign materials in the
paper path

Remove foreign materials.

(The paper width sensor
fails to detect the leading
edge of paper.)

Paper not loaded
correctly in the paper
tray

Reload paper.

Head flat cable
connection failure

Insert the head flat
cables correctly.

Paper width sensor
defective

Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

4- 13

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
83

Symptom
Recording paper jam.
(The registration sensor
detects paper abnormally
early in paper feeding
operation in the normal SF
mode.)

Probable Cause

Solution

Paper is not correctly
set in the paper tray

Reload paper.

Bank ASSY deformed

Replace the bank ASSY.

Registration sensor
actuator unhooked

Set the registration
sensor actuator into
place.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Registration sensor
defective

Replace the registration
sensor PCB.

Foreign materials in the
paper path

Remove foreign
materials.

Registration sensor
actuator caught on the
surrounding parts

Correct the surrounding
parts on which the
actuator caught.

Registration sensor
defective

Replace the registration
sensor PCB.

PF timing belt come off

Set the PF timing belt
into place.

The paper ejection
roller does not rotate
correctly

Replace the engine unit.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

(The registration sensor
sticks to ON in the highspeed feed mode.)

Recording paper jam.
(The registration sensor
sticks to ON after
completion of paper
ejection operation.)

85-87

Not used.

4- 14

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
88

Symptom
Recording paper jam.
(Even after paper pulling-in
operation, the registration
sensor is still OFF.)

Not used.

The paper feed motor does
not rotate.

Probable Cause

Solution

Recording paper not
loaded correctly

Instruct the user to load
the recording paper
correctly.

Jam clear cover not set
correctly

Set the jam clear cover
into place.

Registration sensor
defective

Replace the registration
sensor PCB.

Bank ASSY deformed

Replace the bank ASSY.

Paper pull-in roller
holder defective

Replace the paper pull-in
roller holder.

Mode switching lever
(at the right end of CR
guide rail) not sliding
smoothly

Clean the mode switching
lever.

At the ends of the paper
feed roller shaft, any
gear(s) damaged

Replace the engine unit.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Paper feed motor
defective

Replace the paper feed
motor.

Paper feed motor harness
not connected correctly

Reconnect the paper feed
motor harness.

Abnormal load applied to
the paper feed roller

Replace the PF-related
gear(s).

PF-related gear(s) broken
PF encoder disk stained
or scratched

Replace the PF encoder
disk.

PF encoder sensor
defective

Replace the PF encoder
PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Paper feed motor
defective

Replace the paper feed
motor.

4- 15

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
8B

Symptom
The paper feed motor
stops suddenly.

Probable Cause
Abnormal load applied to
the paper feed roller

Solution
Replace the PF-related
gear(s).

PF-related gear(s) broken

Current protection for the
driver IC activated in
paper feeding operation.

PF encoder disk stained
or scratched

Replace the PF encoder
disk.

PF encoder sensor
defective

Replace the PF encoder
PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Paper feed motor
defective

Replace the paper feed
motor.

The driving current has
exceeded the limit due to
an abnormal load applied
to the PF-related gears
and rollers.

Replace the PF-related
gears.
Replace the PF encoder
disk.
Replace the PF encoder
PCB.
Replace the main PCB.
Replace the paper feed
motor.

The paper feed motor
rotates in the reverse
direction.

PF encoder disk
stained or scratched

Replace the PF encoder
disk.

PF encoder disk
dislocated

Replace the PF encoder
disk.

PF encoder sensor
defective

Replace the PF encoder
PCB.

Abnormal load applied
to the paper feed roller

Check the PF roller gear
and its related gears.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Paper feed motor
defective

Replace the paper feed
motor.

Not used.

4- 16

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
8F

Symptom

Probable Cause

The paper feed motor is
being driven and cannot be
stopped.

Software malfunction

90-A0

Not used.

Scanner cover (scanner unit)
or ink cartridge cover is
open.

Document length exceeding
the scan limitation.
During scanning, a
document of 90 cm* or
longer is detected.
During document feeding or
ejecting, a document of 400
cm* or longer is detected.

The document rear sensor
does not come ON during
document pull-in operation.

Open and close the
scanner cover.
Unplug and plug the AC
cord.

Paper feed motor harness
not connected correctly

Solution

Correct the connection.

Scanner/ink cartridge
cover sensor broken

Replace the cover sensor
PCB.

Scanner cover sensor
actuator or ink
cartridge cover sensor
actuator unhooked

Set the scanner cover
sensor actuator or ink
cartridge cover sensor
actuator into place.

Control panel PCB
defective

Replace the control
panel PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Document jam

Remove the jammed
document.

Foreign materials in the
machine

Remove foreign materials.

Document rear sensor
actuator caught on the
surrounding parts

Correct the surrounding
parts on which the
actuator caught.

Document rear sensor
broken

Replace the document
rear sensor PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Document jam

Remove the jammed
document.

Foreign materials in the
machine

Remove foreign materials.

Document rear sensor
actuator caught on the
surrounding parts

Correct the surrounding
parts on which the
actuator caught.

Document rear sensor
broken

Replace the document
rear sensor PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

* These values are defaults and can be modified by WSW16, selector 7.
4- 17

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)

Symptom

Probable Cause

Not used.

FAX scanning failure
(1st time).

FAX scanning failure (retry).

CIS defective
White reference film
stained in the scanner
cover
Main PCB defective

Mismatch between the type
of the CIS mounted and
EEPROM data.

Color parameter matching
error. (Used for monitoring
bugs at the factory.)

A9-AE

Not used.

CIS positioning error.

Solution

Replace the scanner
cover (scanner unit).

Replace the main PCB.

Scanner cover containing Check the CIS type
mounted and enter the new
the improper CIS type
CIS type into the
mounted at repair.
EEPROM with Function
code 59 in the
maintenance mode. (Refer
to Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.13).
Install the latest firmware.

Mismatch between the
type of the CIS mounted
and EEPROM data

Check the CIS type
mounted and enter the
new CIS type into the
EEPROM with Function
code 59 in the
maintenance mode. (Refer
to Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.13).

CIS flat cable broken or
not connected properly

Correct the cable
connection.
Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).

CIS motor harness not
connected properly

Correct the harness
connection.

CIS motor defective

Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).

CIS drive unit defective

Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).

CIS defective

Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

4- 18

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)

Symptom

B0-BC

Not used.

Black level data error.

Probable Cause

Solution

CIS defective

Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

BE-DE

Not used.

Modem error.

E0, E1

Not used.

Wired LAN MAC address
not registered. *1

MAC address not
registered correctly

Replace the main PCB.

Wireless LAN MAC
address not registered. *2

MAC address not
registered correctly

Replace the WLAN
PCB.

Not used.

Write error in EEPROM
on the cordless PCB. *3

The base ID code and
cordless handset ID
code registered are
mismatched.

Reregister the cordless
handset ID code.
Replace the cordless
handset.
Replace the cordless
PCB.

Write error in EEPROM.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

No communication
between cordless PCB and
cordless handset. *3

The base ID code and
cordless handset ID
code registered are
mismatched.

Reregister the cordless
handset ID code.
Replace the cordless
handset.
Replace the cordless
PCB.

Data scanning error during
transmission.

CIS defective

Replace the scanner
cover (scanner unit).

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Not used.

*1 For wired LAN-enabled models
*2 For wireless LAN-enabled models
*3 For models with cordless handset

4- 19

Confidential

Error Code
(Hex)
EA

Symptom
Document removed at
phase B. *1

Not used.

Color LCD version
detection failure. *2

Probable Cause

Solution

Document front sensor
actuator caught on the
surrounding parts

Correct the surrounding
parts on which the
actuator caught.

Document front sensor
defective

Replace the document
front sensor PCB.

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Color LCD version not
detected correctly.

Unplug and plug the AC
cord.

Mismatch of color
LCD version

Replace the color LCD
unit.

ED-F6

Not used.

Media module detection
failure.*3

Main PCB defective

Replace the main PCB.

Battery harness connection
failure (For models with
backup battery)

Battery harness not
inserted correctly.

Correct the connection.

(Available in the
maintenance mode only)
F9-FF

Not used.

*1 Phase B: FAX negotiation stage between sending machine and receiving machine
*2 For models with color LCD
*3 For models with PhotoCapture Center

4- 20

Confidential

4.1.2 Communications Errors

If a communications error occurs, the machine:
emits an audible alarm (intermittent beeping) for approximately 4 seconds,
displays the corresponding error message, and
prints out the transmission verification report if the machine is in sending operation.

4- 21

Confidential

Definition of Error Codes on the Communications List
(1)

Calling

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Wrong number called.

No dial tone detected before start of dialing.

Busy tone detected before dialing.

2nd dial tone not detected.

No loop current detected.*

Busy tone detected after dialing or called.

No response from the remote station in sending.

Unobtainable tone detected after dialing.

No response from the calling station in receiving.

*Available in German models only.

(2)

Command reception

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Unable to detect a flag field.

Carrier was OFF for 200 milliseconds or longer.

Abort detected ("1" in succession for 7 bits or more).

Overrun detected.

A frame for 3 seconds or more received.

CRC error in answerback.

Error command received.

Invalid command received.

Command ignored once for document setting or for dumping-out at
turn-around transmission.

T5 time-out error.

CRP received.

EOR and NULL received.

4- 22

Confidential

(3)

Compatibility [checking the NSF and DIS]

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Remote terminal only with V.29 capability in 2400 or 4800 bps
transmission.

Remote terminal not ready for polling.

Remote terminal not equipped with password function or its
password switch OFF.

Remote terminal not equipped with or not ready for confidential
mailbox function.

Remote terminal not equipped with or not ready for relay
broadcasting function.

No confidential mail in the remote terminal.

The available memory space of the remote terminal is less than
that required for reception of the confidential or relay broadcasting instruction.

Remote terminal not equipped with color function.

4- 23

Confidential

(4)

(5)

Instructions received from the remote terminal [checking the NSC, DTC, NSS, and DCS]

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Illegal coding system requested.

Illegal recording width requested.

ECM requested although not allowed.

Polled while not ready.

No document to send when polled.

Nation code or manufacturer code not coincident.

Polled by any other manufacturers' terminal while waiting for
secure polling.

Invalid resolution selected.

Invalid full-color mode requested.

Command reception [checking the NSF and DIS after transmission of NSS and DCS]

Code 1

Code 2

Causes
Vertical resolution capability changed after compensation of
background color.

4- 24

Confidential

(6)

(7)

ID checking

Code 1

Code 2

Password plus "lower 4 digits of telephone number" not
coincident.

Password not coincident.

Polling ID not coincident.

DCN reception

Code 1

Code 2

(8)

Causes

Causes
DCN received.

TCF transmission/reception

Code 1

Code 2

Causes
Fallback impossible.

4- 25

Confidential

(9)

Signal isolation

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Unable to detect video signals and commands within 6 seconds
after CFR is transmitted.

Received PPS containing invalid page count or block count.

(10) Video signal reception

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Error correction sequence not terminated even at the final
transmission speed for fallback.

Receive buffer empty. (5-second time-out)

Receive buffer full during operation except receiving into memory.

Decoding error continued on 500 lines.

Decoding error continued for 10 seconds.

Time-out: 13 seconds or more for one-line transmission.

RTC not found and carrier OFF signal detected for 6 seconds.

RTC found but no command detected for 60 seconds.

Receive buffer full during receiving into memory.

No video data to be sent.

Unable to continue to receive color FAX. (Remaining ink
insufficient)

RTN, PIN, or ERR received at the calling terminal.*

RTN, PIN, or ERR received at the called terminal.*
* Available in German models only

4- 26

Confidential

(11) General communications-related

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Unable to receive the next-page data.

Unable to receive polling even during turn-around transmission
due to call reservation.

PC interface error.

Communication canceled by pressing the STOP key before
establishment of FAX communication*.

Communication canceled by pressing the STOP key after
establishment of FAX communication*.

Transmission canceled due to a scanning error caused by no
document or document feed problem in ADF scanning in real time
transmission.

* Establishment of FAX communication
FAX communication is established when the calling station receives a DIS (reception capability)
signal from the called station and the called station receives an NSS or DCS (communications test)
signal from the calling station.
(12) Maintenance mode

Code 1

Code 2

Causes

Failed to detect 1300 Hz signal in burn-in operation.

Failed to detect PB signals in burn-in operation.

(13) Equipment error

Code 1

Code 2

X X

Causes
Equipment error. (For X X, refer to Section 4.1.1 [ 2 ].)

4- 27

Confidential

4.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.2.1 Introduction

This section gives the service personnel some of the troubleshooting procedures to be followed if
an error or malfunction occurs with the machine. It is impossible to anticipate all of the possible
problems which may occur in future and determine the troubleshooting procedures, so this section
covers some sample problems. However, those samples will help service personnel pinpoint and
repair other defective elements if he/she analyzes and examines them well.

4.2.2 Precautions

Be sure to observe the following to prevent the secondary troubles from happening:
(1) Always unplug the AC power cord from the outlet when removing the covers and PCBs,
adjusting the mechanisms, or conducting continuity testing with a circuit tester.
(2) When disconnecting the connectors, do not pull the lead wires but hold the connector housings.
(3)

Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static electricity
charged in your body.

When repairing the PCBs, handle them with extra care.

After repairing the defective section, be sure to check again if the repaired section works correctly.
Also record the troubleshooting procedure so that it would be of use for future trouble occurrence.

4.2.3 Checking Prior to Troubleshooting

Prior to proceeding to the troubleshooting procedures given in Section 4.2.4, make the following
initial checks:
Environmental conditions
Check that:
(1) The machine is placed on a flat, firm surface.
(2) The machine is used in a clean environment at or near normal room temperature (10°C to
35°C) with normal relative humidity (20 to 80%).
(3) The machine is not exposed to direct sunlight or harmful gases.
Power requirements
Check that:
(1) The power supply specified on the rating plate on the machine is used. The supply voltage
stays within the rating ±10%.
(2) Each voltage level on AC input lines and DC lines is correct.
(3) All cables and harnesses are firmly connected.

4- 28

Confidential

Recording paper
Check that:
(1) A recommended type of recording paper is used.
(2) The recording paper is not dampened.
Ink cartridges
(1) Check that all of four ink cartridges are loaded.
Head/carriage unit
(1) Repeat the purging operation (Function code 76) several times. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.21.)
(2) Clean the print surface of the head/carriage unit.

4- 29

Confidential

4.2.4 Troubleshooting Based on Problem Type
[1]

Control panel and LCD problems
Problem

Check:

(1) LCD shows nothing.

Models with color LCD
• Color LCD and its flat cable
• Power supply PCB
• Main PCB
Models with monochrome LCD
• Monochrome LCD and its flat cable
• Panel-main harness
• Control panel PCB
• Power supply PCB
• Main PCB

(2) Control panel inoperative.

•
•
•
•

[2]

Panel-main harness
Control panel PCB
Rubber keypads
Main PCB

Telephone problems
Problem

Check:

(1) No phone call can be made
with the handset. *1

•
•
•
•
•

Hook switch
Rubber keypads
Control panel PCB
Main PCB
MJ PCB

(2) Speed dialing will not work.

• Ordinary dialing function
If it works normally, check the main PCB; if not, refer to item
(1) above.

(3) Dial does not switch between
tone and pulse.

• Main PCB

(4) The ringer does not sound.

• Speaker
• Main PCB
• MJ PCB

(5) No phone call can be made
with the cordless handset. *2

•
•
•
•

Cordless handset
Cordless PCB
Main PCB
MJ PCB
*1 For models with handset
*2 For models with cordless handset

4- 30

Confidential

[3]

Communications problems
Problem

(1) No tone is transmitted.

Check:

• Main PCB
• MJ PCB

[4]

Paper/document feeding problems
Problem

Check:

(1) The "Enter Fax No." message
does not appear although
documents are set.*

• Sensors by using Function code 32 in the maintenance mode
(Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.8.)
• Document front sensor actuator
• Document front sensor PCB
• Main PCB

(2) Document not fed.*

•
•
•
•
•
•

(3) Document double feeding*

• ADF parts

(4) Document jam*

• Document rear sensor actuator
• Foreign materials in the document path
• Sensors by using Function code 32 in the maintenance mode
(Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.8.)
• ADF motor
• Main PCB

(5) Recording paper not fed.

•
•
•
•
•
•

(6) Recording paper jam

• Paper feeding mechanism
• Foreign materials in the paper path
• Check that the carriage-head flat cable is connected to the
carriage PCB.
• Carriage PCB
• Main PCB

ADF and its related sections
Foreign materials in the document path
ADF motor and its harness
Document feed rollers and their related gears
Document front and rear sensor PCBs
Main PCB

Paper pull-in roller holder
Base pad in the paper tray
Jam clear cover
PF-related gears
Main PCB
Paper feed motor

*For models with ADF

4- 31

Confidential

[5]

Print-image problems

If there is any problem with any image printed, first make a copy using the machine.
If the copied image is normal, the cause of the problem may be the sending station (e.g., PC and
digital camera) or the memory card* inserted; if it is abnormal, proceed with the following checks:
* For models with PhotoCapture Center
Examples of Defective Images
Completely blank

All black

Random color

Light

Dark

Ink splash

Overlapping lines
over the whole
page

Straight vertical
stripes

Blurred
vertical
stripes

White vertical
streaks

Print edges not
aligned

Random
missing dots

White horizontal
streaks

Stained leading
edge of recording
paper

Separated lines at
the trailing edge of
the recording paper

Characters having
shadows (ghost)

Separated lines
over the whole
page

Overlapping lines
at the trailing
edge of the
recording paper

VWXYZ

4- 32

Confidential

Problem

(1) Completely blank

Action to be taken

At the scanner
Check that the document is placed facing in the correct direction.
In ADF scanning (available only in models with ADF units), is
the document placed face down in the document tray?
In flat-bed scanning also, is the document placed face down on
the scanner glass?

(2) Random color

Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS flat cable)
- Main PCB
At the printer
• Check the ink cartridges. If any cartridges have run out of ink,
replace them.
• Press the Ink (Ink Management) key to perform a head
cleaning operation.
• Check the connection of the head flat cables on the main PCB.
(If either of those cables is broken or damaged, replace it.)
• Check the head property data. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.17.)
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Replace the main PCB.
• Clean the head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a
Rubycel stick. For the cleaning procedure, refer to Chapter 8,
Section 8.2 "CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT."
• Replace the maintenance unit.
• Check that the drain tubes are not bent.

(3) All black

At the scanner
Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS flat cable)
- Main PCB
At the printer
Check the following components:
- Head/carriage unit and carriage PCB ASSY
- Main PCB

4- 33

Confidential

Problem

(4) Light

Action to be taken

At the scanner
Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS unit)
- Main PCB
At the printer
Check the following components:
- Ink cartridges
- Head/carriage unit and carriage PCB ASSY
- Main PCB
- Power supply PCB
- Head property data (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.17.)
- Maintenance unit

(5) Dark

At the scanner
Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS unit)
- Main PCB
At the printer side
• Perform the purging operation (Function code 76) several
times to remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. If the
problem persists, replace the head/carriage unit. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.21.)
Check the following components:
- Ink cartridges
- Head/carriage unit and carriage PCB ASSY
- Main PCB
- Power supply PCB
- Head property data (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.17.)
- Maintenance unit

(6) Straight or blurred vertical
stripes

Scanner
Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS unit)
- Scanner glass
Printer
• Check whether paper is coming into contact with any
components other than the ones it should during ejecting.
• Check the CR encoder strip for stains or scratches. (If the CR
encoder strip is not hooked properly, correct it.)

4- 34

Confidential

Problem

Action to be taken

(7) Ink splash

Printer
• Perform the purging operation (Function code 76) several times
to remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.21.)
• Check the ink cartridges. Any of them has run out of ink or the
ink viscosity has been increased, so replace it.
• Check the head property data (Refer to Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.17.)
• Check that the main drain tube is not bent.
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Replace the main PCB.
• Replace the power supply PCB.
• Replace the maintenance unit.

(8) Print edges not aligned

Printer
• Check the alignment of vertical print lines with Function code
65 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.15.)
• Perform the print head skew compensation with the head skew
adjuster knob. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].
• Check the head/carriage unit.
• Check the CR encoder strip for stains or scratches. (If the CR
encoder strip is not hooked properly, correct it.)
• Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit. (Refer to
Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].)
• Check the height adjustment mechanism of the head/carriage
unit (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2.3.)
• If the "head-platen gap offset" is enabled with assurance mode
switch AMS 02 (Function code 88), align the vertical print lines
(Function code 65). (Refer to Chapter 9, Sections 9.1.4. 25 and
9.1.4.15.)

(9) Random missing dots

Printer
• Perform the purging operation (Function code 76) several times
to remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.21.)
• Check the ink cartridges. If any cartridges have run out of ink,
replace them.
• Check that the carriage-head flat cable is connected to the
carriage PCB.
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Check the connection of the head flat cables on the main PCB.
(If either of those cables is broken or damaged, replace it.)
• Replace the main PCB.
• Clean the head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a
Rubycel stick. For the cleaning procedure, refer to Chapter 8,
Section 8.2 "CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT."
• Replace the maintenance unit.

4- 35

Confidential

Problem

Action to be taken

(10) White horizontal streaks

• Perform the purging operation (Function code 76) several
times to remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.21.)
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Check the paper feed-related rollers.
• Perform the print head skew compensation with the head skew
adjuster knob. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].
• Clean the head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a
Rubycel stick. For the cleaning procedure, refer to Chapter 8,
Section 8.2 "CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT."

(11) Stained leading edge of
recording paper

Printer
• Press the Ink (Ink Management) key to perform a head
cleaning operation.
• Check that the head/carriage unit is set into place.
• Check the height adjustment mechanism of the head/carriage
unit (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2.3.)
• If the "head-platen gap offset" is enabled with assurance mode
switch AMS 02 (Function code 88), align the vertical print
lines (Function code 65). (Refer to Chapter 9, Sections 9.1.4.
25 and 9.1.4.15.)

(12) Overlapping or separated
lines over the whole page

• Adjust the paper feeding correction value of the paper feed
roller with Function code 58 in the maintenance mode. (Refer
to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 5 ].)
• Perform the print head skew compensation with the head skew
adjuster knob. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].

(13) Overlapping or separated
lines at the trailing edge of the
recording paper

• Adjust the paper feeding correction value of the paper ejection
roller with Function code 58 in the maintenance mode. (Refer
to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 5 ].)

(14) Characters having shadows
(ghost)

• Adjust the paper feeding correction values of the paper feed
roller and paper ejection roller with Function code 58 in the
maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 5 ].)
• Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit with
Function code 63 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter
7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].)
• Replace the PF encoder disk.
• Replace the PF encoder PCB.

VWXYZ

4- 36

Confidential

[6]

PC-driven printing problems
Problem

(1) PC-driven printing is
impossible.

Action to be taken

• Interface with the host computer
• PC interface cable
• Main PCB
• USB interface
• Network interface

[7]

Printing from memory cards--Compact Flash, Memory Stick, SD Memory Card, or xD-Picture
Card (For models with PhotoCapture Center)
Problem

Action to be taken

(1) No image data can be read.

• Insertion direction of memory cards
- Insert a Compact Flash card, SD Memory Card, or xDPicture Card with the label side facing up.
- Insert a Memory Stick card with the cutout corner leading
and facing towards the left.
• Memory cards
- Formatted?
- Any data in the memory card?
- Images stored in the memory card are in EXIF2.0compliant JPEG file format (having extension .JPG)?
• Main PCB

(2) More than one memory
card cannot be recognized.

• The machine can recognize only a single memory card at a
time even if it has two cards in the two slots. Only the first
inserted one can be recognized.
If only a single memory card is inserted, refer to item (1)
above.

(3) Media printing is
impossible.

• Check whether the memory is full.

4- 37

Confidential

[8]

Wireless LAN (WLAN)*
Problem

(1) PC-driven printing via the
wireless LAN is
impossible.

Action to be taken

Check the following:
- The address has not been changed at both the machine and
PC.
- Connection between the WLAN PCB and the main PCB
- WLAN PCB
*For wireless LAN-enabled models

[9]

Others
Problem

(1) When the power is turned
on (when the power cord is
plugged into an electrical
outlet), the scanner makes a
grating noise.

Action to be taken

Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS flat cable)
- Main PCB

4- 38

Confidential

4.2.5 Problems Encountered Frequently in the Past

This section lists the four problems most frequently encountered during on-site service in the past.
- Paper jams
- Error message "MACHINE ERROR 4F"
- Ink-related problems
- Auto document feeder (ADF) failure (For models with ADF)
[1]

Paper jams

A paper jam may occur not only due to machine malfunction but also to the user's actions.
IMPORTANT: In some cases, foreign material that has found its way into the machine without the
user realizing can be the cause of a paper jam. Instruct the user to place nothing on top of the
machine that might fall into it.
Problems due to the user's actions
Check

Possible causes

Problems that may result

Recording paper

Paper not suited to use with the
machine was used.

Paper with labels attached, for
example, may leave labels
inside the machine.

For foreign
materials

Fragments of paper that were left
behind when previous paper jams
occurred.
Foreign materials such as tacks
have found their way into the
machine.

Foreign materials can hinder the
paper feed.

Problems due to machine malfunction
Check

Possible causes

Problems that may result

Star wheels on star
wheel support

Star wheels became dislocated
when paper jam occurred.

Dislocated star wheels can
hinder paper feed.

Sensors and
actuators

Any sensor(s) not working.

If a sensor does not turn on, the
related roller(s) will not rotate.

Bank ASSY

The bank ASSY is deformed.

A deformed section on the bank
ASSY can cause doublefeeding.

CR encoder strip

The CR encoder strip is stained.

A stained CR encoder strip can
cause a carriage drive error
during printing that will stop the
printing operation.

4- 39

Confidential

[2]

"MACHINE ERROR 4F" error message

The error message "MACHINE ERROR 4F" appears if the head drive voltage drops from the high
to low level in an abnormally short period. The source of the problem is mainly the head/carriage
unit.
Check

Head/carriage unit

Possible causes

- The carriage-head flat cable is
disconnected from the carriage
PCB.
- Piezoelectric ceramic actuator
defective. (Cracks or rare short)

Main PCB

Problems that may result

At the start of printing or head
cleaning operation, correct
voltage will not be applied to
the electrodes on the surface of
the piezoelectric ceramic
actuator (described in Chapter
3, Section 3.2.2.1).

- A power failure when the
machine was in operation resulted
in a damaged part.

The head drive voltage drops
from the high to low level in an
abnormally short period.

- The drive voltage and current
supplied are too low to drive the
head/carriage unit.

The head drive voltage
becomes too high or low.

- Voltage detection circuit
defective.
Carriage PCB

[3]

- Head power circuit insulation
failure.

Ink-related problems

Problems of this nature may arise not only due to machine malfunction but also to the user's actions.
IMPORTANT: In many cases, the user fails to set ink cartridges in place.
Problems due to the user's actions
Check

Ink cartridges

Possible causes

- Ink cartridges are not inserted
fully into the ink refill ASSY.

Problems that may result

The machine will not be able to
print.

- One or more of the ink cartridges
are not loaded.
- One or more of the ink cartridges
has run out of ink.

4- 40

Confidential

Problems due to machine malfunction
Check

Head/carriage unit

Possible causes

- Air bubbles, high viscosity ink, or
foreign materials have found their
way into the head/carriage unit.
- Head flat cables are broken.
- The carriage-head flat cable has
not been inserted into the carriage
PCB.

Maintenance unit

- Air bubbles, high viscosity ink, or
foreign materials get into the
maintenance unit.

Problems that may result

Dot missing occurs on the
printout.
The machine will not be able to
print or drive the head/carriage
unit.

Head cleaning operation will
not be possible and/or the
maintenance unit will not work.

- Torque not transmitted.
- Drain tube bent or pinched.
CIS unit

[4]

The CIS unit is weak in identifying
colors.

The quality of print colors in
copying operation will be low.

Auto document feeder (ADF) malfunction (For models with ADF)

An ADF failure may occur not only due to machine malfunction but also to the user's actions.
Problems due to the user's actions
Check

Possible causes

Problems that may result

Document guides

The document guides are not
positioned to match the width of
document(s) loaded.

Documents will skew.

Inside the ADF

- Foreign materials have found
their way into ADF.

Foreign materials can hinder
document feeding.

- The size of the document loaded
is smaller than the specified size.

The document will jam inside
the ADF.

4- 41

Confidential

Problems due to machine malfunction
Check

ADF

Document rear
sensor

Possible causes

Problems that may result

The spring plates of the ADF parts
are deformed.

Documents will stop halfway
through feeding.

The ADF parts are deformed or
worn.

Two or more sheets of
documents will be fed through
at once.

- The document rear sensor is
defective.

Documents will stop halfway
through feeding or the machine
will not be able to recognize
them.

- The document rear sensor
actuator is deformed.
ADF motor

The ADF motor does not rotate.

Documents will not be able to
be drawn in.

Main PCB

The motor driver IC is defective.

Documents will not be able to
be drawn in.

4- 42

Confidential

4.2.6 Possible Component Defects and Resulting Problems

This section lists possible component defects and what happens due to them. It also describes what
happens if the necessary adjustments or data settings into the memories is not made.
[1]

ADF mechanism (For models with ADF)
Defective component

Result

Error codes

ADF motor

- Document will not be able to be fed.

---

Document feed rollers
1, 2

- Documents will jam.
- Documents will skew.
- Documents will not be able to be fed.

A2, A3

Separation pad

- Two or more sheets of documents will be fed at
once.

---

Document front sensor
actuator

- Document draw-in operation will not start even
though documents have been set.

Document rear sensor
actuator

- Document draw-in operation will continue even
though all documents have been fed into the
machine.

A2, A3

4- 43

Confidential

[2]

Scanner mechanism
Defective component

CIS unit

Result

- Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

Error codes

- When the power is turned on, abnormal noises will
be heard from the machine.
- Any of the following errors occurs:
- Dark level offset data level error for scanning
- Gain control data level error for scanning
- Scan area right/left edge detection error
- Horizontal scanning edge reduction/enlargement
detection error in scanning area setting
- White/black level data error
- Scan starting edge detection error
CIS flat cable

- When the power is turned on, the "Unable to Init.
AF" (for models with color LCD) or "Init. Unable
AF" (for models with monochrome LCD) appears
on the LCD.

---

Scanner drive unit

- When the power is turned on, abnormal noises will
be heard from the machine.

---

4- 44

Confidential

[3]

Head/carriage unit drive and purge mechanisms
Defective component

Result

Error codes

Head/carriage unit

- Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

---

Carriage motor

- The head/carriage unit will not be able to travel
normally.
- When the power is turned on, the "Unable to Init.
3*" (for models with color LCD) or "Init. Unable
3*" (for models with monochrome LCD) appears on
the LCD.

30, 31, 32,
33

- The following image may appear on the printout:

CR encoder strip

- The head/carriage unit will not be able to travel
normally.
- Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

30, 31, 32,
33

Ink cartridge PCB

- The "Ink Empty XX" message will appear even
though there is ink.
- Even though the ink has run out, the "Ink Empty
XX" message will not appear.

26, 27, 28,
29

Paper width sensor

- A paper jam will occur.

80, 82

- Print on the platen without paper.

---

4- 45

Confidential

Defective component

Error codes

- Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

---

Tube pump

- The tube pump will not draw out ink from the head
nozzles.

---

Purge cam switch

- The purge cam switch will not detect the purge cam
ON/OFF timing.

50, 51, 52

Result

Error codes

Maintenance unit
Head caps or
wiper

[4]

Result

Print head mechanism
Defective component

Head/carriage unit and
carriage PCB ASSY

- Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

4- 46

---

Confidential

[5]

Sheet feeder (SF) mechanism
Defective component

Bank ASSY
(shown on page 4-39)

[6]

Result

- Two or more sheets of paper will be fed at once.
- No paper will be fed.

Error codes

82, 83, 88

Paper feeding mechanism
Defective component

Paper feed roller
Paper ejection roller

Result

Error codes

- Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

---

- The following image may appear on the printout:

---

(If the paper feed
roller or paper
ejection roller is
defective, it is
necessary to replace
the engine unit.)

PF encoder disk

VWXYZ

PF encoder sensor

[7]

Speaker
Defective component

Speaker

Result

No key clicks will be heard.
Abnormal noises will be heard from the machine.
The ringer will not sound.
No tone will be transmitted.

4- 47

Error codes

---

Confidential

[8]

Control panel and LCD
Defective component

Result

Error codes

Rubber keypad

- Keys will not work.

---

Control panel PCB

- The monochrome LCD will show nothing. *1
- Keys will not work.
- The LEDs will not light.

---

Color LCD *2

The color LCD will show nothing.

---

*1 For models with monochrome LCD
*2 For models with color LCD
[9]

PCBs
Defective component

Main PCB

Result

No faxes will be able to be sent.
No phone calls will be able to be made.
Copying will not be possible.
PC-driven printing will not be possible.
Scanning will not be possible.
The machine will not be able to be turned on.
Any of the following images may appear on the
printout:

Error codes

---

- The ringer will not sound.
MJ PCB

No faxes will be able to be sent.
No phone calls will be able to be made.
The ringer will not sound.
No tone will be detected.
The machine will not be able to switch to the
external telephone.

Power supply PCB

- The machine will not be able to be turned on.
- The LED will not light.

---

- The LCD will show nothing.

4- 48

Confidential

[ 10 ] Adjustments/data in the memories
Adjustment/data
setting error in the
following
components:

Result

Refer to:

EEPROM
customizing code

- The machine will not work as
specified for that model or that
shipping destination.

- Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.19
- Appendix 3

ID code

- The machine will not be able to be
identified by the PC connected to it
via USB.

- Chapter 7,
Section 7.3, [ 9 ]

Head property data
(in the EEPROM)

- The print quality will deteriorate.

- Chapter 7,
Section 7.2, [ 1 ]
- Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.17

Correction of head
positioning error

- Any of the following images may
appear on the printout:

- Chapter 7,
Section 7.2, [ 4 ]

Updating of the
paper feeding
correction value
for the paper feed
roller/paper
ejection roller
(Function code 58)

- Any of the following images may
appear on the printout:

- Chapter 7,
Section 7.2, [ 5 ]

Setting of the CIS
scanner area

- The white and black level data will
not be compensated properly.

Error
codes

- Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.12

- Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.11

- The scanning center position will not
be centered.
- The enlargement/reduction ratio of
copies will go wrong.

4- 49

Confidential

Adjustment/data
setting not
performed

Alignment of
vertical print lines

Result

- The following image may appear on
the printout:

4- 50

Refer to:

Error
codes

- Chapter 7,
Section 7.2, [ 6 ]
- Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.15

Confidential

CHAPTER 5
TRANSFER OF DATA LEFT IN THE MACHINE
TO BE SENT FOR REPAIR

Confidential

CHAPTER 5 TRANSFER OF DATA LEFT IN THE MACHINE
TO BE SENT FOR REPAIR
This chapter describes how to transfer data left in the machine to be sent for repair. The service
personnel should instruct end users to follow the transfer procedure given in this chapter if the
machine at the user site cannot print received data due to the printing mechanism defective. End
users can transfer received data to another machine to prevent data loss.

CONTENTS
5.1

TRANSFERRING RECEIVED FAX DATA ..................................................................5-1

Confidential

5.1 TRANSFERRING RECEIVED FAX DATA
When the machine at the user site requires to be repaired, unplugging the power cord from the wall
socket for sending the machine for repair will lose received FAX data if unprinted and left in the
machine.
To prevent such data loss, the service personnel should instruct end users (e.g., by telephone) to
transfer data to another facsimile machine using the procedure below.
NOTE: The number of files that can be transferred at a time is 99. To transfer 100 files or more,
carry out the following procedure more than one time.
TIP: If there are both color and monochrome data in a file to be transferred, the monochrome data
will be transferred first. If the receiver machine does not support the color function, the sender
machine cannot transfer color data, resulting in an error.
Operating Procedure

(1) Connect the machine to be repaired (that has received data in the memory) to the telephone
line.
(2) Switch the machine on.
(3) Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start), Menu, and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in
this order to access user-accessible functions in the maintenance mode.
The "MAINTENANCE 10" appears on the LCD.
(4) Call up the "MAINTENANCE 53" using the

and

keys and press the OK key.

The "FAX TRANSFER" appears on the LCD.
(5) To check the number of received files, press the 1 key.
The "1.NO. OF JOBS" appears on the LCD.
Press the OK key, and the number of received files appears, just as "NO. OF. JOBS: 10."
Pressing the Stop/Exit key returns the machine to the "FAX TRANSFER" state.
(6) Select data to transfer as follows.
To transfer the activity report only, press the 2 key.
The "2.ACTIVITY" appears.
To transfer received files together with the activity report, press the 3 key.
The "3.DOCUMENTS" appears. Note that if there is no received file, the "NO
DOCUMENTS" appears.
To transfer the communication list for the latest communication, press the 4 key.
The "4.COM.LIST (NEW)" appears.
To transfer the communication list for last three errors, press the 5 key.
The "5.COM.LIST (ERR3)" appears.
(7) With the "2.ACTIVITY," "3.DOCUMENTS," "4.COM.LIST (NEW)," or "5.COM.LIST
(ERR3)" being displayed in step (6), press the OK key.
The "ENTER NO. &SET" appears.
5- 1

Confidential

(8) Enter the telephone number of the receiver machine and press the OK key again.
NOTE: Be sure to type the telephone number with the numerical keys. No speed dialing is
allowed in this procedure.
The machine displays the "ACCEPTED" for approx. two seconds and starts dialing to transfer
data.
The machine automatically returns to the standby state.
No station ID will be attached. A cover page and end page as shown on the next page will be
automatically attached, instead.

5- 2

Confidential

Cover page sample

End page sample

5- 3

Confidential

CHAPTER 6
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND
LUBRICATION

Confidential

CHAPTER 6 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND LUBRICATION
This chapter details procedures for disassembling and reassembling the machine together with
related notes. The disassembly order flow provided enables you to see at a glance the quickest
way to get to component(s) involved.
At the start of a disassembly job, you check the disassembly order flow that guides you through
a shortcut to the target components.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points to which the specified
lubricants should be applied during reassembly jobs.
The illustrations in this chapter are based on "models with ADF" and "models with handset."

CONTENTS
6.1

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY...............................................................................6-1
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................6-1
Tightening Torque................................................................................................6-2
Preparation .........................................................................................................6-3
How to Access the Target Component ..................................................................6-4
Disassembly Flowchart ........................................................................................6-5
6.1.1

Jam Clear Cover...........................................................................................6-6

6.1.2

Scanner Cover (Scanner Unit) .......................................................................6-7

6.1.3

ADF & Document Cover ASSY* (Document Cover)....................................... 6-13

6.1.4

Disassembly of ADF & Document Cover ASSY (Only for models with ADF).... 6-16

6.1.5

Control Panel ASSY, Scanner Cover Sensor Actuator, Ink Cartridge
Cover Sensor Actuator, and Cover Sensor PCB ........................................... 6-24

6.1.6

Components of Control Panel ASSY ............................................................ 6-26

6.1.7

Charge Stand ASSY (for models with cordless handset) ..................................... 6-30

6.1.8

Backup Battery (for models with backup battery) and Upper Cover ..................... 6-31

6.1.9

Antenna & Cordless PCB ASSY (for models with cordless handset) .................... 6-33

6.1.10 Speaker ..................................................................................................... 6-35
6.1.11 Ink Cartridge Cover, Media Module Cover, Front Cover, and WLAN PCB*...... 6-36
6.1.12 Main PCB................................................................................................... 6-38
6.1.13 MJ/PS Shield Box and Power Supply PCB ................................................... 6-44
6.1.14 Hook Switch PCB (for models with handset) ..................................................... 6-47
6.1.15 Head/Carriage Unit and Ink Refill ASSY ....................................................... 6-49
6.1.16 Ink Absorber Box, Ink Absorber Felt, and PF Encoder Disk ........................... 6-61
6.1.17 Engine Unit and Flushing Box...................................................................... 6-63
Confidential

6.1.18 Components on the Engine Unit (Maintenance unit, Mode switching lever &
clutch gear ASSY, Carriage motor, Inner chute ASSY, Registration sensor PCB,
PF encoder PCB, Paper feed motor, Paper pull-in gear shaft, and Paper
pull-in roller holder) ...................................................................................... 6-67

6.1.19 Paper Tray ASSY ....................................................................................... 6-73
6.1.20 Routing of the Harnesses, Flat Cables, and Ink Supply Tubes ....................... 6-75
6.2

LUBRICATION ...................................................................................................... 6-87

Confidential

6.1 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Safety Precautions

To prevent the creation of secondary problems by mishandling, observe the following precautions
during maintenance work.
(1) Before replacing parts or units, unplug the power cord and telephone line.
In particular, when having access to the power supply inside the machine, make sure that the
power cord is unplugged from the electrical outlet; when having access to the main PCB or MJ
PCB, make sure that both the power cord and telephone line are unplugged from the electrical
outlet.
(2) Be careful not to lose screws, washers, or other parts removed for parts replacement.
(3) When using soldering irons and other heat-generating tools, take care not to damage the resin
parts such as wires, PCBs, and covers.
(4) Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts.
Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static electricity
charged in your body. When transporting PCBs, be sure to wrap them in conductive sheets.
When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job on a
static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
(5) Be sure to reinsert self-tapping screws correctly, if removed.
(6) Tighten screws to the torque values listed on the next page.
(7) When connecting or disconnecting cable connectors, hold the connector bodies not the wires. If
the connector has a lock, always slide the connector lock to unlock it.
(8) Before reassembly, apply the specified lubricant to the specified points. (Refer to Section 6.2 in
this chapter.)
(9) After repairs, check not only the repaired portion but also that the connectors and other related
portions function properly before operation checks.
(10) Once the head/carriage unit prints, it will start head locking operation after five seconds from
the end of printing. The head locking operation will take 5 to 10 seconds. NEVER unplug the
power cord before the machine completes the head locking operation; doing so will make the
head/carriage unit unusable and require replacement with a new head/carriage unit.
When you receive the machine from the user or when you pack it for sending it back to the
user, check the head locking state.

6- 1

Confidential

Tightening Torque
Location of screw

Screw type

Q'ty

Tightening torque
N•m (kgf•cm)

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Taptite, cup B M3x8
Taptite, bind B M4x12
Taptite, cup B M3x8
ADF motor*1
Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x6
(Together with grounding wire*1 using one screw)
Document roller holder*1
Taptite, cup B M3x10

1
3
1
2

0.50 ±0.1 (5 ±1)
0.70 ±0.1 (7 ±1)
0.50 ±0.1 (5 ±1)
0.70 ±0.1 (7 ±1)

0.50 ±0.1 (5 ±1)

Control panel ASSY
LCD support cover*2

Taptite, cup B M3x10
Taptite, bind B M3x8

3
2

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Charge stand ASSY*3
(Together with charge PCB)

Taptite, cup B M3x10

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Upper cover

Taptite, bind B M4x12
Taptite, cup B M3x10
Taptite, cup S M3x6*3

6
1
1

0.70 ±0.1 (7 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Antenna & cordless PCB ASSY*3

Taptite, Torx pan B M3x10
Taptite, cup B M3x12

1
1

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.60 ±0.1 (6 ±1)

Grounding wire (for WLAN PCB)*4
(Together with main PCB shield frame)

Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Main PCB shield

Taptite, cup B M3x10
Taptite, cup S M3x6*2
Taptite, cup S M3x6
Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8

2
1
2
1

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Power cord holder*5
Power supply PCB
MJ shield
MJ PCB

Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8
Taptite, cup S M3x6
Taptite, cup B M3x12
Taptite, cup S M3x6
Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8
Taptite, cup S M3x6

1
1
1
4
1
1

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.60 ±0.1 (6 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Flat cable support plate

Taptite, bind B M4x12

0.70 ±0.1 (7 ±1)

Chassis support
Engine unit

Taptite, cup B M3x12
Taptite, cup B M3x12

1
1

0.60 ±0.1 (6 ±1)
0.60 ±0.1 (6 ±1)

Maintenance unit (top)
(right side)

Taptite, bind B M3x8
Taptite, cup S M3x6

2
1

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)
0.80 ±0.1 (8 ±1)

Carriage motor

Screw, bind M3x6

0.70 ±0.1 (7 ±1)

PF encoder PCB

Screw, bind M2x12

0.15 ±0.05 (1.5 ±0.5)

Paper feed motor

Screw, bind M2.6x4

0.40 ±0.1 (4 ±1)

Grounding wire*1 (for ADF motor)

Taptite, cup S M3x6

ADF reinforcement plate*
ADF unit*1

(Together with cordless PCB)

Main PCB
Main PCB shield frame
(Together with MJ/PS shield box)
MJ/PS shield box

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
6- 2

For models with ADF
For models with color LCD
For models with cordless handset
For wireless LAN-enabled models
For 120V series
Confidential

Preparation

Prior to proceeding with the disassembly procedure,
(1) Unplug the following:
- Power cord from the electrical outlet
- Modular jack of the telephone line from the machine
- Modular jack of the curled cord*1 (and remove the handset*1)
- USB cable, if connected
- LAN cable*2, if connected
- USB digital camera cable or USB flash memory drive, if connected
- Modular jack of the external telephone set, if connected
(2) Remove the following:
- Paper tray ASSY
- Handset mount*1 (see the illustration below)
(3) Remove memory cards*3 if inserted in the machine.
*1 For models with handset
*2 For wired LAN-enabled models
*3 For models with PhotoCapture Center

Paper tray ASSY

Telephone line cord

Handset*1

Removing the handset mount

Installing the handset mount

Handset mount*1

Pull the tab on the bottom of the
handset mount outwards, and
remove the handset mount in the
direction of the arrow.

Align the markings on the
machine and handset mount with
each other and slide the handset
mount in the direction of the arrow.

6- 3

(6_01)

Confidential

(4) Remove all four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead.

Ink cartridges
Ink cartridge cover

Protective part

(6_02_J)

How to Access the Target Component

• On the next page is a disassembly flowchart which helps you access the target components. To
remove the maintenance unit, first find it on the flowchart and note its number (
in this case).
To access it, you need to remove all the parts above the maintenance unit on the flowchart ( ,
and
in this case) before the unit itself can be removed.
,
,
,
• Unless otherwise specified, all parts should be replaced in the opposite order to which they were
removed to reassemble the machine.

6- 4

Confidential

Disassembly Flowchart
6.1.1

5/15

6.1.2

Scanner cover damper
and support

Jam clear cover

10/10

6.1.4

CIS flat cable cover
and harness cover

15/30

6.1.19

Document stopper

Paper tray ASSY
- Paper tray cover
- Paper tray extension
- Paper tray and base pad
- Bank ASSY

10/10

6.1.2

Scanner cover (Scanner unit)
6.1.3

10/10

ADF & document
cover ASSY

6.1.6

(Note 1)

30/10

6.1.3

30/30
Control panel ASSY

10/10

6.1.3

Document cover

6.1.5

Disassembly/reassembly
standard time (seconds)

75/35

6.1.4

ADF cover

Document sponge
ASSY

50/65

20/20

10/20

6.1.4

- Control panel PCB
- LCD (Color or monochrome)
- Rubber keypad

Document
pressure bar

5/30

6.1.4

ADF
reinforcement plate
15/15

6.1.4

Pinch roller &
spring assemblies

10/10

6.1.5

Scanner cover sensor actuator
Ink cartridge cover sensor actuator

70/70

6.1.4

ADF unit

10/10 (Note 2)

6.1.5

30/30

4
6.1.7 *

Cover sensor PCB

- ADF motor
- Gear 20/45
- Document rear sensor PCB
- Document front sensor PCB
- Document pull-in roller
- Document separation roller
- ADF parts

Charge stand ASSY

3
6.1.8 *

10/10

75/50

6.1.8

Upper cover

Backup battery

4
6.1.9 *

10/20

6.1.15

CR encoder
strip

50/70 6.1.10 10/10

Antenna &
cordless PCB ASSY

5/5

6.1.11

Ink cartridge cover

Speaker

10/20

6.1.15

5/5 6.1.11

6.1.11

Front cover

6.1.11

Flat cable support plate
Tube support wire

6.1.13

Main PCB shield
30/50

6.1.12

Carriage PCB with
head flat cables

25/70 (Note 4)

10/15

6.1.16

Head/carriage unit
and CR timing belt

Ink absorber felt

(Note 2)

On the cover sensor PCB: Scanner/ink
cartridge cover sensor

(Note 3)

In the ink refill ASSY:
Four ink cartridge sensors and casing
internal temperature thermistor

(Note 4)

On the head/carriage unit:
Paper width sensor, head thermistor and
CR encoder sensor

(Note 5)

On the maintenance unit:
Purge cam switch

(Note 6)

On the registration sensor PCB:
Registration sensor

70/190

30/30 (Note 5)
Maintenance unit

10/20

6.1.18

5/5

6.1.18

Mode switching lever &
clutch gear ASSY
5/15

6.1.18

Carriage motor

Inner chute ASSY

On the PF encoder PCB:
PF encoder sensor

Registration sensor actuator

6.1.18

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

10/10 (Note 6)
Registration sensor PCB
PF encoder PCB

15/20
Paper pull-in roller holder

5/5

6.1.18

Paper pull-in gear shaft
6.1.18

10/10

6.1.18

5/20
(PF encoder disk)

6.1.18

20/20
Paper feed motor

6.1.17

For models with ADF
For models without ADF
For models with backup battery
For models with cordless handset
For wireless LAN-enabled models
For models with handset
10/10

Flushing box

6- 5

In the ADF unit* :
Document front and rear sensors

5/5

6.1.16

Ink absorber box

Engine unit

6.1.18

20/35

(Note 1)

Ink refill ASSY

6.1.18

Sensors, encoders, and thermistors

50/50 (Note 3)

6.1.17

MJ PCB

Hook switch PCB

6.1.15

30/30

6.1.13

Power supply PCB
with power cord

6.1.14

20/60

6.1.15

PF encoder disk

70/70

6.1.13

Main PCB and its
shield frame

Head cover

5/20

20/20 6.1.16

MJ/PS shield box

20/20

5/5 6.1.12

WLAN PCB

10/5

6.1.15

5/5

Media module cover

(Mini3e_MFC_flowchart)

Confidential

6.1.1

Jam Clear Cover

(1) Pull the jam clear cover to unlatch the two lock arms at both sides.

Lock arm

Lock arm
Jam clear cover
(6_03)

6- 6

Confidential

6.1.2

Scanner Cover (Scanner Unit)

The scanner cover should be removed together with the ADF & document cover ASSY*
(document cover) whose removal procedure is given in Section 6.1.3. The disassembly of the ADF
& document cover ASSY* is detailed in Section 6.1.4.
*For models with ADF

(1) Open the scanner cover until it locks.
(2) Remove the CIS flat cable cover and the harness cover by inserting the tip of a flat screwdriver
into the slots and releasing the latches.

Slots (latches)
Harness cover
CIS flat cable cover
Slots (latches)
Pawl

Pawl

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

ADF & document
cover ASSY

(6_04)

Upper cover

6- 7

Confidential

(3) Disconnect the CIS flat cable from the main PCB, pull it to the rear through the flat core, and
then release it from the cable guides. Unlatch the flat core and take it out of the upper cover.
(4) Disconnect the following harnesses from the main PCB.
- CIS motor harness
- ADF motor harness*
- Document front sensor harness*
- Document rear sensor harness*
(5) Release the grounding wire* by removing the screw.
*For models with ADF
Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Taptite, cup S M3x6

CIS flat cable
Flat core

Upper cover

Grounding wire*
ADF motor harness*

Document front sensor harness*
Latch
CIS motor harness
Document rear sensor harness*

Document front sensor harness
Document front sensor harness* (3-wire) CIS motor harness
(3-wire)
(4-wire)
CIS motor harness
Document rear sensor harness
(4-wire)
(3-wire)
Document rear
ADF motor harness*
ADF motor harness
sensor harness*
(4-wire)
(4-wire)
(3-wire)

(6_05_e)

CIS flat cable
(12-wire)

Main PCB

For models with monochrome LCD

For models with color LCD
(6_06_e)

6- 8

Confidential

(6) While supporting the scanner cover by hand, press the lock arm and release the front end of the
scanner cover support from the upper cover.
(7) Release the harnesses from the cable guides provided at the left end of the upper cover.
*For models with ADF
Scanner cover support

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

CIS motor harness

Upper cover
Scanner cover
support

ADF motor harness*
Grounding wire*
Document rear sensor harness*
Document front sensor harness*

(6_07_e)

Lock arm

(8) Open the scanner cover at approx. 90° and pull it to the rear and off the machine.
Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

CIS flat cable
Flat core
CIS motor harness

ADF motor harness*
Grounding wire*

Document front sensor harness*
Document rear sensor harness*

(6_08_e)

6- 9

Confidential

(9) Place the scanner cover upside down.
(10) To prevent the scanner cover support and damper from getting broken, remove them from the
scanner cover as follows.
Release the lock arm of the scanner cover damper from the scanner cover and pull out the
damper in the direction of arrows shown below. The scanner cover support also comes off.
*For models with ADF
Scanner cover support
Scanner cover damper
Lock arm

Scanner cover
(placed upside down)

(Rear)

CIS motor harness

CIS flat cable
Document front sensor harness*
Document rear sensor harness*
Grounding wire*
ADF motor harness*

(6_09)

Assembling Notes

• Route the CIS motor harness, document front and rear sensor harnesses*, ADF motor harness*
and grounding wire* as shown on the next page.
(*For models with ADF)
• If you replace the scanner cover, check the CIS type (Canon, Rohm, or Lite-On) printed on the
CIS bar code label on the new scanner cover and enter it to the EEPROM (Function code 59),
referring to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.13.
After that, acquire the white level data and set the CIS scanner area (Function code 55), referring
to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.11.

6- 10

Confidential

Models except MFC265C/260C/235C
(Rear)

Route the CIS motor harness
and the bundle of ADF motor
harness and grounding wire
on this side.

Route the bundle of document
front and rear sensor harnesses
on this side.

Upper cover

Main PCB

Grounding wire
ADF motor harness
CIS motor harness
Document rear sensor harness
Document front sensor harness

MFC265C/260C

(6_10_440CN)

(Rear)

Route the CIS motor harness
and the bundle of ADF motor
harness and grounding wire
on this side.

Route the bundle of document
front and rear sensor harnesses
on this side.

Upper cover

Main PCB

Grounding wire
ADF motor harness
CIS motor harness
Document front sensor harness
Document rear sensor harness

6- 11

(6_10_240C)

Confidential

MFC235C
(Rear)

Route the CIS motor harness
on this side.

Upper cover

Main PCB

CIS motor harness

6- 12

(6_10_750CW)

Confidential

6.1.3

ADF & Document Cover ASSY* (Document Cover)

(1) Release the bundle of harnesses (ADF motor harness*, grounding wire*, and document front
and rear sensor harnesses*) from the cable guide in the rear corner of the scanner cover as
shown below.
*For models with ADF
Bundle of harnesses
(ADF motor harness*, grounding wire*,
and document front and rear sensor harnesses*)

CIS motor harness

CIS motor harness
(Rear)

Scanner cover
(placed upside down)

Cable guide
(6_12)

Bundle of harnesses

6- 13

Confidential

(2) Place the scanner cover right side up.
(3) Models with ADF: Turn the ADF & document cover ASSY upright. Slightly lift up the ASSY
and press both ends of hinge R inwards to separate hinge R from the scanner cover.
Slightly lift up the ASSY and unlatch hinge L from the scanner cover with the tip of a flat
screwdriver as shown below.
To remove those hinges from the ASSY, turn them slightly.
NOTE: Hinge L holds the bundle of harnesses (ADF motor harness*, grounding wire*, and
document front and rear sensor harnesses*) even if it is removed from the ASSY. If it is not
easy to remove hinge L from the bundle of harnesses, try it after separating the ADF unit from
the document cover (see page 6-18).
Models without ADF: Turn the document cover upright, unlatch the two hinges, and lift up
the cover.
*For models with ADF
ADF & document cover ASSY (For models with ADF)
Document cover (For models without ADF)

Hinge R*

Hinge L*

ADF motor harness*
Grounding wire*

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Document rear sensor harness*
CIS motor harness

Document front sensor harness*

Hinge L*

6- 14

(6_13_e)

Confidential

(4) Models with ADF: Remove the document sponge ASSY by releasing the four latches with a
flat screwdriver.
*For models with ADF
Latches "A"

Document sponge ASSY*

Thin

Thick

Latches "B"

(Right)

(Rear)

ADF & document cover ASSY*

Document front sensor harness*
Document rear sensor harness*
Grounding wire*
ADF motor harness*

(6_14)

Assembling Notes

• Models with ADF: When mounting the document sponge ASSY on the ADF & document cover
ASSY, face the thick side towards the right and insert latches "A" into the document cover first,
and then set latches "B" as shown above.
• Models with ADF: When mounting the ADF & document cover ASSY on the scanner cover, be
sure to route a bundle of harnesses (ADF motor harness*, grounding wire*, and document front
and rear sensor harnesses*) through the cable guide provided in the left rear corner of the scanner
cover as shown on page 6-13.

6- 15

Confidential

6.1.4

Disassembly of ADF & Document Cover ASSY (Only for models with ADF)

ADF cover and document stopper
(1) Place the ADF & document cover ASSY right side up as shown below.
(2) Pull up the left end of the ADF cover to open and turn it upright.
(3) Pull the front end of the ADF cover outwards to release it from the front boss provided on the
document cover.
(4) Turn the front end of the ADF cover to the left slightly and release the rear end from the rear
boss on the document cover.
(5) Remove the document stopper.

ADF cover

Document cover

Document stopper
Rear boss

(Front)
Latch
Front boss

Latch

6- 16

(6_21)

Confidential

Document pressure bar
(6) Place the ADF & document cover ASSY upside down.
(7) Press the lock arms on the ADF unit outwards, push the document pressure bar once to release
the two tabs from the square openings, and pull it out. The spring also comes off.
NOTE: When handling the document pressure bar, take care not to stain or scratch the white
reference film on the bar.
Spring

Lock arm

Tabs
When mounting the document pressure bar,
press the lock arms outwards, fully insert
this end and then fit the two tabs into the
square openings.

Document pressure bar
Tabs
White reference film
Spring

Lock arm
Square
openings

Lock arm
(Rear)
ADF & document cover ASSY

Document front sensor harness
Document rear sensor harness
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness

6- 17

(6_15)

Confidential

ADF reinforcement plate and pinch roller & spring assemblies
(8) Remove the screw that secures the ADF reinforcement plate and pull out the plate.
(9) Remove the three pinch roller & spring assemblies.
Taptite, cup B M3x8
ADF reinforcement plate

Pinch roller & spring assemblies

(Rear)
ADF & document cover ASSY
Document front sensor harness
Document rear sensor harness
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness

(6_16)

Separating the ADF unit from the document cover
(10) Remove four screws (three "a" and one "b" screws) from the ADF unit.
(11) Pull the rear side of the document cover outwards and take the ADF unit out of the document
cover.
Tighten these screws
in the order of 1 to 4 .

1
2

"a"

ADF unit

"a"

"b"

"a"

"a": Taptite, bind B M4x12
"b": Taptite, cup B M3x8

ADF motor harness
Grounding wire

Pull here outwards to
release the ADF unit

Document front sensor harness
Document rear sensor harness

6- 18

(6_17)

(Rear)
Document cover

Confidential

ADF motor and document rear sensor PCB
(12) Place the ADF unit right side up as shown below.
(13) Remove the ADF motor with the following steps.
1) Remove the gear 20/45 by releasing the latch.
NOTE: The gear 21/46 and planet gear 23 become freed. Take care not to lose them.
2) Remove the two screws.
3) Disconnect the ADF motor harness from the ADF motor.
(14) Push down the two lock arms and take out the document rear sensor PCB. Then disconnect the
document rear sensor harness from the PCB.

Routing the ADF motor harness
and grounding wire

ADF motor
ADF motor harness

Grounding wire

Document rear sensor PCB
ADF unit
ADF motor

Cable guide

Document rear sensor harness

ADF motor harness
Gear
21/46

Grounding wire

Screw, pan
(s/p washer)
M3x6

Document rear
sensor PCB

(Left)
(Rear)
Planet gear 23

Gear 20/45

Document front
sensor harness
Lock arms
Document rear sensor harness
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness

6- 19

(6_18)

Confidential

Document front sensor PCB
(15) Place the ADF unit upside down.
(16) Pull the lock arm outwards and take out the document front sensor PCB. Then disconnect the
document front sensor harness from the PCB.

Routing the document front sensor harness
through the cable guides

Document front sensor harness

ADF unit

Document front sensor harness

Document front sensor PCB

Lock arm

ADF unit
(placed upside down)

(Rear)

Cable guide

Bundle of harnesses
(ADF motor harness, grounding wire,
and document front and rear sensor harnesses)
(6_19)

6- 20

Confidential

Document pull-in roller and document separation roller
(17) Press the lock arm on the document roller holder and pull out the separation roller gear.
(18) Remove the screw that secures the document roller holder.
(19) Release the two tabs on the left end of the document roller holder from the ADF unit and take
it out.
(20) Remove the document pull-in roller and document separation roller from the document roller
holder.
Document pull-in roller

Apply grease here.

Apply grease here.
Document separation roller
Lock arm

Document roller holder
Lock arm
Document roller holder

Taptite, cup B
M3x10

Tabs

(Front)

Document front
sensor harness

Separation roller gear

ADF unit
(placed upside down)
(6_20)

(Rear)

6- 21

Confidential

ADF parts
(21) Place the document cover upside down.
(22) Remove the ADF pull-in piece and its spring from the document cover.
(23) Remove the separation pad from the document cover.
ADF pull-in piece

ADF pull-in spring

ADF pull-in piece

Document cover
(placed upside down)

ADF pull-in spring

Separation pad

(Rear)

(6_22)

Assembling Notes

• When mounting the ADF pull-in piece on the document cover, be sure to set the ADF pull-in
spring as shown above.
• Before mounting the document roller holder onto the ADF unit (see page 6-21), apply the
specified lubricant to the specified points, referring to Section 6.2.
• When mounting the ADF motor onto the ADF unit, route the ADF motor harness and the
grounding wire as shown on page 6-19. When securing the motor with two screws, be sure to
secure the grounding wire also with one of those screws (see page 6-19).

6- 22

Confidential

• Before mounting the ADF unit on the document cover, make sure that the ADF motor harness,
grounding wire, and document front and rear sensor harnesses are routed on the top of the ADF
unit as shown below. Also make sure that the bundle of those harnesses is routed through the
cable guide (shown on page 6-20) provided at the rear of the ADF unit.
Document front sensor harness
ADF unit
Top view

Grounding wire

ADF motor harness
(Rear)

Document rear sensor PCB
Document rear sensor harness
Document front and rear sensor harnesses
ADF motor harness
(6_23)

Grounding wire

• When securing the ADF unit on the document cover, tighten four screws (three "a" and one "b"
screws) in the order of through as shown at the bottom of page 6-18.
When mounting the ADF reinforcement plate and three pinch roller & spring assemblies, first
secure the ADF reinforcement plate with the screw. Then insert the pinch roller & spring
assemblies between the plate and document cover until they snap into place.
• When handling the document pressure bar, be careful not to stain or scratch the white reference
film on the bar. (See page 6-17.)
When mounting the document pressure bar on the ADF unit, set the spring, press the lock arms
on the ADF unit outwards, fully insert the no-tab end of the document pressure bar into the ADF
unit, and then fit the two tabs into the square openings. After that, make sure that the document
pressure bar is supported by the two lock arms. (See page 6-17.)

6- 23

Confidential

6.1.5

Control Panel ASSY, Scanner Cover Sensor Actuator, Ink Cartridge Cover Sensor Actuator,
and Cover Sensor PCB

Control panel ASSY
(1) Remove the three screws from the control panel ASSY.
(2) Pull up the rear end of the control panel ASSY and turn it up slightly.
NOTE: Do not pull the control panel ASSY away from the machine since it is connected to the
machine with a short LCD flat cable* and harnesses.
(3) While holding the control panel ASSY at an angle of approx. 45°, disconnect the LCD flat
cable* and panel-main harness from the main PCB, and the cover sensor harness from the
control panel PCB.
*For models with color LCD

Tighten these screws
in the order of 1 to 3 .

Control panel PCB
2

Taptite, cup B M3x10
3

Control panel ASSY

Cover sensor harness
LCD flat cable*
Panel-main harness
Main PCB

6- 24

(6_24)

Confidential

Scanner cover sensor actuator, ink cartridge cover sensor actuator, and cover sensor PCB
(4) Remove the scanner cover sensor actuator from the upper cover, pulling the lock arms
outwards. The actuator spring also comes off.
(5) Open the ink cartridge cover. Remove the ink cartridge cover sensor actuator, pulling the lock
arms outwards. The actuator spring also comes off.
(6) Remove the cover sensor PCB by pulling the two lock arms outwards that hold the
photosensor.
Scanner cover sensor actuator
Scanner/ink cartridge cover sensor
Ink cartridge cover sensor actuator
Actuator spring
Actuator spring

Actuator spring

Rib
Lock arm

Hook

Scanner cover
sensor actuator
Cover sensor PCB

Cover sensor harness

Removing the actuators
by pulling the lock arms
outwards

Actuator spring
Hook
Ink cartridge cover sensor actuator

Ink cartridge cover

Actuator lever
(6_25)

Upper cover

Assembling Notes

• Mount the ink cartridge cover sensor actuator with the ink cartridge cover being opened. When
setting its spring, fit the bent end under the hook on the actuator, and the straight end on the
upper cover as shown above. After closing the cover, check that the cover's actuator lever pushes
down the sensor actuator.
• When mounting the scanner cover sensor actuator, fit the bent end under the hook on the actuator,
and the straight end between the rib and boss on the upper cover.
• When securing the control panel ASSY to the upper cover, tighten the three screws in the order
of
to
as shown on the previous page. After mounting the control panel ASSY, check that
there is no gap between the front end of the control panel ASSY and that of the upper cover.
6- 25

Confidential

6.1.6

Components of Control Panel ASSY

For models with color LCD
There are three types of color LCDs: 4.2-/3.3-inch wide color LCDs and 2.0-inch color
LCD. Their removal/installation procedures are the same although these three types are
different in shape. The illustrations here are based on the model with 2.0-inch color LCD.

(1) Place the control panel ASSY upside down.
(2) Pull four latches "x" and remove the control panel PCB to the front.
(3) Remove the two rubber keypads and the keys.
Panel-main harness

Microphone
(For models with TAD)
Control panel PCB
Rubber keypad

Rubber keypad
Keys
Control panel
(placed upside down)
Latches "x"
(Front)

Latches "x"

(6_26)

(4) Remove the two screws and lift up the LCD support cover.
(5) Take the color LCD unit out of the control panel.
(6) Warp the cable protection plate and release it from the color LCD.
Taptite, bind B M3x8

LCD support cover

Square opening

Cable protection plate
LCD flat cable

Color LCD

Latches
Control panel
(placed upside down)
(Front)

(6_27)

6- 26

Confidential

(7) Remove the control panel from the control panel base by releasing nine latches.

Control panel base

Latches

Latchs

Control panel
Latches

Latches
(6_28)

Assembling Notes

• A new LCD is covered with a protection sheet. Before setting it, remove the protection sheet.
• When setting the cable protection plate on the color LCD, take care not to pinch the LCD flat
cable between the plate and LCD.
• When mounting the LCD support cover, route the LCD flat cable through the square opening.
• After setting the color LCD back into place, wipe fingerprints or dust off the LCD surface with a
soft cloth.

6- 27

Confidential

For models with monochrome LCD

(1) Place the control panel ASSY upside down.
(2) Pull four latches "x" and remove the control panel PCB.
NOTE: Do not pull the control panel PCB away from the control panel base since it is
connected to the monochrome LCD mounted on the control panel base with a short panel-LCD
flat cable.
(3) Disconnect the panel-LCD flat cable from the control panel PCB after releasing the connector
lock.
(4) Remove the three rubber keypads and the keys.
(5) Remove the monochrome LCD by releasing the two lock arms.
(6) Remove the control panel from the control panel base by releasing eight latches "y."

Panel-main harness
Control panel PCB
Panel-LCD flat cable

Monochrome LCD
Rubber keypad

Rubber keypad
Rubber keypad

Control panel base

Keys

Lock arms

Latches "x"

Latches "y"
Control panel

(6_29_e)

Latches "y"

6- 28

Confidential

Assembling Notes

• Before setting the monochrome LCD back into place, wipe fingerprints or dust off the LCD
surface and control panel window with a soft cloth.
• A new LCD is covered with a protection sheet. Before setting it, remove the protection sheet.

6- 29

Confidential

6.1.7

Charge Stand ASSY (for models with cordless handset)

(1) Remove the two screws from the bottom charge cover.
(2) Release the two latches on the bottom charge cover and pull the cover down and off the top
charge cover.
(3) While pulling the hook on the top charge cover outwards, slide the cover to the rear and take it
off the upper cover.
(4) Disconnect the charge harness from the charge PCB.

Hook

Top charge cover

Charge harness

Charge PCB

Bottom charge cover

Latches

Taptite, cup B M3x10

6- 30

(6_01_1)

Confidential

6.1.8

Backup Battery (for models with backup battery) and Upper Cover

NOTE: Make sure that the jam clear cover has been removed.
(1) Disconnect the battery harness from the main PCB and remove the backup battery from the
upper cover.
(2) Disconnect the cordless flat cable* and speaker harness from the main PCB.
(3) Open the ink cartridge cover.
(4) Remove the seven screws (six "a" and one "b" screws) (for models with cordless handset, eight
screws including one "c" screw) from the upper cover.
(5) Insert the tip of a small flat screwdriver into the two openings provided in the front end of the
upper cover, release the upper cover from the bosses on the lower cover, and lift it up.
NOTE: Do not put your hands in the opening above the platen (shown below). Doing so may
damage or stain the CR encoder strip inside.
* For models with cordless handset
Upper cover

Main PCB

Cable guide

Cordless flat cable*
Upper cover

Cable guide
Cordless flat cable*

Speaker harness

"a"

Backup battery
Opening above the platen

"a"
1

Tighten seven (eight*)
screws in the order of
to ( to *).

"a"

"a"
"c"*

"a"

7
4

"b"

"a"

Peep hole

Opening

Boss
Rib
Cover arm

Upper cover

Actuator
lever
PF encoder disk
Lower cover

"a": Taptite, bind B M4x12
"b": Taptite, cup B M3x10
"c"*: Taptite, cup S M3x6

Ink cartridge cover

Opening
Front cover

Boss

6- 31

(6_30_J)

Confidential

CAUTION
- There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
- Do not disassemble or recharge the battery.
- Do not dispose of the battery in fire.
- Used batteries should be disposed of according to the local regulations.

Assembling Notes

• When mounting the upper cover:
- Make sure that the jam clear cover is not mounted.
- Make sure that the head/carriage unit is placed in the head capping position (home position).
This prevents the ink supply tubes from getting crushed between the upper and lower covers.
- Make sure that the ink cartridge cover is opened if the ink cartridge cover sensor actuator has
been mounted. (Mounting the upper cover with the ink cartridge cover being closed will
dislocate the ink cartridge cover sensor actuator.)
- Take care not to deform the PF encoder disk.
- Tighten seven screws to (eight screws to for models with cordless handset) in this
order as shown on the previous page.
• After mounting the upper cover, check that the PF encoder disk is not bent or deformed through
the peep hole. (See the illustration on the previous page.)
• Route the battery harness as shown below.
Backup battery
Cable guide

Upper cover
Cable guide

Main PCB

(6_30_1_J)

6- 32

Confidential

6.1.9

Antenna & Cordless PCB ASSY (for models with cordless handset)

(1) Place the upper cover upside down.
(2) Remove the screw from the cordless PCB.
NOTE: Take care not to bend the wire that works as an antenna on the cordless PCB.
(3) Release the antenna wire from the cable guide.
NOTE: Take care not to pull the soldered point of the antenna wire or apply force to that point.
Do not bend or pull the antenna wire.
(4) Remove the screw that secures the antenna and its support together to the upper cover.
(5) Pull the antenna and its support inward and off the upper cover.
(6) Take the antenna & cordless PCB ASSY out of the upper cover.
Antenna support

Wire
(that works as antenna)

Cordless PCB
Latch

Antenna wire
Soldered point
(Do not pull the
antenna wire.)

Antenna
Taptite, cup B
M3x12

Taptite, Torx
pan B M3x10
Antenna &
cordless PCB ASSY
Antenna support

Upper cover
placed upside down

(6_30_2_J)

6- 33

Confidential

Assembling Notes

• Route the antenna wire as shown below.

Antenna support

Pass the antenna wire through
this guide provided on the
antenna support.
Route the antenna wire
between these two ribs.

Plate spring
Antenna wire

Upper cover

Speaker harness

(6_30_3_e)

Antenna & cordless PCB ASSY

6- 34

Confidential

6.1.10 Speaker

(1) Release the speaker harness from the cable guides provided on the upper cover.
(2) Press the latch of the plate spring with the tip of a flat screwdriver and pull it up. Then take the
speaker and its frame out of the pocket provided on the inner surface of the upper cover.

Latch

Speaker
Speaker frame
Plate spring

Upper cover
(placed upside down)
Routing the speaker harness through the cable guides on the inner surface of the upper cover

Speaker harness
Speaker

(6_30_1)

Assembling Notes

• After mounting the speaker, its frame, and plate spring into the pocket provided on the inner
surface of the upper cover, route the speaker harness as shown above.

6- 35

Confidential

6.1.11 Ink Cartridge Cover, Media Module Cover, Front Cover, and WLAN PCB*
* For wireless LAN-enabled models

(1) Lightly lift up the front end of the lower cover and remove the ink cartridge cover.
(2) Remove the media module cover.
(3) For wireless LAN-enabled models: Proceed to step (4).
For models not supporting wireless LAN: Lightly pull up the retainer on the inside of the front
cover to release it from the lower cover. Then lightly lift up the front end of the lower cover
and remove the front cover.

Main PCB shield

Boss

Cover arm

Ink cartridge cover

Actuator lever

Boss
Sockets

Latch
Retainer
Linear boss

Front cover

Media module cover

Latch
(6_31)

6- 36

Confidential

For wireless LAN-enabled models, remove the front cover and WLAN PCB using the
following steps.
(4) Release the grounding wire by removing the screw.
(5) Disconnect the WLAN PCB harness from the main PCB.
(6) Lightly pull up the retainer on the inside of the front cover to release it from the lower cover.
Then lightly lift up the front end of the lower cover and remove the front cover together with
the WLAN PCB.
(7) Release the two latches on the front cover and take out the WLAN PCB.
Screw, pan (s/p washer)
M3x8

Grounding wire
WLAN PCB harness

Main PCB
Grounding wire
WLAN PCB
harness

Linear boss

Latch

Lower cover
Latch

Retainer
Front cover

WLAN PCB

Linear boss
(6_32_e)

Assembling Notes

• For wireless LAN-enabled models: When mounting the front cover and WLAN PCB onto the
lower cover, route the WLAN PCB harness and grounding wire as shown above.
• When mounting the front cover, lightly lift up the front end of the lower cover and fit the linear
boss provided on the inside bottom of the front cover on the bottom of the lower cover.
• When mounting the ink cartridge cover, lightly lift up the frond end of the lower cover, fit the
two sockets over the bosses on the lower cover at the angle shown below and rotate the ink
cartridge cover. Then, set the cover arm on the rib on the right side of the lower cover (see the
illustration on the previous page).
110
Cover arm

Ink cartridge cover
Lower cover

Fit the sockets provided on the ink
cartridge cover over the bosses on
the lower cover.

6- 37

(Ink_cartridge_cover)

Confidential

6.1.12 Main PCB

CAUTION: Before accessing the main PCB, make sure that the power cord is unplugged from the
electrical outlet and the telephone line is disconnected; otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
CAUTION: At the time of removal of the main PCB, untightening screws should be preceded by
disconnection of the harnesses and flat cables, and at the time of installation, connection of the
harnesses and flat cables, by tightening of screws. Observing this sequence prevents harnesses and
flat cables from getting crushed or damaged by screws or screwdrivers.
(1) Models with color LCD: Remove the three screws (two "a" and one "b" screws) from the
main PCB shield and lift it up.
Models with monochrome LCD: Remove the two screws "a" from the main PCB shield and
lift it up.
"a"
(Only on models
with color LCD)

Main PCB shield
"b"
"a"

SDAA enclosure
Purge cam
switch harness
Ink cartridge
sensor harness

Paper feed
motor harness

Main PCB

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

(6_33)

"a": Taptite, cup B M3x10
"b": Taptite, cup S M3x6 (Only on models with color LCD)

6- 38

Confidential

(2) Disconnect the following harnesses and flat cables from the main PCB.
CAUTION: Do not remove the screws from the main PCB before disconnecting harnesses and
flat cables.
- Purge cam switch harness (2-wire)
- Ink cartridge sensor harness (9-wire)
- Power supply harness (4-wire)
- PF encoder/registration sensor harness (7-wire)
- Paper feed motor harness (2-wire)
- Carriage motor harness (2-wire)
- Main-MJ (EXT) harness (2-wire in black)
- Main-MJ (LINE) harness (2-wire in blue)
- Head flat cable 1 (14-wire)
- Head flat cable 2 (13-wire)
- Head flat cable 3 (12-wire)
- Hook switch harness*1 (6-wire)
- Charge harness*2 (2-wire)
*1 For models with handset
*2 For models with cordless handset

(3) Release the main-MJ (EXT) harness and main-MJ (LINE) harness from the cable guides
provided on the SDAA enclosure.
Models with color LCD
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(2-wire in black)
(Document rear
sensor harness)
(3-wire)

(ADF motor harness)
(4-wire)

(Document front
sensor harness)
(3-wire)

(CIS motor harness)
(4-wire)

Main-MJ (LINE)
harness
(2-wire in blue)

Head flat cable 3
(12-wire)
Head flat cable 2
(13-wire)
Head flat cable 1
(14-wire)
(CIS flat cable)
(12-wire)
(USB interface)
(LAN interface) *1
(Cordless flat cable)
(18-wire) *2

Charge harness (2-wire)*2
Hook switch harness (6-wire) *9

Carriage motor harness
(2-wire)
Paper feed motor harness
(2-wire)
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
(7-wire)
Power supply harness
(4-wire)

(Speaker harness)
(2-wire)
Purge cam switch
harness
(2-wire)
Ink cartridge sensor
harness
(9-wire)

Main PCB

(WLAN PCB harness)
(4-wire in 6-wire connector
housing) *8
For debugging at the factory.
Do not disturb it.
(Panel-main harness)
(7-wire *6 , 5-wire *7 )

(Battery harness)
(4-wire) *5
For debugging at the factory.
Do not disturb it.

(LCD flat cable)
(28-wire) *3
(18-wire) *4

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
6- 39

(6_34_1_e)

For wired LAN-enabled models
For models with cordless handset
For models with 4.2-/3.3-inch wide color LCD
For models with 2.0-inch color LCD
For models with backup battery
For models with TAD
For models without TAD
For wireless LAN-enabled models
For models with handset
Confidential

Models with monochrome LCD

Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(2-wire in black)

(CIS motor harness)
(4-wire)

Head flat cable 3
(12-wire)
Head flat cable 2
(ADF motor harness)
(13-wire)
(4-wire) *
Head flat cable 1
Main-MJ (LINE)
(14-wire)
harness
(CIS flat cable)
(2-wire in blue)
(12-wire)

(Document front sensor harness)
(3-wire) *
(Document rear sensor harness)
(3-wire) *
Carriage motor harness
(2-wire)

Paper feed motor harness
(2-wire)
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
(7-wire)

(USB interface)

Main PCB

(Speaker harness)
(2-wire)
Purge cam switch harness
(2-wire)
Ink cartridge sensor harness
(9-wire)

Power supply harness
(4-wire)

For debugging at the factory.
Do not disturb it.

(Panel-main harness)
(5-wire)

(6_35_e)

* For models with ADF

6- 40

Confidential

(4) Remove two screws "c" from the main PCB, then lift up the PCB.
(5) Remove the SDAA enclosure by unlatching it from the solder side of the main PCB.
(6) Remove screw "d" from the main PCB shield frame, then lift up the shield frame. (This screw
also secures the MJ/PS shield box.)

Models with color LCD

Models with monochrome LCD

"c"

Align the edge of the
thermal conductor rubbers
with the L-shaped bosses
on the main PCB shield "c"
frame.

SDAA enclosure

"c"

Main PCB

Main PCB
L-shaped boss
Thermal conductor rubber
(For 200V series only)
Thermal conductor rubber

"d"

Main PCB shield frame

Purge cam switch harness
Ink cartridge sensor harness

Carriage motor
harness

Lower cover
Paper feed motor
harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

(6_36)

"c": Taptite, cup S M3x6
"d": Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8

6- 41

Confidential

Assembling Notes

• Before mounting the main PCB, check that the thermal conductor rubbers (two for 200V series,
one for other models) are set on the main PCB shield frame. If they have come off, attach them to
the main PCB shield frame so that they become aligned with the L-shaped bosses on the shield
frame as shown on the previous page.
• When replacing the main PCB, check that the thermal conductor rubbers (two for 200V series,
one for other models) are on the main PCB shield frame, not on the bottom of the main PCB.
Take care not to remove the old PCB with the conductor rubbers being attached.
• If you replace the main PCB, also replace the ink absorber box and flushing box. Otherwise,
drained ink may overflow after long-term use.
• If you replace the main PCB, you need to make the specified adjustments and updating of
settings stored in the flash ROM, referring to Chapter 7, Section 7.3. Before starting, make sure
that the head/carriage unit is mounted.
• Before securing the main PCB shield, route the main-MJ (EXT) harness and main-MJ (LINE)
harness through the SDAA enclosure as shown below and connect them to the main PCB.

Models except MFC265C/260C/235C
*1 For models with handset
*2 For models with cordless handset
Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE) harness (blue)
SDAA enclosure

Carriage motor harness
Paper feed motor harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Hook switch harness *1
Charge harness *2

Main PCB

Power supply harness

(6_36_1_e)

6- 42

Confidential

MFC265C/260C/235C
Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE) harness (blue)
SDAA enclosure

Carriage motor harness
Paper feed motor harness

Main PCB

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

(6_36_1_240C)

6- 43

Confidential

6.1.13 MJ/PS Shield Box and Power Supply PCB

(1) If the main PCB shield frame has not been removed, disconnect the power supply harness from
the main PCB and remove screw "d" (shown on page 6-41) from the main PCB shield frame.
(2) Remove the two screws ("e" and "f").
(3) Remove the MJ/PS shield box from the underside of the lower cover.

"e"
"f"

Lower cover

Main-MJ (LINE) harness
MJ/PS shield box

Main-MJ (EXT) harness
Power supply harness

U-shaped cutout

(6_38)

"e": Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8
"f": Taptite, cup S M3x6

6- 44

Confidential

(4) For 120V series: Remove the power cord holder by removing the screw "g." Then release the
power cord from the cable guides (shown on the next page).
(5) Remove the power supply shield from the lower MJ/PS shield.
(6) Remove four "j" screws from the power supply PCB.
(7) Remove screw "h" from the MJ shield and take it off the lower MJ/PS shield.
(8) Remove screw "i" from the MJ PCB and take it off the lower MJ/PS shield.
For 120V series
"g"

Power cord
holder

"h"

Power cord

MJ shield

Cable tie

Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (blue)

"Y"
Lower MJ/PS
shield

"i"
MJ shield

MJ PCB

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)

Power supply
PCB
CN1
CN2
Slits
"Y"

"X"
Power cord
"j"
Tabs

Slit

"j"
2

Lower MJ/PS shield

"j"
4

"j"

Power supply PCB

Power supply shield

Tighten four screws in
the order of to .
Tab
Power supply harness

6- 45

"g": Taptite, cup B M3x12
"h": Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8
"i" and "j": Taptite, cup S M3x6
(6_39)

Confidential

Assembling Notes

• Route the main-MJ (LINE) and (EXT) harnesses through the harness guide on the lower MJ/PS
shield as shown below.
• When securing the power supply PCB, tighten four "j" screws in the order of , , and as
shown on the previous page.
• Secure the power cord to the two holes provided in section "Y" (shown on the previous page) of
the lower MJ/PS shield with a cable tie. After that, route the power cord through the cable guides
as shown below.
Top view

Ferrite core

Cable guide
Harness guide

Power cord

Main-MJ (LINE) harness
(blue)
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(black)

Cable guides

Power supply shield
Power supply PCB

Power supply harness

(6_39_1)

• When mounting the power supply shield on the lower MJ/PS shield, insert three tabs into three
slits. Make sure that section "X" of the lower MJ/PS shield is fitted over the power supply shield.
(See the previous page.)
• When mounting the MJ/PS shield box, route the power supply harness through the U-shaped
cutout (shown on page 6-44) in the lower MJ/PS shield.
After mounting the MJ/PS shield box, route the power supply harness through the channel as
shown below. Make sure that the main-MJ (LINE) and (EXT) harnesses are routed as shown
below.
*1 For models with handset
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
Carriage motor harness
Paper feed motor harness
Main-MJ (LINE) harness

*2 For models with cordless handset
Main PCB

Lower cover

Paper feed motor
harness and PF encoder/
registration sensor harness
Main-MJ (EXT) and
Main-MJ (LINE) harnesses
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Hook switch harness *1
Charge harness *2

SDAA enclosure

Channel

Power supply harness
(6_39_2_MFC_e)

6- 46

Confidential

6.1.14 Hook Switch PCB (for models with handset)

(1) Make sure that the MJ/PS shield box has been removed.
(2) Make sure that the hook switch harness has been disconnected from the main PCB.
(3) Release the hook switch actuator from the lower cover, turn it counterclockwise (viewed from
the left), and remove it together with the spring.

Hook switch actuator

Hook switch PCB
Spring

Lower cover

(6_39_3_J)

(4) Place the machine on its right end and support it by hand.
(5) Press the latch (the black plastic part on the lower cover) that locks the bottom of the hook
switch PCB, to release the PCB.
Bottom of hook switch PCB

Latch

Lower cover
(6_39_4_J)

Viewed from the bottom

6- 47

Confidential

(6) Place the machine right side up.
(7) Lift the hook switch PCB up and out of the lower cover.
Hook switch PCB

Lower cover

(6_39_5_J)

6- 48

Confidential

6.1.15 Head/Carriage Unit and Ink Refill ASSY

During disassembly jobs, except when removing the ink refill ASSY or engine unit (including the
maintenance unit), leave the head/carriage unit in the machine.
Before removing the head/carriage unit, ink refill ASSY or engine unit, you need to remove all four
ink cartridges and set the protective part instead (see page 6-4). Be sure to insert the protective part
into place to prevent ink remaining in the ink supply tubes from leaking and the machine from
getting stained with leaked ink.
NOTE: Make sure that the power cord is unplugged from the electrical outlet.
NOTE: When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
NOTE: During the removal or installation job for the head/carriage unit, take care not to
contaminate the CR encoder strip or PF encoder disk with ink or grease.
NOTE: If you replace the head/carriage unit, also replace the ink cartridges. This is because
sufficient ink volume is necessary for refilling the ink supply tubes after replacement of the
head/carriage unit.

6- 49

Confidential

CR encoder strip
(1) While lightly pushing the CR encoder strip support on the left end of the engine unit inwards,
unhook the right end of the CR encoder strip from the hook ( ).
(2) Slide the CR encoder strip to the left ( ) and out of the head cover. At the left end of the CR
encoder strip, align the rectangular hole in the strip with the boss of the strip support ( ) and
take the strip off.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch or damage the encoder strip. If it becomes dirty, wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth. If it is stained with ink, replace it.
Flat cable support plate, tube support wire and its spring
(3) Unhook the spring from the tube support wire.
(4) Release the four ink supply tubes from the tube support wire.
(5) Remove the screw from the flat cable support plate.
(6) Unlatch the support plate from the lower cover and remove it together with the tube support
wire and its spring.
(7) Remove the spring and tube support wire from the flat cable support plate.
This should point up.
CR encoder strip

Ink supply tubes
Spring
2

Tube/cable guide

Tube support wire

Taptite, bind B
M4x12

Flat cable support plate

Latch
Head cover

Hook 1

CR encoder strip support
(Front)
Lower cover
Engine unit

(6_40_e)

6- 50

Confidential

Head cover
(8) Move the head/carriage unit to position "P" (shown below) by hand.
NOTE: If the head/carriage unit does not move, rotate the ejection idle gear clockwise (viewed
from the left) by hand to unlock the head/carriage unit and move it to position "P."

(9) Unlatch the head cover from the head/carriage unit and pull it up.

Latches
Tabs

Head cover
Latch

Latches

Ink absorber box
Head/carriage unit

Lower cover
(6_42_e)

6- 51

Confidential

Carriage PCB ASSY (carriage PCB with head flat cables)
(10) Unlock the connector on the carriage PCB and disconnect the carriage-head flat cable.
(11) Release the head flat cables out of the cable guides and pull them out (together with the flat
core) to the rear through the opening provided in the lower cover as shown below.
NOTE: When replacing the carriage PCB ASSY, remove the flat core from the old head flat
cables and set it to the new ones.
(12) Unlatch the FFC support, which holds the three head flat cables, from the head/carriage unit.
(13) Lift up the carriage PCB ASSY.
(14) Remove the FFC support from the head flat cables.

Carriage PCB

Latch

FFC support

Latch

Carriage-head flat cable
Head flat cables

Lower cover

Opening
Flat core

(6_43)

6- 52

Confidential

Head joint and ink refill ASSY
(15) Pull out the joint leaf spring to the right to release the head joint.
(16) Pull the head joint up and off the head/carriage unit.
Remove the head joint rubber (that is a part of the head/carriage unit but may come off with the
head joint) and put it on a clean vinyl sheet while taking care not to contaminate it.
NOTE: Wipe off the ink remaining on the section where the head joint was mounted with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
NOTE: Wrap the head joint in a clean, lint-free cloth and keep it higher than the ink supply
tubes to prevent ink remaining in the ink supply tubes from leaking and the machine from
getting stained with leaked ink.

Head joint
Joint leaf spring
Ink supply tubes
Head joint rubber

Head/carriage unit
Joint leaf spring

Head/carriage unit

Head joint
(6_45)

6- 53

Confidential

(17) Take out the ink supply tubes routed on the lower cover.
(18) While pressing the four lock release levers with your fingers, lift the ink refill ASSY up and
out of the lower cover.
NOTE: On the back of the ink refill ASSY is an ink absorber felt that may be stained with ink.
If it is excessively stained, replace it.
Head joint

Ink absorber felt (in this plastic case)

Ink supply tubes

Lock release levers

Ink cartridge
sensor harness
Ink refill ASSY

Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

Lower cover

Routing the Ink Supply Tubes

(Rear)

Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

Sponge

Lower cover

Tube guide
When routing the ink supply tubes
through this tube guide, do not overlap
them with each other.
(6_46)

6- 54

Confidential

Head/carriage unit and CR timing belt
NOTE: During the removal or installation job for the head/carriage unit, take care not to
contaminate the PF encoder disk with ink or grease.
(19) While pressing the idle pulley holder to the right, remove the CR timing belt from the carriage
motor pulley and idle pulley.
(20) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel by hand.
(21) Lift the head/carriage unit (with the CR timing belt) up and off the engine unit in the direction
of the arrow shown below.
NOTE: Do not touch the head nozzles (the printing ends) or ink supply ports (to which ink
supply tubes are connected) of the head/carriage unit; doing so will not only stain your hands
with ink but also damage the nozzles and supply ports. If you do touch them though, clean
them with a special-purpose cleaning stick and liquid.
NOTE: Do not remove the CR timing belt from the head/carriage unit unless it needs to be
replaced. Once removed, the belt will become unusable and a new one will have to be put back
in.
NOTE: If the head/carriage unit needs to be replaced, replace not only that unit but also the
CR timing belt.

CR timing belt
When mounting a new
head/carriage unit, apply
grease here.
When mounting a new head/carriage
unit, apply grease to the CR guide
rail (13 lubrication points).

Carriage motor pulley
Head/carriage unit
CR guide rail

Cutouts
CR support chassis

(Front)
PF encoder disk

When mounting a new head/carriage
unit, apply grease to the CR support
chassis (13 lubrication points).

Engine unit

Idle pulley spring
Idle pulley

Idle pulley holder

6- 55

(6_47_e)

Confidential

(22) A head/carriage unit is assigned a property code that represents the properties unique to that
head/carriage unit. The property code is printed on head property labels--bar code label and QR
code label, each of which is attached to the lower cover and carriage-head flat cable,
respectively.
When you remove the head/carriage unit and store it separately from the machine, remove the
property label (bar code label) from the lower cover and store it together with the head/carriage
unit.
If you replace the head/carriage unit, attach the property label (bar code label) that comes with
the new head/carriage unit to the lower cover as shown below.

Lower cover
Head property label (Bar code)
Property code
(15-digit)

Carriage-head flat cable

Head property label (QR code)

Head/carriage unit
(6_48)

6- 56

Confidential

NOTE: When storing the head/carriage unit for a long period, be sure to put an air buffer cap
on the head/carriage unit and store the unit in the head casing, as shown below. Leaving the
head/carriage unit out of the casing will cause the head nozzles and ink supply ports to dry up,
resulting in a damaged head.

Latch

Head casing (upper)

Air buffer cap
Head/carriage unit

Head casing (lower)
(6_49)

Assembling Notes

• When handling the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job on a
static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
• When accessing the head/carriage unit placed on the engine unit, put the head/carriage unit in
position "P" (on the right edge of the engine chassis) as shown on page 6-51.
• When replacing the head/carriage unit, replace not only that unit but also the CR timing belt.
Refer to page 6-55.
• When mounting a new head/carriage unit, apply the specified lubricant to the specified point,
referring to Section 6.2.
Also, after mounting a new head/carriage unit, apply the specified lubricant to the specified
points on the sliding surfaces of the CR guide rail and CR support chassis, referring to Section
6.2.

6- 57

Confidential

• Before mounting the head/carriage unit on the engine unit, be sure to move the front and rear
slider cams to the rightmost position to prevent them from scratching or damaging the PF
encoder disk.

Rear slider cam
Head/carriage unit

Front slider cam

(6_50)

• When mounting the head/carriage unit on the left end of the engine unit, first fit the front end
over the CR support chassis (shown on page 6-55) and then set the rear end onto the CR guide
rail. Make sure that the two front bosses (see below) provided on the bottom of the head/carriage
unit catch the front edge of the CR support chassis and the two rear bosses are fitted in the two
cutouts (on page 6-55) in the CR guide rail.
Viewed from the bottom

Rear bosses

Front bosses

(6_50_1)

• After mounting the head/carriage unit, slide it by hand to check that it smoothly moves to the
right and left ends of its travel.
• After mounting the ink refill ASSY, route the ink supply tubes on the lower cover, aligning
magenta, cyan, yellow, and black ones in this order from the bottom, as shown on page 6-54.
• Before setting the head joint, make sure that the head joint rubber is set on the head/carriage unit
as shown on page 6-53. Then secure the head joint to the head/carriage unit with the joint leaf
spring.
• When mounting the carriage PCB ASSY, route the head flat cables, observing instructions given
on the next page.

6- 58

Confidential

Routing the Head Flat Cables When Mounting the Carriage PCB ASSY
1) Set the FFC support on the head flat cables.
- Fit the loop of the head flat cables over the small boss inside the FFC support as shown below.
Carriage PCB

FFC support

Head flat
cables

Small boss

(6_44_1)

Loop

2) Mount the carriage PCB on the head/carriage unit (see page 6-52).
3) Latch the FFC support onto the head/carriage unit (see page 6-52).
4) Route the head flat cables through the cable guides
and pass them through the flat core and the opening
provided in the lower cover.

5) Set the tube support wire and spring onto the
flat cable support plate. Fit the bent end of the
spring on the tube/cable guide as shown below,
turn the spring clockwise once and hook it on
the tube support wire so that the spring pulls the
Boss
wire to the front.
Cable guides
Head flat cable 1
Then, mount the flat cable support plate so that
Opening
the head flat cables (and ink supply tubes) pass
Head flat cable 2
between the tube/cable guide on the support
plate and the lower cover.
Tube/cable guide
Lower cover

(Rear)
Head flat cable 3
Cable guides

(Rear)

Flat core

(6_44_2)

Carriage motor harness

Spring
Hook
Flat cable support plate

(6_44_3)

Tube support wire

6- 59

Confidential

• After mounting the flat cable support plate, pass the ink supply tubes between the tube/cable
guide and the lower cover and then through the bent section of the tube support wire as shown
below.
Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

(Rear)

Bent section of
tube support wire

Hook

Spring

Tube/cable guide
Sponge

Flat cable support plate

Lower cover
Tube guide
When routing the ink
supply tubes through this
tube guide, do not overlap
them with each other.
(6_46_A)

• After mounting the head cover, set the CR encoder strip so that the -marked end is to the right
(carriage motor side) and the mark points upwards as shown on page 6-50, using the following
steps.
1) Hook the left end of the CR encoder strip on the left-hand strip support, aligning the
rectangular hole provided in the strip with the boss of the strip support.
2) Pass the strip through the CR encoder sensor located on the head/carriage unit by inserting it
into the opening of the head cover from left to right.
3) Hook the right end of the strip while pushing the left-hand strip support inwards.
• After replacement of the head/carriage unit, check that the CR encoder strip and PF encoder disk
are free of grease and ink. If they are stained with grease or ink, replace them.
• If you replace the head/carriage unit, make adjustments specified in Chapter 7, Section 7.2.

6- 60

Confidential

6.1.16 Ink Absorber Box, Ink Absorber Felt, and PF Encoder Disk

NOTE: Do not remove the ink absorber box unless it needs to be replaced.
NOTE: Once the two tubes (main drain tube and opening tube to the atmospheric air) are removed
from the ink absorber box for the replacement of the ink absorber box, they will become unusable
and new parts will have to be put back in. Using the removed tubes again may result in an ink
leakage.
(1) Pull out the two tubes (main drain tube and opening tube to the atmospheric air) from the ink
absorber box.
NOTE: Pinch the end of the main drain tube with a clip and wrap the end of the opening tube
to the atmospheric air in tissue paper in order to prevent drained ink from leaking and the
machine from getting stained with leaked ink.
(2) Pull the ink absorber box up and out of the lower cover.
(3) Immediately set a new ink absorber box. Then replace these two tubes; that is, pull them off
their joints on the maintenance unit and connect new tubes to the joints and new ink absorber
box as shown below.
NOTE: If the ink absorber box or its surroundings are stained with ink, wipe them off with a
cloth.
(4) Take the ink absorber felt out of the lower cover.
Maintenance unit

Pull down the main drain tube from this
joint and immediately connect a new one
to this.
Pull up the opening tube to the atmospheric
air from this joint and immediately connect
a new one to this.
Viewed from the right

Ink absorber box

Ink absorber felt

Opening tube to the
atmospheric air
Main drain tube

Lower cover
(6_51)

6- 61

Confidential

(5) Peel off the PF encoder disk from the PF roller gear L only when it should be replaced.
NOTE: Once removed, the PF encoder disk will become unusable and a new disk will have to
be put back in.
NOTE: Remove any adhesive remaining left on the PF roller gear L.

PF roller gear L

PF encoder sensor

PF encoder disk

Lower cover
(6_52)

Assembling Notes

• When attaching the PF encoder disk to the PF roller gear L, using a spatular tool makes the job
easier. Put on clean gloves to protect the disk surface from dust or fingerprints.
• If you replace the ink absorber box (without replacing the main PCB), you also need to replace
the flushing box (see Section 6.1.17) and reset both the purge and flushing counters as specified
in Chapter 7, Section 7.4.

6- 62

Confidential

6.1.17 Engine Unit and Flushing Box

Lower cover
Taptite, cup B M3x12

Carriage motor harness

Purge cam switch harness

Ferrite core on the carriage motor harness

(6_53)

6- 63

Confidential

(5) Take the paper feed motor harness and PF encoder/registration sensor harness out of the
harness guides provided on the lower cover.
(6) Lift the engine unit up and out of the lower cover in the direction of the arrow shown below,
holding the inner chute located beneath the CR guide rail.
NOTE: Do not hold the CR guide rail.
NOTE: Take care not to touch the PF encoder disk.
NOTE: If the ink absorber box does not need to be replaced, be sure to take it out of the lower
cover together with the engine unit. Do not disconnect the two tubes (main drain tube and
opening tube to the atmospheric air) from the ink absorber box. Once disconnected, those tubes
will become unusable and new parts will have to be put back in.
NOTE: Do not place the engine unit directly on a flat surface; doing so may break the PF
encoder disk and gears. Be sure to place a support pad under the engine unit as shown below.
(7) Take the flushing box out of the lower cover.

CR guide rail

Support pad

PF encoder
disk

Engine unit

Purge cam switch harness
Paper feed
motor harness

Carriage motor harness

PF encoder disk

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Flushing box

Lower cover
(6_54)

6- 64

Confidential

Assembling Notes

• Before mounting the engine unit on the lower cover, make sure that the PF encoder/registration
sensor harness and the paper feed motor harness are routed through the cable guides on the inner
chute as shown on page 6-69.
• When mounting the engine unit on the lower cover, be careful not to crush the harnesses between
the unit and the cover. Mount the engine unit parallel to the lower cover so that the screws are
tightened securely.
• Route the harnesses as shown below.
Registration sensor PCB

Registration
sensor wires
(3-wire)
Inner chute
ASSY

PF encoder
sensor wires
(4-wire)

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness
(7-wire)

(Left)

Ferrite core

PF encoder PCB

(Rear)

Paper feed motor harness
Lower cover
Top view

Paper feed
motor harness
PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness

(6_55)

Carriage motor harness

6- 65

Lower cover

Purge cam switch harness

Confidential

• Insert the chassis support into the cutout provided in the right end of the engine chassis (see page
6-63), not between the chassis and the lower cover.
• If you replace the engine unit, make adjustments specified in Chapter 7, Section 7.2.
• If you replace the flushing box (without replacing the main PCB), you also need to replace the
ink absorber box (see Section 6.1.16) and reset both the flushing and purge counters as specified
in Chapter 7, Section 7.4.

6- 66

Confidential

6.1.18 Components on the Engine Unit
(Maintenance unit, Mode switching lever & clutch gear ASSY, Carriage motor, Inner chute ASSY,
Registration sensor PCB, PF encoder PCB, Paper feed motor, Paper pull-in gear shaft, and Paper
pull-in roller holder)

Maintenance unit and mode switching lever & clutch gear ASSY
(1) Remove the three screws from the maintenance unit--two "a" screws from the top and one "b"
screw from the right side.
(2) Take the maintenance unit off the engine unit.
(3) Remove the SF changeover gear and HS changeover gear from the maintenance unit.
(4) Slide the mode switching lever & clutch gear ASSY outwards to remove it.
(5) Unlatch the switching lever guide from the CR guide rail.
Tighten these screws
in the order of 1 to 3 .

CR guide rail

Apply
grease
here.

Apply grease here.

"a"

Switching lever
guide

"a"

PF roller gear R
Cutout

Right hook

Mode switching lever &
clutch gear ASSY
(Front)

Apply grease here.
3 "b"

Maintenance unit

Apply
grease
here.

Carriage motor
harness

SF changeover
gear

HS
changeover
gear

Thick

Thin

(6_56_e)

"a": Taptite, bind B M3x8
"b": Taptite, cup S M3x6

6- 67

Confidential

Carriage motor
(6) Remove the carriage motor from the engine unit by removing the two screws.
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

CR guide rail

Screw, bind M3x6

Paper feed
motor harness
CR support chassis

Carriage motor

(6_57)

Inner chute ASSY, registration sensor actuator, registration sensor PCB, and PF encoder
PCB
(7) Release the three latches of the inner chute ASSY from the engine unit.
NOTE: Do not pull the inner chute ASSY away from the engine unit since it is connected to
the engine unit with the PF encoder/registration sensor harness and the paper feed motor
harness.
(8) Release the PF encoder/registration sensor harness and the paper feed motor harness from the
cable guides on the inner chute ASSY. (The routing detail is shown on the next page.)
Inner chute ASSY
Latches

(Front)
Paper feed
motor harness

Engine unit

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

(6_58)

6- 68

Confidential

(9) Turn the registration sensor actuator in the direction of the arrow shown below and take it off
the inner chute ASSY. The sensor actuator spring comes off.
(10) Take the registration sensor PCB out of the support arms.
NOTE: The registration sensor PCB and the PF encoder PCB are assembled with their
harnesses. To completely release the registration sensor PCB from the engine unit, therefore,
you need to remove the PF encoder PCB at the next step.

Hooking the sensor actuator spring

Sensor actuator spring

Registration sensor
actuator

Routing the PF encoder/registration sensor
harness and the paper feed motor harness
on the inner chute ASSY

Inner chute ASSY

Registration sensor PCB

Cable guide

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness

Registration sensor PCB
Inner chute ASSY

Cable guide
Paper feed motor harness

Sensor
actuator
spring

Support arms

Registration sensor actuator
Actuator support
(6_59)

6- 69

Confidential

(11) At the left end of the engine unit, remove the screw that secures the PF encoder PCB and its
support to the engine unit, taking care not to touch the PF encoder disk (if it has not been
removed in Section 6.1.16).
(12) If the PF encoder disk needs to be replaced, peel it off from the PF roller gear L.
NOTE: Once removed, the PF encoder disk will become unusable and a new disk will have to
be put back in.
NOTE: Remove any adhesive remaining left on the PF roller gear L.
Paper feed motor harness

Engine unit
Paper feed roller

Encoder PCB support
PF encoder PCB

Screw, bind M2x12
PF roller gear L

Ejection roller gear

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness
PF encoder disk

Ejection idle gear
(6_60)

Paper feed motor
(13) Remove the two screws from the left end of the engine unit and remove the paper feed motor
in the direction of the arrow.
Paper feed motor

Engine unit placed
upside down

Screw, bind M2.6x4
(Left)
PF roller gear L

Paper feed motor
harness

6- 70

(6_61)

Confidential

Paper pull-in gear shaft and paper pull-in roller holder
(14) Press the lock arm and pull out the paper pull-in gear shaft to the right.
(15) Lift the paper pull-in roller holder up and out of the engine unit, together with its spring.
Pressing the lock arm to remove
the paper pull-in gear shaft
Lock arm
Engine unit
Paper pull-in roller holder
Paper pull-in roller holder
Paper pull-in roller spring
Paper pull-in gear shaft

Paper pull-in roller holder
Fitting the paper pull-in roller
spring into the cutout

Engine unit placed upside down
(6_62)

Assembling Notes

• When setting the paper pull-in roller holder back into place, fit the longer end of the paper pull-in
roller spring into the cutout provided in the engine chassis.
While holding down the paper pull-in roller holder lightly, insert the paper pull-in gear shaft
from the right until it locks.
• When mounting the paper feed motor, route its harness as shown on the previous page and secure
the motor with two screws with the label facing towards the front.
• When attaching the PF encoder disk to the PF roller gear L, using a spatular tool makes the job
easier. Put on clean gloves to protect the disk surface from dust or fingerprints.
• Before mounting the inner chute on the engine unit, set the registration sensor actuator and its
spring. Also set the registration sensor PCB and route the PF encoder/registration sensor harness
and the paper feed motor harness. See page 6-69.
• When mounting the carriage motor, face the label outwards (see page 6-68).

6- 71

Confidential

• Mount the switching lever guide and the mode switching lever & clutch gear ASSY onto the
engine unit in this order.
Before mounting the ASSY, apply the specified lubricant to the specified points, referring to
Section 6.2.
When mounting the ASSY, insert the shaft end into the hole provided in the CR guide rail and fit
the right hook over the cutout (see page 6-67).
The ASSY should be mounted immediately before you mount the maintenance unit.
• Before mounting the maintenance unit onto the engine unit:
- Apply the specified lubricant to the SF changeover gear and the purge gear shaft, referring to
Section 6.2.
- Put the two gears (SF changeover gear and HS changeover gear) together so that there is a gap
between those gears as shown on page 6-67. Then set them onto the purge gear shaft with the
HS changeover gear (thinner one) facing towards the maintenance unit.
• When securing the maintenance unit with three screws (two "a" and one "b" screws), tighten
these screws in the order of to as shown on page 6-67.

6- 72

Confidential

6.1.19 Paper Tray ASSY

(1) While pulling each of the left and right sides of the paper tray outwards, release each of the left
and right rear corners of the paper tray cover, respectively.
Paper tray cover*
*The paper tray cover shown
here has a photo tray.

(Front)

Paper tray

(6_63)

(2) While pressing the universal guide release button (shown below), slide the paper tray extension
to the front until it clicks.
(3) While pulling sections "x" of the paper tray outwards, push down the paper tray extension and
slide it to the front and out of the paper tray.
Paper tray

"x"

"x"
Universal guide
release button
Paper tray extension

(Front)
(6_64)

6- 73

Confidential

(4) Pull the four lock arms on the rear of the paper tray outwards and release the four latches of the
bank ASSY. Then pull the bank ASSY up and out of the paper tray.
(5) If the base pad needs to be replaced, peel it off the bottom of the paper tray.
NOTE: Once removed, the base pad will become unusable and a new pad will have to be put
back in.
Bank ASSY

Depressed
section

Base pad
Paper tray

Align the edge of the base pad
with the front edge of the
depressed section on the paper tray.

Tabs

Paper tray

Base pad

Latch

Unlatching the bank ASSY

Bank ASSY

Lock arm
Paper tray
(6_65)

Assembling Notes

• When attaching a new base pad to the paper tray, align the edge of the base pad with the front
edge of the depressed section on the paper tray as shown above.
• When mounting the bank ASSY, first insert the four tabs into the openings in the paper tray and
then press the inside of the bank ASSY so that the latches snap into place.

6- 74

Confidential

6.1.20 Routing of the Harnesses, Flat Cables, and Ink Supply Tubes
*For models with ADF

Routing A: CIS motor harness, document front and rear sensor harnesses*, ADF motor harness* and grounding
wire*
On the upper cover

Models except MFC265C/260C/235C

(Rear)

Route the CIS motor harness
and the bundle of ADF motor
harness and grounding wire
on this side.

Route the bundle of document
front and rear sensor harnesses
on this side.

Upper cover

Main PCB

Grounding wire
ADF motor harness
CIS motor harness
Document rear sensor harness
Document front sensor harness

(6_10_440CN)

(Rear)

MFC265C/260C

Route the CIS motor harness
and the bundle of ADF motor
harness and grounding wire
on this side.

Route the bundle of document
front and rear sensor harnesses
on this side.

Upper cover

Main PCB

Grounding wire
ADF motor harness
CIS motor harness
Document front sensor harness
Document rear sensor harness

6- 75

(6_10_240C)

Confidential

MFC235C
(Rear)

Route the CIS motor harness
on this side.

Upper cover

Main PCB

CIS motor harness

6- 76

(6_10_750CW)

Confidential

On the ADF unit*
*For models with ADF
Viewed from the bottom

ADF motor

Document front sensor harness

ADF motor harness

Grounding wire

Cable guide

Document front sensor harness
Grounding wire

Top view

Document front sensor PCB

ADF unit

ADF motor harness
(Rear)

Document rear sensor PCB
Document rear sensor harness
Document front and rear sensor harnesses
ADF motor harness
Grounding wire

6- 77

(6_66)

Confidential

Routing B: Antenna wire (For models with cordless handset)
Antenna support

Pass the antenna wire through
this guide provided on the
antenna support.
Route the antenna wire
between these two ribs.

Plate spring
Antenna wire

Upper cover

Speaker harness

(6_30_3_e)

Antenna & cordless PCB ASSY

Routing C: Speaker harness through the cable guides on the inner surface of the upper cover

Upper cover
(placed upside down)
Speaker harness
Speaker

(6_67_1)

6- 78

Confidential

Routing D: WLAN PCB harness (For wireless LAN-enabled models)

Screw, pan (s/p washer)
M3x8

Grounding wire
WLAN PCB harness

Main PCB

Lower cover

Retainer
Front cover
Linear boss

6- 79

(6_67)

Confidential

Routing E: Carriage motor harness, paper feed motor harness, PF encoder/registration sensor harness, power
supply harness, main-MJ (EXT) harness, main-MJ (LINE) harness, and hook switch harness* on the
lower cover
Models except MFC265C/260C/235C
*1 For models with handset
*2 For models with cordless handset
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
Carriage motor harness
Paper feed motor harness
Main-MJ (LINE) harness

Main PCB

Lower cover

Paper feed motor
harness and PF encoder/
registration sensor harness
Main-MJ (EXT) and
Main-MJ (LINE) harnesses
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Hook switch harness *1
Charge harness *2

SDAA enclosure

Power supply harness

Channel

(6_39_2_MFC_e)

MFC265C/260C/235C

Main-MJ (EXT) harness
Paper feed motor harness

Carriage motor harness
Main-MJ (LINE) harness

Main PCB

Lower cover

Paper feed motor
harness and PF encoder/
registration sensor harness
Main-MJ (EXT) and
Main-MJ (LINE) harnesses

SDAA enclosure

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Channel

Power supply harness
(6_68_240C)

6- 80

Confidential

Routing F: Main-MJ (LINE) and Main-MJ (EXT) harnesses through the SDAA enclosure
Models except MFC265C/260C/235C
*1 For models with handset
*2 For models with cordless handset
Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE) harness (blue)
SDAA enclosure

Carriage motor harness
Paper feed motor harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Hook switch harness *1
Charge harness *2

Main PCB

Power supply harness

(6_36_1_e)

MFC265C/260C/235C
Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE) harness (blue)
SDAA enclosure

Carriage motor harness
Paper feed motor harness

Main PCB

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

(6_36_1_240C)

6- 81

Confidential

Routing G: Power supply harness and power cord in the MJ/PS shield box

Power supply shield

Top view
Ferrite core
Cable guide

Harness guide

Power cord

Main-MJ (LINE) harness
(blue)
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(black)
Power supply shield

Cable guides

Power supply harness
Cable tie
Lower MJ/PS shield

Power supply PCB

Power supply harness

Power supply PCB
MJ shield

(6_69)

Routing H: Ink supply tubes
Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

(Rear)

Bent section of
tube support wire

Hook

Spring

Tube/cable guide
Sponge

Flat cable support plate

Lower cover
Tube guide
When routing the ink
supply tubes through this
tube guide, do not overlap
them with each other.
(6_46_A)

6- 82

Confidential

Routing I: Head flat cables
Tube/cable guide
Lower cover

(Rear)
Spring
Hook
Flat cable support plate

(6_44_3A)

Tube support wire

Routing J: Purge cam switch harness and carriage motor harness on the lower cover

Purge cam switch harness

Carriage motor harness

Ferrite core
Lower cover
(6_69_1)

6- 83

Confidential

Routing K: PF encoder/registration sensor harness and paper feed motor harness
On the inner chute ASSY

Registration sensor PCB
Cable guide

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Inner chute ASSY

Cable guide
(6_70)

Paper feed motor harness

On the lower cover
Registration sensor PCB

Registration
sensor wires
(3-wire)
Inner chute
ASSY

PF encoder
sensor wires
(4-wire)

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness
(7-wire)

(Left)

Ferrite core
PF encoder PCB
Lower cover
Paper feed motor harness

6- 84

(6_70_1)

Confidential

Routing L: Harnesses, flat cables and ink supply tubes on the lower cover
MFC885CW/685CW/680CN/465CN
Top view
Ink supply tubes

(Lower cover)

Carriage motor harness
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(black)
Main-MJ (LINE) harness
(blue)
Paper feed motor harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Hook switch harness*1
Charge harness*5

Head flat
cables

Ink cartridge
sensor harness

Power supply harness
(Connector for
WLAN PCB harness*2 )

Head flat
cable 3

SDAA enclosure

Carriage
(Main PCB)
motor
(Connector
for
harness
speaker harness)
(Connector
(Connector
for battery
(Connector for
harness*3 ) Head flat for LCD 4 cordless flat cable* 5 )
flat cable* )
cable 1

Head flat
cable 2

Purge cam switch
harness

Carriage motor harness

Paper feed motor
harness and PF
encoder/registration
sensor harness

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (blue)
Paper feed motor
harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Hook switch harness*1
Charge harness*5
Power supply harness

*1 For models with handset
*2 For wireless LAN-enabled
models
*3 For models with backup
battery
4
* For models with color LCD
*5 For models with cordless
handset
SDAA enclosure

6- 85

(6_71_1_e)

Confidential

MFC265C/260C/235C
Top view
Ink supply tubes

(Lower cover)

Carriage motor harness
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(black)
Main-MJ (LINE) harness
(blue)
Paper feed motor harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Head flat
cables

Ink cartridge
sensor harness

Power supply harness
SDAA enclosure

Carriage
(Main PCB)
Head flat Head flat
motor
cable 3
cable 2
harness (Connector for
Head flat
speaker harness)
cable 1

Purge cam switch
harness

Carriage motor harness

Paper feed motor
harness and PF
encoder/registration
sensor harness

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (blue)
Paper feed motor
harness
PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

SDAA enclosure

6- 86

(6_71_2)

Confidential

6.2 LUBRICATION
Apply the specified lubricants to the lubrication points as shown below.
Lubricant type
(Manufacturer)
Molykote EM-30LG
(Dow Corning)

Molykote EM-60L
(Dow Corning)

Silicone G-501
(Shin-Etsu Chemical)

Lubrication points

No. of
points

Document pull-in roller*

Document separation roller*

Head/carriage unit

CR guide rail

CR support chassis

Mode switching lever

Clutch gear shaft

SF changeover gear

Purge gear shaft

Lubricant amount
per point
4 mm diameter ball
1.5 mm diameter ball
1.5 mm diameter ball

2 mm diameter ball

3 mm diameter ball
*For models with ADF

Document pull-in roller and document separation roller in the document roller holder
(For models with ADF)
Apply a 4 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LG) to each of the lubrication points
below.

Apply grease here.

Document pull-in roller

Apply grease here.

Document
separation roller

Document roller holder
(6_72)

6- 87

Confidential

Head/carriage unit
Apply a 1.5 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-60L) to the lubrication point below.

Apply grease here.

Head/carriage unit
(6_73)

6- 88

Confidential

CR guide rail and CR support chassis
Apply a 1.5 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-60L) to the 26 lubrication points below.
Lubrication procedure
(1) Move the head/carriage unit to the right end of its travel and hit it against the stoppers provided
at the right end of the CR guide rail and support chassis. This is to make the pair of slider cams
protrude to the left from the head/carriage unit, raising the head/carriage unit to the highest
position.
(2) Move the head/carriage unit close to the left end of its travel, taking care not to hit the slider
cams against the left stoppers to prevent the slider cams from protruding to the right.
(3) Apply grease to the 24 lubrication points on the CR guide rail and support chassis as specified
below.
As for the leftmost two lubrication points, apply grease after moving the head/carriage unit to
the right and out of those points.
(4) Move the head/carriage unit from the left to the right ends of its travel to spread the applied
grease on the CR guide rail and chassis.

Apply grease to
these 13 points.

CR guide rail

7+0.5
3+0.5

11+0.5
7+0.5

To apply grease to this
leftmost point, move the
head/carriage unit to the right.

To apply grease to this
leftmost point, move the
head/carriage unit to the
right.

Apply grease to
these 13 points.

6- 89

CR support chassis

60
(6_76)

Confidential

Mode switching lever and clutch gear shaft
Apply a 2 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-60L) to each of the lubrication points below.

Apply grease here.

Mode switching lever
Apply grease here.

Clutch gear shaft

(6_74)

SF changeover gear and purge gear shaft
Apply a 3 mm diameter ball of grease (Silicone G-501) to each of the lubrication points below.

Apply grease
here.

Purge gear

Apply grease here.
Apply grease here.
Purge gear
Maintenance unit
SF changeover
gear
HS changeover
gear
(6_75_e)

6- 90

Confidential

CHAPTER 7
ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT

Confidential

CHAPTER 7 ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT
This chapter details adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the head/carriage
unit, main PCB and some other parts have been replaced.

CONTENTS
7.1

7.2

PREPARATION...........................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1

Requirements...................................................................................................7-1

7.1.2

Loading the Programs to the Machine ..............................................................7-2

IF YOU REPLACE THE HEAD/CARRIAGE UNIT OR ENGINE UNIT .........................7-6
[1]

Update the head property information stored in the EEPROM
on the main PCB ......................................................................................7-6

[2]

Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76) ...............................7-9

[3]

Print out a test pattern (Function code 09) ................................................7-9

[4]

Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit ............................7-10

[5]

Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58) ...............7-13

[6]

Align vertical print lines (Function code 65) ............................................7-17

[7]

Margin adjustment in borderless printing (Function code 66) ..................7-19

[8]

Print out a total check pattern.................................................................7-22

[9]

Switch back to standby...........................................................................7-24

[ 10 ] Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part..................................7-24
7.3

IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB...........................................................................7-25
[1]

Load programs .......................................................................................7-25

[2]

Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01) ..................7-25

[3]

Specify the CIS type (Function code 59).................................................7-25

[4]

Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74) ..............7-25

[5]

[6]

Check the control panel PCB for normal operation (Function code 13) ...7-26

[7]

Check the sensor operation (Function code 32) ......................................7-26

[8]

Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55) ...7-27

[9]

Set an ID code and update the head property information ......................7-27

[ 10 ] Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58) ...............7-29
[ 11 ] Align vertical print lines (Function code 65) ............................................7-29
[ 12 ] Margin adjustment in borderless printing (Function code 66) ..................7-29
[ 13 ] Get MAC address from the WLAN PCB
(Only for wireless LAN-enabled models).................................................7-29
Confidential

[ 14 ] Switch back to standby...........................................................................7-29
[ 15 ] Register cordless handsets.....................................................................7-30
7.4

IF YOU REPLACE THE INK ABSORBER BOX OR FLUSHING BOX.......................7-32
[1]

7.5

7.6

7.7

IF YOU REPLACE THE SCANNER COVER (SCANNER UNIT)................................7-32
[1]

Specify the CIS type (Function code 59).................................................7-32

[2]

Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55) ...7-32

IF YOU REPLACE THE CORDLESS PCB ................................................................7-33
[1]

[2]

IF YOU REPLACE THE CORDLESS HANDSETS ....................................................7-33
[1]

7.8

Reset each of the purge and flushing counters .......................................7-32

Deregister and register cordless handsets ..............................................7-33

IF YOU REPLACE THE WLAN PCB
(ONLY FOR WIRELESS LAN-ENABLED MODELS) ................................................7-35
[1]

Transfer MAC address to the main PCB .................................................7-35

Confidential

7.1 PREPARATION
7.1.1 Requirements

Before proceeding to perform any adjustments or update any settings, you need the executables, data
files, spare parts and supplies (provided by Brother Industries) and must set up your PC.
NOTE: Use a PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 98SE/Me, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP Home/Professional, or Windows Vista.
Executables and Data Files Required for Adjustments and Updating of Settings
BHL2-Maintenance
Printer driver

brusbsn.exe

brusbsn.ini

filedg32.exe

incline.prn

√

Head/carriage unit, Engine unit
(Section 7.2)
Main PCB (Section 7.3)
Ink absorber box, Flushing box
(Section 7.4)
Scanner cover (Section 7.5)
Cordless PCB (Section 7.6)
Cordless handsets (Section 7.7)

pfadj.prn exitadj.prn media.prn qualbh7.prn
Head/carriage unit, Engine unit
(Section 7.2)
Main PCB (Section 7.3)
Ink absorber box, Flushing box
(Section 7.4)
Scanner cover (Section 7.5)
Cordless PCB (Section 7.6)
Cordless handsets (Section 7.7)

√

NOTE: Executables and data files listed above should be saved in an arbitrary folder in your PC
beforehand.
Spare Parts and Supplies Required for Adjustments and Updating of Settings
Head/carriage unit, Engine unit
(Section 7.2)
Main PCB (Section 7.3)
Ink absorber box, Flushing box
(Section 7.4)
Scanner cover (Section 7.5)
Cordless PCB (Section 7.6)
Cordless handsets (Section 7.7)

Recording paper*

Ink cartridges

Protective part

√

* Letter-size paper is necessary to correctly print check patterns in "updating the paper feeding correction
value" and "adjusting the margins in borderless printing."

7-1

Confidential

7.1.2 Loading the Programs to the Machine

If you want to change the programs stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB or after you replace
the main PCB, load the desired programs to the flash ROM.
Loading requires a PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 98SE/Me, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP Home/Professional, or Windows Vista.
CAUTION: During loading, never turn off your PC or the machine, unplug the USB interface cable,
interrupt loading, or load invalid data. If you do so, loading will fail, causing the PCB to be unusable.
You will have to replace the main PCB and load programs to a new PCB.
Preparation

You need the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver and filedg32.exe (provided by Brother Industries).
Save them in an arbitrary folder in your PC.
Installing the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver

To identify terminals connected via USB interface, a PC requires the corresponding virtual USB
devices to be implemented by driver/software. If you connect any number of machines to your PC,
therefore, the same number of virtual USB devices will be automatically configured on your PC. To
prevent virtual USB devices from being configured limitlessly, use the unique driver installation
procedure described below that enables your PC to identify terminals via a single virtual USB device.
NOTE: Once this installation procedure is carried out for a PC, no more driver/software installation
will be required for that PC to identify machines. If the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver has been
already installed to your PC according to this procedure, skip this section.
NOTE: Before proceeding to the procedure given below, make sure that the BHL2-Maintenance
Printer driver (listed in Chapter 7, Section 7.1.1) is stored in your PC.
(1) Make sure that the machine's power cord is unplugged from an electrical outlet.
If the machine is connected to a PC, unplug the USB cable.
(2) Switch on your PC.
(3) Plug the machine's power cord into an electrical outlet.
(4) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next press the
times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 9.)

key four

7-2

Confidential

(6) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of new hardware device by the system.
Click Next to proceed.

(7) Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)" and click Next.

(8) Select "Specify a location" and click Next.

7-3

Confidential

(9) Select the folder where the copy of the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver is located (or click
Browse to specify it), then click OK.
(This sample screen is captured on the Windows 2000 desktop.)

(10) Click Next.

(11) To proceed, click Yes.

7-4

Confidential

(12) If the driver is successfully installed, the following message window appears. Click Finish to
return to Windows.

NOTE: After completion of the driver installation, if the machine exits the maintenance mode, the
"Found New Hardware Wizard" screen in step (6) appears again. Click Cancel.
NOTE: To check that the printer driver is successfully installed, click Start|Settings|Printers to call
up the Printers window as shown below and confirm that the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon is
displayed.

7-5

Confidential

7.2 IF YOU REPLACE THE HEAD/CARRIAGE UNIT
OR ENGINE UNIT
[1]

Update the head property information stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB

(1) Make sure that the machine's power cord is unplugged from an electrical outlet.
If the machine is connected to a PC, unplug the USB cable.
(2) Switch on the PC.
(3) Plug the machine's power cord into an electrical outlet.
(4) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the
the machine enter the maintenance mode.

key four times to make

TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the
same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this
sequence.
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
" on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in which
the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(5) Connect the machine to the PC using a USB cable.
(6) On the PC, run the ID/head property setup utility (brusbsn.exe) in the folder created. The
following window appears.

(7) On the model menu, click BH7.
7-6

Confidential

(8) In Port on the BrUsbSn screen, select the port number assigned to the BHL2-Maintenance
Printer. If the port number is unknown, follow steps 1) through 4) below.
1) Click Start | Settings | Printers.

The Printers window appears as shown below.
2) Right-click the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon.

3) Click Properties.

7-7

Confidential

The BHL2-Maintenance Printer Properties window appears as shown below.
4) Click the Ports tab.

In this example, the port number assigned to the Brother BHL2-Maintenance Printer is USB010.
(9) In the Head Info. box on the BrUsbSn screen (page 7-6), type the 15-digit property code (e.g.,
ALR778402F00000) which is printed on the bar code label attached to the lower cover. Click
the OK button.
(10) To check that the entered head property code is correct (using function code 68 in Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.17), press the 6 and 8 keys in this order. Then press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in this
order.
The LCD shows the current head property information (15-digit code) stored in the EEPROM
on the main PCB.
(11) Check that the character string entered in step (9) appears.
If it is OK, press the Stop/Exit key.
If something other than that appears, check the connection between the PC and machine and go
back to step (6).

7-8

Confidential

[2]

Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76)

(1) Open the ink cartridge cover, set new ink cartridges into the ink refill ASSY, and close the ink
cartridge cover.
(2) Carry out "Initial purge" (with function code 76) using the steps below. (See Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.21.)
Press the 7 and 6 keys in this order.
The machine displays "CLEANING ALL" on the LCD and enters the purge mode.
Press the 4 and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order.
The machine starts an initial purge that refills the ink supply tubes and the new print head with
fresh ink.
[3]

Print out a test pattern (Function code 09)

To check that the head/carriage unit normally sprays ink droplets from all head nozzles, print out a
test pattern with function code 09 (see Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.4) with the following steps.
(1) Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order.
(2) If a missing dot or any other print problem is found, go back to [ 2 ] above to clean the
head/carriage unit again.

Test Pattern

7-9

Confidential

[4]

Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit

(1) Run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "incline.prn" icon onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the Filedrgs
window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "Incline
Adjust" test pattern shown on the next page.
(3) Out of the three rows of the "Incline Adjust" test pattern (on the next page), check the middle
row and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.

7-10

Confidential

Head Positioning Test Pattern
7-11

Confidential

(4) Move the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel with function code 63 (see Chapter 9,
Section 9.1.4.14) using the following key operation.
Press the 6, 3, and * keys in this order.
(5) Turn the head skew adjuster knob by the number of divisions specified by the pattern number
you recorded in step (3), using a spanner.
If block +1 is the least uneven print, for example, turn the head skew adjuster knob to the front
by one division; if block -1, turn it to the rear by one division.

Head skew adjuster knob

7-12

Confidential

[5]

Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)

Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter-size paper for printing check patterns.
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "pfadj.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the Filedrgs window
shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out "PF adjust check"
patterns (see page 7-15 for a sample printout).
(3) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(4) To select the paper feed roller adjustment, press the 1 key.
The "PF ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(5) Out of the three rows of the "PF adjust check" pattern (on page 7-15), check the middle row and
select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.
If the least unevenness seems to be far to the left of -8, regard it as -8; if it seems to be far to the
right of +8, regard it as +8. In this case, you need to check whether the paper feed roller and
head/carriage unit are set into place.

7-13

Confidential

(6) Enter the number of the least uneven block found in step (5).
For example, if the number of the least uneven block is +4, press the 4 key when the "PF ADJ
NO. +0" is displayed on the LCD.
If the number is -4, press the

key to display the "PF ADJ NO. -0" and press the 4 key.

Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(7) On your PC, drag and drop the "exitadj.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the
Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out three sheets of
"EXIT adjust check" patterns (on page 7-16 for a sample printout).
(8) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(9) To select the paper ejection roller adjustment, press the 2 key.
The "EXIT ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(10) Out of the three sheets of the "EXIT adjust check" patterns (on page 7-16), check the middle
sheet and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.
(11) Enter the number of the least uneven block found in step (10) in the same way as in step (6).
Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

7-14

Confidential

Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Feed Roller
7-15

Confidential

Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Ejection Roller
7-16

Confidential

[6]

Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)

(1) Press the 6, 5 and 1 keys in this order.
The machine prints out two sets of vertical alignment check patterns in monochrome for 600 dpi
and 1200 dpi (see the next page), each of which consists of #0 through #8 blocks. If the vertical
alignment is ON, #5 block shows vertically aligned lines.
The "600DPI NO.(1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(2) For 600 dpi, check the printed vertical alignment check patterns and find which number block
shows full alignment.
If the full alignment block is other than #5, enter that block number by using the numerical keys.
The "1200DPI NO.(1-8)" appears.
(3) For 1200 dpi, perform the same operation as in step (2).
The machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If #1 or #8 block is fully aligned so that you press the 1 or 8 key in the above procedure,
then go back to step (1) to confirm that #5 block becomes aligned.

7-17

Confidential

600DPI

1200DPI

Vertical Alignment Check Patterns

7-18

Confidential

[7]

Margin adjustment in borderless printing (Function code 66)

Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter-size paper for printing a check pattern.
(1) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "media.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the Filedrgs window
shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "MEDIA
CHECK" pattern (see page 7-21 for a sample printout).
(3) Measure the left and right margins on the printout.
(Example) Left: 1.3 mm, Right: 1.4 mm
If both margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, no adjustment is required.
(4) If either margin is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice on the machine.
The "MEDIA SENSOR ADJ" appears. (Note: The Media Sensor refers to the paper width
sensor.)
(5) To make the machine ready for data entry, press the * key.
The "LEFT: 10" appears on the LCD.

7-19

Confidential

(6) To adjust the left margin, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
In this example, the left margin measured in step (3) is 1.3 mm, so press the 1, 3, and OK keys.
(7) The "RIGHT: 10" appears on the LCD.
To adjust the right margin, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (3) is 1.4 mm, so press the 1, 4, and OK
keys.
(8) Upon completion of the entry, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
Go back to step (2) and print out the margin check pattern again.
(9) Measure the left and right margins on the printout.
If both margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, the adjustment is completed.

7-20

Confidential

Margin Check Pattern
7-21

Confidential

[8]

Print out a total check pattern

Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter-size paper for printing a check pattern.
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "qualbh7.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the Filedrgs
window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "Total Quality
Check Pattern" (see the next page for a sample printout).
(3) Check the printed check pattern. If any problem is found, go back to the related item (any of
[ 4 ] through [ 7 ] above) and make adjustments again.
A: Margin adjustment for borderless printing

Go back to Section 7.2 [7].

B: Paper feed roller adjustment

Go back to Section 7.2 [5].

C: Vertical print lines adjustment

Go back to Section 7.2 [6].

D: Head positioning adjustment

Go back to Section 7.2 [4].

E: Paper ejection roller adjustment

Go back to Section 7.2 [5].

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until no problem is found.

7-22

Confidential

A
B
C
D

Total Check Pattern
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

Margin adjustment for borderless printing
Paper feed roller adjustment
Vertical print lines adjustment
Head positioning adjustment
Paper ejection roller adjustment
7-23

Confidential

[9]

Switch back to standby

After completion of the adjustment, disconnect the USB cable and then press the 9 key twice to
return to the standby state.
NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the USB cable first. Returning to standby without disconnecting the
USB cable runs "Found New Hardware Wizard" that starts USB driver installation (as described in
Section 7.1.2).
NOTE: Enable the initial setup mode (see Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.14).

[ 10 ] Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part

Remove all four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead.

Ink cartridges
Ink cartridge cover

7-24

Protective part

Confidential

7.3 IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB
NOTE: If the main PCB is replaced, you should also replace both of the ink absorber box and flushing box.
Using the machine without replacing them for a long period may cause an overflow of drained ink from them,
thereby staining the machine.
[1]

Load programs

If the main PCB is replaced with a new one, load the desired programs onto the flash ROM. Refer to
Appendix 2, page App. 2-5.

If the main PCB is replaced with the one used for any other machine, follow the steps below.
(1) Change the firmware stored in the flash ROM. Refer to Appendix 2, page App. 2-7.
(2) Reset each of the purge and flushing counters with the following procedure.
1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next press the
times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode.

key four

Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.1.
[3]

Specify the CIS type (Function code 59)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.13.
[4]

Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.19.

7-25

Confidential

[5]

The following procedure registers the base ID code to both the main PCB and base unit (cordless
PCB) at the same time. For the registration procedure of cordless handsets, see [14] below.
(1) Read the base ID code from the label attached to the rear of the machine.
NOTE: The code may be 8 or 10 digits long depending upon the machine models.
Base ID code label

(base_ID_code_label_MFC)

(2) On the machine, press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start),

in this order.

The machine enters the maintenance mode and displays the "
LCD.

" on the

(3) Press the 0, 0, 8, and 6 keys in this order.
The current base ID code registered appears on the LCD.
ID: XXXXXXXX
(4) If the displayed code is different from the one read in step (1), move the cursor to the digit to be
modified, using the and keys, and then enter the one read in step (1). To enter numerals,
use the numerical keys; to enter alphabets A through F, use the and keys.
NOTE: To cancel the procedure halfway, press the Stop/Exit key.
(5) Press the OK key.
If the registration completes normally, the "COMPLETE" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: If the "FAILED" appears, the registration has failed. Go back to step (2) above.
(6) Wait two seconds for the screen to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode and
display the "
."
(7) Press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.
[6]

Check the control panel PCB for normal operation (Function code 13)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.7.
[7]

Check the sensor operation (Function code 32)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.8.

7-26

Confidential

[8]

Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.11.
[9]

Set an ID code and update the head property information

NOTE: Make sure that the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver has been installed to your PC. To do
it, click Start|Settings|Printers to call up the Printers window and confirm that the BHL2Maintenance Printer icon (shown on the sample window on page 7-5) is displayed. If the driver has
not been installed, install it referring to Section 7.1.2.
(1) Make sure that your PC is turned off, then connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
(2) Switch your PC on.
(3) On your PC, run the ID/head property utility (brusbsn.exe) in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The following window appears.

(4) On the model menu, click BH7.

7-27

Confidential

(5) In Port on the BrUsbSn screen (on the previous page), select the port number assigned to the
BHL2-Maintenance Printer. If the port number is unknown, follow the instructions given in
Section 7.2 [ 1 ], step (8).
(6) In the Serial No box on the BrUsbSn screen, type the 9-digit serial number (e.g., D6F111101)
printed on the nameplate labeled to the machine as an ID code.

Serial number label

(app01b_MFC)

(7) In the Head Info. box, type the 15-digit property code (e.g., ALR778402F00000) which is
printed on the bar code label attached to the lower cover. Click the OK button.

Head property label
(Bar code label)

(app01d_MFC)

(8) Check whether the entered character strings (ID code and head property information) are
correct with the following procedure.
Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order. Then press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times,
and the ID code appears on the LCD. Check that the displayed code is that string entered in step
(6).
Next, press the 6 and 8 keys in this order. Then press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in this order, and
the head property code appears on the LCD. Check that the displayed code is that string entered
in step (7).
(9) If both are OK, proceed to [ 10 ] below.
If something wrong is displayed, check the connection between the PC and machine and go back
to step (2).

7-28

Confidential

[ 10 ] Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 5 ].
[ 11 ] Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 6 ].
[ 12 ] Margin adjustment in borderless printing (Function code 66)

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 7 ].
[ 13 ] Get MAC address from the WLAN PCB (Only for wireless LAN-enabled models)
MAC address: Media access control address

(1) Disconnect the USB cable and then press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.
(2) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the , , ,
order to make the machine enter the maintenance mode.
(3) Press the 0 key twice.
The "SPECIAL MAINT" appears on the LCD.

keys in this

(4) Press the 0 and 2 keys in this order.
The "PLS INPUT NO.0-A" appears on the LCD.
(5) Press the 8 key, and the main PCB gets the MAC address from the WLAN PCB. (This
operation backs up the EEPROM data stored on the WLAN PCB.)
The "E2PCOPY START" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: If an error is detected during the backup operation, the machine displays "E2P
BACKUP ERR!!" on the LCD and becomes inoperable. If it happens, turn the machine off and
check the connection between the WLAN PCB and main PCB, and then go back to step (2)
again.
(6) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
[ 14 ] Switch back to standby

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 9 ].

7-29

Confidential

[ 15 ] Register cordless handsets

--------------------------------------------------- USA models ------------------------------------------------------On the cordless handset
(1) Press the Menu/OK key.
(2) Press the

key to choose "Register HS," then press the Menu/OK key.

The cordless handset enters the registration mode.
On the machine (base unit)
Complete steps (3) through (6) below within two minutes from the entry of the registration mode.
(3) Press the Menu key.
(4) Press the

key to choose "Initial Setup," then press the OK key.

(5) Press the

key to choose "Register Handset," then press the OK key.

(6) Press the

key to choose "Register," then press the OK key.

The "Registering" appears on the LCD.
Upon successful end of registration, the machine sounds a long beep.
Notes • If the machine sounds three short beeps, indicating the failure of registration, it returns to
the "Register Handset" state. Perform steps (2) and (6) again.
• If you want to install another cordless handset, repeat steps (1), (2), and (6).
• Up to four cordless handsets can be registered to the machine.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the standby state.
----------------------------------------------- European models ---------------------------------------------------On the machine (base unit)
(1) Check the PIN code of the base unit with Function code 80 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.22.)
On the cordless handset
(2) Press the Menu/OK key.
(3) Press the

key to choose "Register HS," then press the Menu/OK key.

(4) Press the or key to choose any one of "Base1," "Base2," "Base3," and "Base4," then press
the Menu/OK key.
Note: Only unused base unit can be chosen.
The cordless handset enters the registration mode.
On the machine (base unit)
Complete steps (5) through (9) below within two minutes from the entry of the registration mode.
(5) Press the Menu key.
(6) Press the

key to choose "Initial Setup," then press the OK key.

(7) Press the

key to choose "Register Handset," then press the OK key.

(8) Press the

key to choose "Register," then press the OK key.

7-30

Confidential

On the cordless handset
The cordless handset is searching for the base unit.
(9) Enter the 4-digit PIN code obtained in step (1) above using the numerical keys and press the
Menu/OK key.
Notes • If the machine sounds three short beeps, indicating the failure of registration, it returns to
the "Register Handset" state. Perform steps (3), (4), (8), and (9) again.
• If you want to install another cordless handset, repeat steps (2) through (4), (8), and (9).
• Up to four cordless handsets can be registered to the machine.
On the machine (base unit)
(10) Press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the standby state.

7-31

Confidential

7.4 IF YOU REPLACE THE INK ABSORBER BOX
OR FLUSHING BOX
When either the ink absorber box or flushing box is replaced, you should replace both of them.
[1]

Reset each of the purge and flushing counters

(1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press
machine enter the maintenance mode.

key four times to make the

TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the
same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this
order.
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
" on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in which
the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(2) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge (or flushing) count
appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge (or flushing) count.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(6) Press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode.

TIP: This machine counts all purge operations performed since produced in order to prevent the ink
absorber box from overflowing with drained ink. An initial purge, for example, advances the counter
by 163 + 432 = 595.
When the purge or flushing counter approaches 9600 or 475852272, respectively, "MACHINE
ERROR 46" appears, and further purge or flushing operations are prohibited. Replace both the ink
absorber box and flushing box and reset their counters.

7.5 IF YOU REPLACE THE SCANNER COVER
(SCANNER UNIT)
[1]

Specify the CIS type (Function code 59)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.13.
[2]

Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.11.

7-32

Confidential

7.6 IF YOU REPLACE THE CORDLESS PCB
[1]

Refer to Section 7.3, [ 5 ].
[2]

Refer to Section 7.3, [ 15 ].

7.7 IF YOU REPLACE THE CORDLESS
HANDSETS
[1]

Deregister and register cordless handsets

The machine can support up to four cordless handsets registered. If you replace any of them,
deregister all cordless handsets and then register them.
-- Deregistering a cordless handset --

On the machine (base unit)
(1) Press the Menu key.
(2) Press the

key to choose "Initial Setup," then press the OK key.

(3) Press the

key to choose "Register Handset," then press the OK key.

(4) Press the

key to choose "Terminate," then press the OK key.

The "All Delete?" appears on the LCD.
(5) Press the 1 key.
All cordless handsets will be deregistered and the machine returns to the "Register Handset"
state.
(6) Press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the standby state.

7-33

Confidential

-- Registering a cordless handset --

------------------------------------------------ USA models ------------------------------------------------------On the cordless handset
(1) Press the Menu/OK key.
(2) Press the

key to choose "Register HS," then press the Menu/OK key.

key to choose "Initial Setup," then press the OK key.

(5) Press the

key to choose "Register Handset," then press the OK key.

(6) Press the

key to choose "Register," then press the OK key.

The "Registering" appears on the LCD.
Upon successful end of registration, the machine sounds a long beep.
Notes • If the machine sounds three short beeps, indicating the failure of registration, it returns to
the "Register Handset" state. Perform steps (2) and (6) again.
• If you want to install another cordless handset, repeat steps (1), (2), and (6).
• Up to four cordless handsets can be registered to the machine.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the standby state.
----------------------------------------------- European models ------------------------------------------------On the machine (base unit)
(1) Check the PIN code of the base unit with Function code 80 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.22.)
On the cordless handset
(2) Press the Menu/OK key.
(3) Press the

key to choose "Register HS," then press the Menu/OK key.

key to choose "Initial Setup," then press the OK key.

(7) Press the

key to choose "Register Handset," then press the OK key.

(8) Press the

key to choose "Register," then press the OK key.

7-34

Confidential

7.8 IF YOU REPLACE THE WLAN PCB (ONLY
FOR WIRELESS LAN-ENABLED MODELS)
[1]

Transfer MAC address to the main PCB
MAC address: Media access control address

(1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the , , ,
order to make the machine enter the maintenance mode.
(2) Press the 0 key twice.
The "SPECIAL MAINT" appears on the LCD.

keys in this

(3) Press the 0 and 2 keys in this order.
The "PLS INPUT NO.0-A" appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 8 key, and the main PCB gets the MAC address from the WLAN PCB. (This
operation backs up the EEPROM data stored on the WLAN PCB.)
The "E2PCOPY START" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: If an error is detected during the backup operation, the machine displays "E2P
BACKUP ERR!!" on the LCD and becomes inoperable. If it happens, turn the machine off and
check the connection between the WLAN PCB and main PCB, and then go back to step (1)
again.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

7-35

Confidential

CHAPTER 8
CLEANING

Confidential

CHAPTER 8 CLEANING
This chapter provides cleaning procedures not covered by the User's Guide. Before starting any
repair work, clean the machine as it may solve the problem concerned.

CONTENTS
8.1

CLEANING THE EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL SURFACES OF THE MACHINE...........8-1

8.2

CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................8-2

For the cleaning procedures of the head/carriage unit, scanner unit, and platen, refer to the User's
Guide.

Confidential

8.1 CLEANING THE EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL
SURFACES OF THE MACHINE
(1) If the external surface of the machine is stained, clean it with a soft, clean and lint-free cloth.
NOTE: Do not use isopropyl alcohol (IPA) to remove dirt or stains from the molding parts.
Doing so may cause cracks in those parts.
(2) If the inside of the machine is stained, first unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and
then clean it with a soft, clean and lint-free cloth.
NOTE: Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
(3) If the PF encoder disk or encoder strip is stained, replace it with a new one. Do not try to clean
it.

8- 1

Confidential

8.2 CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT
(1) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
(2) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the key four times to make
the machine enter the maintenance mode.
TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the
same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this
sequence.
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
" on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in which
the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(3) Move the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel (function code 63 in Chapter 9, Section
9.1.4.14) by pressing the 6, 3, and * keys in this sequence.
(4) Unplug the power cord of the machine from the electrical outlet.
(5) Open the scanner cover (scanner unit).
(6) Clean the two head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a "Rubycel" stick that is a
head cleaner stick provided as a spare part.
NOTE: Do not use a cotton swab that may leave lint on the cleaned sections. Lint left on the
maintenance unit will affect the print performance.
NOTE: Use a new Rubycel stick and do not use the used one for any other maintenance units.
NOTE: During the cleaning jobs, take care not to touch the head caps or wiper directly by
hand or scratch their surfaces. Do not remove them from the head cap holder.
(7) Close the scanner cover.
(8) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
(9) Hear the head/carriage unit moving. After the moving sound stops, unplug the machine's power
cord from the electrical outlet.
Rubycel stick

Maintenance unit

Head wiper

Head caps

8- 2

Confidential

CHAPTER 9
MAINTENANCE MODE

Confidential

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE MODE
This chapter describes the maintenance mode which is exclusively designed for the purpose of
checks, settings and adjustments of the machine using the keys on the control panel.
In the maintenance mode, you can update memory (EEPROM: electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory) contents for optimizing the drive conditions of the
head/carriage unit or the paper feed roller and paper ejection roller in the engine unit, if those
units have been replaced, or for setting the CIS scanner area, for example. You can also
customize the EEPROM according to the shipment destination of the machine concerned. In
addition, you can perform operational checks of the LCD, control panel PCB or sensors, perform
a print test, display the log information or error codes, and modify firmware switches (WSW).
For models with a cordless handset, the maintenance functions dedicated to cordless handsets are
provided.

CONTENTS
9.1

MAINTENANCE MODE FOR THE MACHINE .............................................................9-1
9.1.1

Entry into the Machine Maintenance Mode .......................................................9-1

9.1.2

List of Functions in the Machine Maintenance Mode.........................................9-2

9.1.3

User-access to the Machine Maintenance Mode...............................................9-3

9.1.4

Detailed Description of Functions in the Machine Maintenance Mode...............9-4

9.1.4.1

EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 01, 91).........................9-4

9.1.4.2

Printout of Scanning Compensation Data (Function code 05) ...................9-5

9.1.4.3

ADF Performance Test (Function code 08)...............................................9-7

9.1.4.4

Test Pattern (Function code 09) ...............................................................9-8

9.1.4.5

Firmware Switch Setting and Printout (Function codes 10 and 11)..........9-10

9.1.4.6

Operational Check of LCD (Function code 12)........................................9-15

9.1.4.7

Operational Check of Control Panel PCB (Function code 13) .................9-15

9.1.4.8

Sensor Operational Check (Function code 32)........................................9-18

9.1.4.9

Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log
(Function code 53) .................................................................................9-20

9.1.4.10 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Start/End Position (Function code 54).......9-22
9.1.4.11 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
(Function code 55) .................................................................................9-23
9.1.4.12 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value (Function code 58)............9-24
9.1.4.13 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type (Function code 59).9-28
9.1.4.14 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Initial Setup Mode
(Function code 63) .................................................................................9-30
9.1.4.15 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome (Function code 65) .....9-31
Confidential

9.1.4.16 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing (Function code 66) .................9-33
9.1.4.17 Updating of Property Data (Function code 68) ........................................9-36
9.1.4.18 Head/Carriage Unit Traveling Speed Check (Function code 69) .............9-37
9.1.4.19 EEPROM Customizing (Function code 74) .............................................9-38
9.1.4.20 Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and dust
accumulated on the maintenance unit) (Function code 75) .....................9-41
9.1.4.21 Purging Operation (Function code 76) ....................................................9-42
9.1.4.22 Display of the Equipment's Log (Function code 80) ................................9-45
9.1.4.23 Equipment Error Code Indication (Function code 82)..............................9-47
9.1.4.24 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line (Function code 87)...9-47
9.1.4.25 Assurance Mode Switch Setting (Function code 88) ...............................9-48
9.1.4.26 Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to U.S.A. models)9-55
9.2

MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS FOR CORDLESS HANDSETS ..................................9-56
9.2.1

Overview........................................................................................................9-56

9.2.2

Maintenance Functions for U.S.A. Models......................................................9-56

9.2.2.1

List of Maintenance Functions ................................................................9-56

9.2.2.2

Checking of Cordless Handset ID Code and Base ID Code
(Function code 086) ...............................................................................9-57

9.2.2.3

Measuring of RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator)
(Function code 195) ...............................................................................9-58

9.2.2.4

Measuring of BER (Bit Error Rate) (Function code 196)..........................9-59

9.2.2.5

Version Information on Cordless Handset (Function code 197)...............9-59

9.2.2.6

EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 198) ..........................9-60

9.2.3

Maintenance Functions for European Models .................................................9-61

9.2.3.1

List of Maintenance Functions ................................................................9-61

9.2.3.2

Version Information on Cordless Handset...............................................9-61

9.2.3.3

Checking of Cordless Handset ID Code..................................................9-62

9.2.3.4

Checking of Base ID Code .....................................................................9-62

9.2.3.5

EEPROM Parameter Initialization ..........................................................9-63

9.2.3.6

Initializing the Cordless Handset.............................................................9-64

Confidential

9.1 MAINTENANCE MODE FOR THE MACHINE
9.1.1 Entry into the Machine Maintenance Mode

Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next press the
make the machine enter the maintenance mode.

key four times to

TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the same
way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this order.
" on the LCD,
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in which the machine
is ready to accept entry from the keys.
To select one of the maintenance-mode functions listed in Section 9.1.2, enter the corresponding 2digit function code with the numerical keys on the control panel. (The details of each maintenancemode function are described in Section 9.1.4.)
NOTES • To exit from the maintenance mode and switch to standby, press the 9 key twice in the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.
• Pressing the Stop/Exit key after entering only one digit restores the machine to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.
• If an invalid function code is entered, the machine resumes the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

9-1

Confidential

9.1.2 List of Functions in the Machine Maintenance Mode
Maintenance-mode Functions

Function
Code
01
05
08
09
10
11
12
13

Function
EEPROM Parameter Initialization
Printout of Scanning Compensation Data
ADF Performance Test
Test Pattern
Firmware Switch Setting
Printout of Firmware Switch Data
Operational Check of LCD
Operational Check of Control Panel PCB
(Check of Keys)

Reference
Section (Page)
9.1.4.1 (9-4)
9.1.4.2 (9-5)
9.1.4.3 (9-7)
9.1.4.4 (9-8)
9.1.4.5 (9-10)
9.1.4.5 (9-13)
9.1.4.6 (9-15)
9.1.4.7 (9-16)

Sensor Operational Check

9.1.4.8 (9-18)

53
54
55
58
59

Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log
Fine Adjustment of Scanning Start/End Position
Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value
Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type

9.1.4.9 (9-20)
9.1.4.10 (9-22)
9.1.4.11 (9-23)
9.1.4.12 (9-24)
9.1.4.13 (9-28)

63
65
66
68
69

Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Initial Setup Mode
Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome
Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing
Updating of Property Data
Head/Carriage Unit Traveling Speed Check

9.1.4.14 (9-30)
9.1.4.15 (9-31)
9.1.4.16 (9-33)
9.1.4.17 (9-36)
9.1.4.18 (9-37)

74
75

9.1.4.19 (9-38)
9.1.4.20 (9-41)

EEPROM Customizing
Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and
dust accumulated on the maintenance unit)
Purging Operation

80
82
87
88

Display of the Equipment's Log
Equipment Error Code Indication
Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line
Assurance Mode Switch Setting

9.1.4.22 (9-45)
9.1.4.23 (9-47)
9.1.4.24 (9-47)
9.1.4.25 (9-48)

EEPROM Parameter Initialization (except the telephone number
storage area)
Exit from the Maintenance Mode
Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to
U.S.A. models)

9.1.4.1 (9-4)

99
(Menu + #, 2, 7,
9, 0, 0)

9-2

9.1.4.21 (9-42)

----- (9-1)
9.1.4.26 (9-55)

Confidential

9.1.3 User-access to the Machine Maintenance Mode

Basically, the maintenance-mode functions listed on the previous page should be accessed by service
personnel only. However, you can allow end users to access some of these under the guidance of
service personnel (e.g., by telephone).
The user-accessible functions (codes 10, 11, 12, 53, 66, 75, 76, 80, 82, 87, 88, and 91) are shaded
in the table given on the previous page. Function code 10 accesses the firmware switches, each of
which has eight selectors. You should not allow end users to access all of those selectors, but you
can allow them to access user-accessible selectors which are shaded in the firmware switch tables in
Appendix 4.
The service personnel should instruct end users to follow the procedure given below.
(1) Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start), Menu, and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this
order.
The "MAINTENANCE 10" appears on the LCD.
TIP: For the models equipped with a numerical keypad, you may press the Menu, Black Start
(Mono Start), and 0 keys instead in the same way as conventional models. Then pressing 1 and
0 keys, for example, calls up the setting screen for Function code 10.
(2) To access Function code 10, press the OK key.
To access any other function code, call up the desired code using the and keys or numerical
keys.
Then press the OK key.
For Function code 10, access the desired firmware switch according to the operating procedure
described in Appendix 4.
(3) To make the machine return to standby, press the Stop/Exit key. When each of the useraccessible functions is completed, the machine automatically returns to standby.
Menu key
and

keys

Stop/Exit key

Black Start key
(Mono Start key)
OK key

9-3

Confidential

9.1.4 Detailed Description of Functions in the Machine Maintenance Mode
9.1.4.1

EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 01, 91)

Function

The machine initializes the parameters, user switches, firmware switches and assurance mode switch
settings registered in the EEPROM, to the initial values. Entering Function code 01 initializes almost
all of the EEPROM areas, but entering 91 does not initialize some areas, as listed below.
Function code

Data item
Maintenance-mode functions
User switches
Firmware switches
Remote activation code
Assurance mode switch settings
Activity report
Station ID data
Outside line number
Telephone function registration
One-touch dialing
Speed dialing
Group dialing
Call transfer data
EEPROM customizing code
(4-digit)

These will be
initialized.

All of these will be
initialized.
These will not be
initialized.

This will not be initialized.
(Note that the first digit of the 4-digit code will be initialized
to "0." If the code is 1001, for example, it will be initialized
to 0001.)

NOTE: If you replace the main PCB with the one used for any other machine, carry out this
procedure and then customize the EEPROM (Function code 74 in Section 9.1.4.19).

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 0 and 1 keys (or the 9 and 1 keys according to your need) in this order in the initial
stage of the maintenance mode.
The "PARAMETER INIT" appears on the LCD.
(2) Upon completion of parameter initialization, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

9-4

Confidential

9.1.4.2

Printout of Scanning Compensation Data (Function code 05)

Function

The machine prints out the white and black level data for scanning compensation.

Operating Procedure

Do not start this function merely after powering on the machine but start it after carrying out a
sequence of scanning operation. Unless the machine has carried out any scanning operation, this
function cannot print out correct scanning compensation data. This is because at the start of
scanning operation, the machine initializes white and black level data and takes in the scanning
compensation reference data.
NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the USB cable from the machine before proceeding to the procedure
below.
(1) Press the 0 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "PRINTING" appears on the LCD.
(2) The machine prints out the scanning compensation data list containing the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)

Black/white data graph
LED light intensity pulse data for green image (2 bytes)
LED light intensity pulse data for blue image (2 bytes)
LED light intensity pulse data for red image (2 bytes)
Compensation data for background color (1 byte)
Black level data (4970 bytes)
White level data for red image (4970 bytes)
White level data for green image (4970 bytes)
White level data for blue image (4970 bytes)

(3) Upon completion of recording of the compensation data list, the machine returns to the initial
stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: When the machine prints monochrome images after monochrome scanning, only the green
data is valid.
NOTE: If any data is abnormal, its code will be printed in inline style.

9-5

Confidential

b)
c)
d)
e)

f)
|
i)

Scanning Compensation Data List

9-6

Confidential

9.1.4.3

ADF Performance Test (Function code 08)

Function

The machine counts the documents fed by the automatic document feeder (ADF) and displays the
count on the LCD for checking the ADF performance.

Operating Procedure

(1) Set documents. (Allowable up to the ADF capacity.)
The "DOC. READY" appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the 0 and 8 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine feeds the documents in and out while counting them and displaying the current
count on the LCD as shown below.
ADF CHECK P.01
Current count (1st page in this example)
(3) After counting all documents, the machine shows the final count. To return the machine to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key.

9-7

Confidential

9.1.4.4

Test Pattern (Function code 09)

Function

This function prints out a test pattern (Print Quality Check sheet) to allow the service personnel to
check the print quality.

Operating Procedure

Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The figure on the next page shows a test pattern which is printed on the Print Quality Check sheet.
According to the instructions printed on the sheet, you can check or correct the print quality.

9-8

Confidential

Test Pattern
9-9

Confidential

9.1.4.5

Firmware Switch Setting and Printout (Function codes 10 and 11)

[ A ] Firmware switch setting
Function

The machine incorporates the following firmware switch functions which can be activated with the
procedures using the control panel keys.
The firmware switches have been set at the factory in conformity to the communications standards
and codes of each country. Do not disturb them unless necessary. Some firmware switches may not
be applicable in some versions. The firmware switch data list indicates "Not used." for those
inapplicable switches.
Firmware Switches (WSW01 through WSW59)
WSW No.
WSW01
WSW02
WSW03
WSW04
WSW05
WSW06
WSW07
WSW08
WSW09
WSW10
WSW11
WSW12
WSW13
WSW14
WSW15
WSW16
WSW17
WSW18
WSW19
WSW20
WSW21
WSW22
WSW23
WSW24
WSW25
WSW26
WSW27
WSW28
WSW29
WSW30
WSW31
WSW32
WSW33
WSW34

Function
Dial pulse setting
Tone signal setting
PBX mode setting
TRANSFER facility setting
1st dial tone and busy tone detection
Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection
Dial tone setting 1
Dial tone setting 2
Protocol definition 1
Protocol definition 2
Busy tone setting
Signal detection condition setting
Modem setting
AUTO ANS facility setting
REDIAL facility setting
Function setting 1
Function setting 2
Function setting 3
Transmission speed setting
Overseas communications mode setting
TAD setting 1
ECM and call waiting caller ID
Communications setting
TAD setting 2
TAD setting 3
Function setting 4
Function setting 5
Function setting 6
Function setting 7
Function setting 8
Function setting 9
Function setting 10
Function setting 11
Function setting 12

9-10

Confidential

Firmware Switches (WSW01 through WSW59) Continued
WSW35
WSW36
WSW37
WSW38
WSW39
WSW40
WSW41
WSW42
WSW43
WSW44
WSW45
WSW46
WSW47
WSW48
WSW49
WSW50
WSW51
WSW52
WSW53
WSW54
WSW55
WSW56
WSW57
WSW58
WSW59

Function setting 13
Function setting 14
Function setting 15
V.34 transmission settings
V.34 transmission speed
V.34 modem settings
ON-duration of the scanning light source
Internet mail settings
Function setting 21
Speeding up scanning-1
Speeding up scanning-2
Monitor of power ON/OFF state and parallel port kept at high
Switching between high- and full-speed USB
USB setup latency
End-of-copying beep and black ink print mode
SDAA settings
Function setting 16
Function setting 17
Function setting 18
Function setting 19
Function setting 20
Function setting 21
Function setting 22
Function setting 23
Function setting 24

9-11

(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)

(Not used.)
(Not used.)

Confidential

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 1 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays the "WSW00" on the LCD and becomes ready to accept a firmware
switch number.
(2) Enter the desired number from the firmware switch numbers (01 through 59).
The following appears on the LCD:
Selector 1
↓

Selector 8
↓

WSWXX = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the selector position to be modified.
(4) Enter the desired number using the 0 and 1 keys.
(5) Press the OK key. This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the EEPROM
and readies the machine for accepting a firmware switch number.
(6) Repeat steps (2) through (5) until the modification for the desired firmware switches is
completed.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTES: • To cancel this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode during the above procedure, press the Stop/Exit key.
• If there is a pause of more than one minute after a single-digit number is entered for
double-digit firmware switch numbers, the machine will automatically return to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.

Details of Firmware Switches

The details of the firmware switches are described in Appendix 4 in which the user-accessible
selectors of the firmware switches are shaded.

9-12

Confidential

[ B ] Printout of firmware switch data
Function

The machine prints out the setting items of the firmware switches and their contents specified.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 1 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "PRINTING" appears on the LCD.
(2) The machine prints out the configuration list as shown on the next page.
(3) Upon completion of printing, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-13

Confidential

Configuration List

9-14

Confidential

9.1.4.6

Operational Check of LCD (Function code 12)

Function

This function allows you to check whether the LCD on the control panel works normally.
Operating Procedure

Checking the display state of the LCD:
(1) Press the 1 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(2) Models with color LCD
Press the key.
The LCD shows the screen given below.
Each time you press the key, the LCD cycles through the displays as shown below.
Models with monochrome LCD
Press the Black Start key.
The LCD shows the screen given below.
Each time you press the Black Start key, the LCD cycles through the displays as shown
below.
(3) Press the Stop/Exit key in any process of the above display cycle. The machine returns to
the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
For models with wide color LCD

For models with 2.0-inch color LCD

For models with monochrome LCD

Black Start key
key

key
Black Start key
(blue)

key

Black Start key

key
(green)

key

key
(red)

key

key
(gray)

key

key
(black)

key

key
(white)

key

9-15

Confidential

9.1.4.7

Operational Check of Control Panel PCB (Function code 13)

Function

This function allows you to check the control panel PCB for normal operation.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 1 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "00 " will appear on the LCD.
(2) Press the keys in the order designated in the illustration shown below.
The LCD shows the corresponding number in decimal notation each time a key is pressed.
Check that the displayed number is correct by referring to the illustration below.
If a key is pressed out of order, the machine beeps and displays the "INVALID OPERATE" on
the LCD. To return to the status ready to accept key entry for operational check, press the
Stop/Exit key.
(3) After the last number key is pressed, the machine beeps and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode
To terminate this operation, press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the initial stage of
the maintenance mode.

For models with wide color LCD

2
3
4

19
24

For models with 2.0-inch color LCD

21
24

23
29
25

30
27

Key Entry Order (1)

9-16

Confidential

For models with monochrome LCD

26
24

30
25
31

27
32

23
16

Key Entry Order (2)

9-17

Confidential

9.1.4.8

Sensor Operational Check (Function code 32)

Function

This function allows you to check the following:
- Document front sensor
For models with ADF
- Document rear sensor
- Scanner/ink cartridge cover sensor
- Registration sensor
- Purge cam switch
- Black ink cartridge sensor
- Yellow ink cartridge sensor
- Cyan ink cartridge sensor
- Magenta ink cartridge sensor
- Head thermistor (in the head driver chip)
- Casing internal temperature thermistor (in the complex IC)
- Hook switch (for models with handset)
Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 3 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine sounds 1100 Hz and 400 Hz tones cyclically through the following volumes for
testing the speaker:

NOTE: To stop beeping, press the Menu or OK key.
If the sensing statuses are as listed below, the LCD will show "DFDRCVRSCCP1****" and
"IKIYICIMVTHKLKTH," which can be switched by pressing the Black Start (Mono Start)
key.
Given below is the relationship between the LCD indication, sensor name and sensor status.
LCD
DF
DR
CV
RS
CC
P1
IK
IY
IC
IM
VT
HK
LK
TH

Sensors

Sensing status

Document front sensor*1
Document rear sensor*1
Scanner cover sensor*2
Registration sensor
Ink cartridge cover sensor*2
Purge cam switch
Black ink cartridge sensor
Yellow ink cartridge sensor
Cyan ink cartridge sensor
Magenta ink cartridge sensor
Head thermistor
Hook switch*3
High yield ink cartridge sensor*4
Casing internal temperature thermistor
9-18

No document detected.
No document detected.
Scanner cover and ink cartridge cover closed.
No recording paper detected.
Scanner cover and ink cartridge cover closed.
Purge cam switch ON.
Black ink cartridge loaded (Black ink present).
Yellow ink cartridge loaded (Yellow ink present).
Cyan ink cartridge loaded (Cyan ink present).
Magenta ink cartridge loaded (Magenta ink present).
Driver chip temperature within the allowable range.
On-hook state.
High yield ink cartridge not loaded.
Normal temperature detected.
Confidential

*1 For models with ADF
*2 Sensor sharing: Two sensor actuators share a single photosensor (scanner/ink cartridge cover
sensor) so that the sensor acts as a scanner cover sensor and ink cartridge cover sensor. If either the
scanner cover or ink cartridge cover is open, both "CV" and "CC" disappear.
3
* The "HK" is always displayed even on models not equipped with a handset.
*4 The "LK" is always displayed even on models not equipped with a high yield ink cartridge sensor.

(2) Change the detecting conditions (e.g., open the scanner cover or insert paper through the
registration sensor or remove the ink cartridges), and then check that the indication on the LCD
changes according to the sensor states.
(3) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press
the Stop/Exit key.

9-19

Confidential

9.1.4.9

Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log (Function code 53)

Function

This function transfers received FAX data to another machine. It is useful when the machine cannot
print received data due to the printing mechanism defective.
NOTE: The number of files that can be transferred at a time is 99. To transfer 100 files or more,
carry out the following procedure more than one time.
TIP: If there are both color and monochrome data in a file to be transferred, the monochrome data
will be transferred first. If the receiver machine does not support the color function, the sender
machine cannot transfer color data, resulting in an error.
Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 5 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "FAX TRANSFER" appears on the LCD.
(2) To check the number of received files, press the 1 key.
The "1.NO. OF JOBS" appears on the LCD.
Press the OK key, and the number of received files appears, just as "NO. OF. JOBS: 10."
Pressing the Stop/Exit key returns the machine to the "FAX TRANSFER" state.
(3) Select data to transfer as follows.
To transfer the activity report only, press the 2 key.
The "2.ACTIVITY" appears.
To transfer received files (together with the activity report), press the 3 key.
The "3.DOCUMENTS" appears. Note that if there is no received file, the "NO DOCUMENTS"
appears.
To transfer the communication list for the latest communication, press the 4 key.
The "4.COM.LIST (NEW)" appears.
To transfer the communication list for the last three errors, press the 5 key.
The "5.COM.LIST (ERR3)" appears.
(4) With the "2.ACTIVITY," "3.DOCUMENTS," "4.COM.LIST (NEW)," or "5.COM.LIST
(ERR3)" being displayed in step (3), press the OK key.
The "ENTER NO. &SET" appears.
(5) Enter the telephone number of the receiver machine and press the OK key again.
NOTE: Be sure to type the telephone number with the numerical keys. No speed dialing is
allowed in this procedure.
The machine displays the "ACCEPTED" for approx. two seconds and starts dialing to transfer
data.
No station ID will be attached. A cover page and end page as shown on the next page will be
automatically attached, instead.
9-20

Confidential

Cover page sample

End page sample

9-21

Confidential

9.1.4.10 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Start/End Position (Function code 54)
Function

This function allows you to adjust the scanning start/end position.
For models without an ADF, selecting "1.ADF" in steps (2) and (3) below produces nothing. Select
"2.FB" to adjust the start/end position of flat-bed scanning.
Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 5 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SCAN START ADJ." appears on the LCD.
(2) Wait for the LCD to display the "1.ADF 2.FB."
(3) Press the 1 or 2 key, and the current scanning position correction value appears.
You can adjust the correction value to 11 levels from +5 to -5 (mm).
(4) To increase the correction value, press the right arrow key; to decrease it, press the left arrow
key.
If you press the Stop/Exit key, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode
without making change of the correction value.
(5) Press the OK key.
The "ACCEPTED" appears on the LCD. After one second, the LCD returns to the "1.ADF
2.FB" screen.
(6) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

NOTE: The relationship between the
scanning start/end positions and their
correction values is shown below.

5 and 4 keys

Stop/Exit key
1 or 2 key
OK key
Left arrow key

Stop/Exit key
Right arrow key

Stop/Exit
key

OK key

1 second later

Right arrow key
Left arrow key

9-22

Confidential

9.1.4.11 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting (Function code 55)
Function

This function allows the machine to obtain white level data for the CIS scanner and save it together
with the CIS scanner area into the EEPROM on the main PCB.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 5 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SCANNER AREA SET" appears on the LCD.
The machine automatically obtains white level data.
(2) If this operation completes normally, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
If any error is detected, the "SCANNER ERROR" appears on the LCD. To return the machine
to the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key.

9-23

Confidential

9.1.4.12 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value (Function code 58)
Function

To keep the paper feeding performance in the best condition for quality print, the controller
optimizes the rotation of the paper feed roller, using the correction value stored in the EEPROM on
the main PCB.
If you replace the engine unit or head/carriage unit, you need to update the paper feeding correction
value according to the procedure given here.

Operating Procedure

(1) Switch on your PC.
(2) Place the machine in the maintenance mode (see Section 9.1.1) and set letter-size paper to print
check patterns.
(3) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
(4) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(5) Drag and drop the "pfadj.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the Filedrgs window
shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out "PF adjust check"
pattern (see page 9-26 for a sample printout).
(6) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.

9-24

Confidential

(7) To select the paper feed roller adjustment, press the 1 key.
The "PF ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(8) Out of the three rows of the "PF adjust check" pattern (on the next page), check the middle row
and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.
If the least unevenness seems to be far to the left of -8, regard it as -8; if it seems to be far to the
right of +8, regard it as +8. In this case, you need to check whether the paper feed roller and
head/carriage unit are set into place.
(9) Enter the number of the least uneven block found in step (8).
For example, if the number of the least uneven block is +4, press the 4 key when the "PF ADJ
NO. +0" is displayed on the LCD.
If the number is -4, press the

key to display the "PF ADJ NO. -0" and press the 4 key.

Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(10) On your PC, drag and drop the "exitadj.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the
Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out three sheets of
"EXIT adjust check" pattern (on page 9-27 for a sample printout).
(11) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(12) To select the paper ejection roller adjustment, press the 2 key.
The "EXIT ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(13) Out of the three sheets of the "EXIT adjust check" pattern (on page 9-27), check the middle
sheet and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.
(14) Enter the number of the least uneven block found in step (13) in the same way as in step (9).
Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-25

Confidential

Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Feed Roller
9-26

Confidential

Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Ejection Roller
9-27

Confidential

9.1.4.13 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type (Function code 59)
Function

This procedure allows you to check the movement of the CIS unit integrated in the scanner cover
(scanner unit). The CIS unit travels to the three positions--the white reference film position, scanning
start and end positions.
It also allows you to enter the CIS type (Canon, Rohm, or Lite-On) into the EEPROM on the main
PCB. If you replace the scanner cover or the main PCB, you need to specify the CIS type according
to the procedure given below.
Operating Procedure
-- Check the movement of the CIS unit --

(1) Press the 5 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "1:MO 2:CO 3:CHG?" appears on the LCD.
(2) To call up the CIS travel menu, press the 1 key.
(The "3:CHG" is for specifying the CIS type, as described on the next page. The "2:CO" is for
checking scanning clocks at the factory, so do not access it.)
The "LED PWM: " appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the OK key.
The "1:WHT 2:FRT 3:MV" appears.
(4) Press the 3, 1, or 2 key, then press the OK key.
The CIS unit moves to the scanning end position, white reference film position, or scanning start
position, respectively.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key, and the CIS unit returns to the home position.
The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-28

Confidential

-- Specify the CIS type --

(1) Open the scanner cover and check the CIS bar code label on the scanner cover.

Bar code label

G: Rohm
B: Canon
H: Lite-On

(CIS_LABEL_MFC_e)

(2) Press the 5 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "1:MO 2:CO 3: 3:CHG?" appears on the LCD.
(3) To call up the CIS type menu, press the 3 key.
(The "1:MO" is for checking the CIS travel, as described on the previous page. The "2:CO" is
for checking scanning clocks at the factory, so do not access it.)
The ""CIS G:1 B:0 H:2"" appears on the LCD.
(4) If the CIS type is "B" (Canon), press the 0 key; if "G" (Rohm), press the 1 key; if "H" (Lite-On),
press the 2 key.
Upon completion of the entry, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-29

Confidential

9.1.4.14 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Initial Setup Mode (Function code 63)
Function

This procedure moves the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel (Function code 63 + *).
It can also enable or disable the initial setup mode when the power is applied at the next time
(Function code 63 + 1 or Function code 63 +3).

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 6 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "MAINTENANCE 63" appears on the LCD.
(2) To make the head/carriage unit travel to the center of its travel, press the * key.
After completion of head replacement or adjustment jobs, press the Stop/Exit key. The
head/carriage unit returns to the home position where the head/carriage unit will be locked.
(3) To enable or disable the initial setup mode when the power is applied at the next time, press the
1 or 3 key, respectively.
If you enable the initial setup mode, wait until the "INIT" appears on the LCD and the
head/carriage unit becomes locked. When the "HEAD LOCKED" appears, turn the power off.
NOTE: Enabling the initial setup mode resets all counts which can be displayed with Function
code 80 (described in Section 9.1.4.22 "Display of the Equipment's Log").
If you disable the initial setup mode, the machine displays the "NOT INIT" on the LCD and
returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-30

Confidential

9.1.4.15 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome (Function code 65)
Function

This function allows you to align vertical lines printed in the forward and backward direction of the
head/carriage unit.
If the head/carriage unit or main PCB is replaced with a new one, you need to make the adjustment
given in this section.
NOTE: If the head/carriage unit is replaced, you need to make other adjustments in addition. Refer
to Chapter 7, Section 7.2.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 6 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode. Then press the
1 key.
The machine displays the "MAINTENANCE 65" on the LCD and prints two sets of vertical
alignment check patterns (shown on the next page) in monochrome for 600 dpi and 1200 dpi,
each of which consists of #0 through #8 blocks. If the vertical alignment is ON, #5 block shows
vertically aligned lines.
The "600DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(2) For 600 dpi, check the printed vertical alignment check patterns and find which number block
shows full alignment.
If the full alignment block is other than #5, enter that block number by using the numerical keys.
The "1200DPI NO.(1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(3) For 1200 dpi, perform the same operation as in step (2).
The machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If #1 or #8 block is fully aligned so that you press the 1 or 8 key in the above procedure,
then go back to step (1) to confirm that #5 block becomes aligned.

9-31

Confidential

600DPI

1200DPI

Vertical Alignment Check Patterns

9-32

Confidential

9.1.4.16 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing (Function code 66)
Function

This function allows you to adjust the left and right margins for borderless printing. You print out a
margin check pattern, measure the left and right margins, and enter the correction values.

Operating Procedure

(1) Switch on your PC.
(2) Place the machine in the maintenance mode (see Section 9.1.1) and set letter-size paper to print
a margin check pattern.
(3) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
(4) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(5) Drag and drop the "media.prn" onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in the Filedrgs window
shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "MEDIA
CHECK" pattern (see page 9-35 for a sample printout).
(6) Measure the left and right margins on the printout.
(Example) Left: 1.3 mm, Right: 1.4 mm
If both margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, no adjustment is required.

9-33

Confidential

(7) If either margin is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice on the machine.
The "MEDIA SENSOR ADJ" appears. (Note: The Media Sensor refers to the paper width
sensor.)
(8) To make the machine ready for data entry, press the * key.
The "LEFT: 10" appears on the LCD.
(9) To adjust the left margin, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
In this example, the left margin measured in step (6) is 1.3 mm, so press the 1, 3, and OK keys.
(10) The "RIGHT: 10" appears on the LCD.
To adjust the right margin, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (6) is 1.4 mm, so press the 1, 4, and OK keys.
(11) Upon completion of the entry, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
Go back to step (5) and print out the margin check pattern again.
(12) Measure the left and right margins on the printout.
If both margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, the adjustment is completed.

9-34

Confidential

Margin Check Pattern

9-35

Confidential

9.1.4.17 Updating of Property Data (Function code 68)
Function

To keep the print quality, the controller optimizes the drive conditions of individual head/carriage
units according to the property data. For instance, the controller optimizes the head drive strength,
ink jet-out timing and other drive conditions according to the electromechanical properties unique to
individual head/carriage units and ambient temperature.
The property data is stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB and its property code is printed on the
property labels attached to the machine and the head/carriage unit.
If you replace the head/carriage unit with a new spare part, you need to enter its property code
printed on the property label (that comes with the new spare part) and replace the old property label
on the machine (see Appendix 1 for the label location) with the new one. If the old part may be used
in future, store the old property label also with the old part.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 6 and 8 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(2) Press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in this order.
The current property data stored in the EEPROM appears on the LCD and the machine is ready
for entry.
(3) Check the property label that comes with a new head/carriage unit and then enter the property
code.
The code to be entered is 12 digits excluding the heading alphabets.
Head property code

To enter letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while holding down the # key,
respectively.
(4) Press the OK key.
The machine beeps, shows the "INPUT ACCEPTED" on the LCD, and writes the entered
property code into the EEPROM. Then it returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If the entered data contains any checksum error, the machine beeps, shows the "INPUT
ERROR" and returns to the ready-to-enter state. Go back to step (3).

9-36

Confidential

9.1.4.18 Head/Carriage Unit Traveling Speed Check (Function code 69)
Function

This function checks whether or not the traveling speed of the head/carriage unit is within the
specified range.
This procedure should be performed when you replace the head/carriage unit or carriage motor, or
when you loosen the CR timing belt.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 6 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine starts aging the head/carriage unit, showing the "CR AGING" on the LCD.
In each of travel speeds 43.3 and 21.7 inches/sec, the machine checks whether the maximum and
minimum speeds are within the specified range.
- If both are within the range, the "43O 21O" appears on the LCD.
- If either one is out of the range, the machine shows some message, e.g., "43O 21X" on the
LCD. This sample message indicates that the speed variation is within the allowable range
when the head/carriage unit travels at 43.3 inches/sec.; however, it is out of the range at 21.7
inches/sec.
(2) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-37

Confidential

9.1.4.19 EEPROM Customizing (Function code 74)

The "EEPROM Customizing Codes List" is given on the next page.

Function

This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language, function settings, and
firmware switch settings.
NOTE: If you replace the main PCB, be sure to carry out this procedure.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The current customizing code appears on the LCD.
(2) Enter the desired customizing code.
To enter letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while holding down the # key,
respectively.
The newly entered code appears.
NOTE: If a wrong 4-digit code is entered, the machine will malfunction.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The machine saves the setting and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
If you press the Stop/Exit key or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above procedure, the
machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-38

Confidential

EEPROM Customizing Codes List

Destination

US
Mexico

Canada

Germany

France

Italy

Spain

Portugal

Country Code

MFC235C

---

0104

0103

0105

0116

0115

0118

MFC260C

---

0204

0203

0205

0216

0215

0218

MFC265C

0301

0302

---

MFC465CN

0001

0002

0004

0003

0005

0016

0015

0018

MFC680CN

---

0004

0003

0005

0016

0015

0018

MFC685CW

0101

0102

---

MFC885CW

0201

0202

0204

0203

0205

0216

0215

0218

Destination

Country Code

Switzerland Netherlands

Belgium

Norway
Sweden
Finland
Denmark

Austria

Czech
Hungary
Poland
Rumania
Bulgaria
Turkey

Russia

MFC235C

0110

0109

0108

0157

0103

0154

0148

MFC260C

0210

0209

0208

0257

0203

0254

0248

MFC265C

---

MFC465CN

0010

0009

0008

0057

0003

0054

---

MFC680CN

0010

0009

0008

---

0003

---

MFC685CW

---

MFC885CW

0210

0209

0208

0257

---

0248

9-39

Confidential

S. Africa

Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia,
Philippines, Hong Kong,
Indonesia, Vietnam, UAE,
Iran, India, Jordan, Egypt,
Lebanon, Syria, Pakistan, Kenya

Australia
New Zealand

China

MFC235C

0124

0140

0156

---

MFC260C

---

0240

0256

---

MFC265C

---

0120

MFC465CN

---

0040

0056

0020

MFC680CN

---

MFC685CW

---

0140

0156

0120

MFC885CW

0224

0240

0256

---

Destination

Country Code

The above information is as of April 30, 2007. The up-to-date information is available from your local
Brother Customer Service.

9-40

Confidential

9.1.4.20 Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and dust accumulated on the
maintenance unit) (Function code 75)
Function

This function is used to remove paper particles and dust accumulated between the maintenance unit
and head/carriage unit. Using this function moves the head/carriage unit to the flushing position,
allowing you to easily remove the paper particles and dust accumulated.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The head/carriage unit moves to the flushing position and the "PLS OPEN COVER" appears on
the LCD.
(2) Open the scanner cover.
The "PLS CLOSE COVER" appears on the LCD. Remove the paper particles and dust
accumulated.
(3) Close the scanner cover.
The head/carriage unit moves back to the home position.
The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-41

Confidential

9.1.4.21 Purging Operation (Function code 76)
Function

The machine can carry out several types of purging operations--normal purge, periodical reset purge,
power purge, initial purge, user reset purge, and engine setup purge. This function allows you to
select the desired purge type and carry it out.
TIP: The purge types and their details are described on the next page.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 and 6 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays the "CLEANING ALL" on the LCD and enters the purge mode.
(2) Press the

key to display the target color for purge.

Each time the
or
key is pressed, the "CLEANING ALL," "CLEANING BLACK,"
"CLEANING MAGENTA," "CLEANING CYAN," or "CLEANING YELLOW" appears
cyclically.
"CLEANING ALL":
Purge for all four color inks
"CLEANING BLACK": Purge for black ink
"CLEANING MAGENTA" / "CLEANING CYAN" / "CLEANING YELLOW": Any color
choice performs purge for all three color inks.
(3) Enter the purge code according to the table on the next page.
(4) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
Upon completion of purging, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

9-42

Confidential

Purge types, ink usage, purge counts, and purge codes

Purge Types
Normal purge

Periodical reset
purge

Power purge

Initial purge

Description

Ink Usage

This purge operation removes
dried ink sticking to the head
nozzles.

Purge Codes
Purge Counts (In the
maintenance mode,
(See Note.)
Function code 76)

Black:
0.21 mL Black:
Per color: 0.13 mL Total of
colors:

This purge operation removes Black:
0.44 mL Black:
any bubbles that have
Per color: 0.32 mL Total of
accumulated in the ink supply
colors:
tubes.
More powerful than a
Black:
0.59 mL Black:
periodical reset purge, this
Per color: 0.38 mL Total of
purge operation is for
colors:
removing stubborn clogging
from the head nozzles and ink
supply tubes.
When the user loads ink
Black:
2.92 mL Black:
cartridges for the first time,
Per color: 2.59 mL Total of
this purge operation
colors:
automatically runs to refill the
ink supply tubes and print
head with fresh ink.

11
21
24

163

Engine setup
purge

Black:

163

(Note)

432

Per color: 2.59 mL Total of
colors:

Black:
0.50 mL Black:
Per color: 0.32 mL Total of
colors:

2.92 mL Black:

User reset purge This purge operation should
be performed if the print
quality problem persists after
a user has performed the
purge operation repeatedly by
pressing the Ink (Ink
Management) key.
This purge operation refills
the ink supply tubes with ink
when there is no ink in those
tubes.

432

This machine counts all purge operations and flushing operations performed since produced in
order to prevent the ink absorber box and flushing box from overflowing with drained and flushed
ink, respectively. An initial purge, for example, advances the counter by 163 + 432 = 595. When
the purge or flushing counter approaches 9600 or 475852272, respectively, the "MACHINE
ERROR 46" appears, and further purge or flushing operations are prohibited. Replace the ink
absorber box and flushing box, and then reset their counters with the following procedure.

9-43

Confidential

Resetting purge or flushing counter
1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the
make the machine enter the maintenance mode.

key four times to

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
" on
the LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
2) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode to call up
the machine's log information. (Function code 80. Refer to Section 9.1.4.22.)
3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge or flushing count
appears on the LCD.
4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge or flushing count.
5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
6) Press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.

9-44

Confidential

9.1.4.22 Display of the Equipment's Log (Function code 80)
Function

The machine can display its log information on the LCD.
This procedure allows you to reset the purge count. It is necessary to reset the purge count when the
ink absorber box is replaced with a new one without replacing the main PCB.
Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The calendar clock appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key. Pressing the key more than ten times calls up the
following log information items on the LCD, one by one. (The following list does not include all
items.)
- Head property code
- PictBridge information
- Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from each of the ink
cartridges*1
- Ink drop count after near-empty, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from
each of the ink cartridges*1 after the ink cartridge sensor detects near-empty.
- Total ink drop count, indicating how many droplets the machine has jetted out from each of
the ink cartridges*1 since produced
- Ink cartridge change count, indicating how many times ink cartridge replacement has been
made for each color*1
- Jam count, indicating how many times a paper jam has occurred
- Total page count, indicating how many pages have been printed since the machine was
produced
- PC print page count, indicating how many pages the machine has printed as an output device
of the connected PC
- Color copy page count, indicating how many copies in color have been made
- Black copy page count, indicating how many copies in monochrome have been made
- Memory card print page count, indicating how many pages have been printed from memory
card data (On models without PhotoCapture Center, this counter is always fixed to "0.")
- FAX page count, indicating how many received FAX pages have been printed
- Purge count, indicating how many times the purge operation has been carried out
(With the purge count displayed, pressing the 2, 7, 8 and 3 keys in this order resets the purge
count.)
- Purging record for each purge type
- Wiper count, indicating how many times the wiper operation has been carried out
- Flushing count, indicating how many times the flushing operation has been carried out
(With the flushing count displayed, pressing the 2, 7, 8 and 3 keys in this order resets the
flushing count.)

9-45

Confidential

- Total power-ON time
- Error code of the most recent machine error*2
- ADF paper jam count, indicating how many times a paper jam has occurred*3
- ADF page count, indicating how many pages the ADF has fed*3
- Flat-bed page count, indicating how many documents have been scanned
- Error code of the most recent communications error*4
- Base ID code (which appears only on models with a cordless handset)
- Cordless handset ID code(s) (which appears only on models with a cordless handset)*5
- PIN code of base unit (which appears only on European models with a cordless handset.)
After all of the log information items above are displayed, pressing the Black Start (Mono
Start) key returns the screen to the calendar clock in step (1) above.
(3) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press
the Stop/Exit key.

*1 To check each of the four ink cartridges, press the OK key. Pressing the key cycles through black,
yellow, cyan, and magenta.
*2 When a machine error code is displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through recent nine errors that
have occurred.
*3 For models with ADF
*4 When a communications error code is displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through the latest error,
2nd latest error, and 3rd latest error.
*5 Up to four cordless handsets can be registered to the base unit (cordless PCB). For the ones not
registered, "FFFFFFFF" is displayed each.

9-46

Confidential

9.1.4.23 Equipment Error Code Indication (Function code 82)
Function

This function displays an error code of the last error on the LCD.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 8 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The LCD shows the "MACHINE ERROR X X."
(2) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press
the Stop/Exit key.

9.1.4.24 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line (Function code 87)
Function

This function outputs the transmission log (that the machine has stored about the latest transmission)
to the telephone line. It allows the service personnel to receive the transmission log of the user's
machine at a remote location and use it for analyzing problems arising in the user's machine.
Operating Procedure

(1) If the user's machine has a transmission-related problem, call the user's machine at a remote
location from your machine.
(2) If the line is connected, have the user perform the following:
1) Press the Menu, Redial/Pause, and 0 keys in this order.
2) Press the 8 and 7 keys in this order.
The above operation makes the user's machine send CNG to your machine for sending the
transmission log.
(3) If you hear the CNG sent from the user's machine, press the Black Start (Mono Start) key of
your machine.
Your machine will start to receive the transmission log from the user's machine.

9-47

Confidential

9.1.4.25 Assurance Mode Switch Setting (Function code 88)
Function

The machine incorporates four assurance mode switches (AMS01 through AMS04) that are
firmware switches just like the ones described in Section 9.1.4.5.
When the machine does not function normally because the usage environments or operating
conditions are not usual, the assurance mode switches provide workarounds to make the machine
usable by changing the machine settings to untypical ones.
The user is allowed to access the assurance mode switches under the guidance of service personnel
(e.g., by telephone).
The details about AMS01 through AMS04 are described on the following pages.

Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 8 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays "AMS00" on the LCD and becomes ready to accept an assurance mode
switch number.
(2) Enter the desired number from the assurance mode switch numbers (01 through 04).
The following appears on the LCD:
Selector 1
↓

Selector 8
↓

AMSXX = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) Move the cursor to the selector position to be modified, using the right and left arrow keys.
(4) Enter the desired number using the 0 and 1 keys.
(5) Press the OK key. This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the EEPROM
and readies the machine for accepting an assurance mode switch number.
(6) Repeat steps (2) through (5) until the modification for the desired assurance mode switches is
completed.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTES: • To cancel this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode during the above procedure, press the Stop/Exit key.
• If there is a pause of more than one minute after a single-digit number is entered for
double-digit assurance mode switch numbers, the machine will automatically return to
the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
• Initializing the EEPROM with Function code 01 or 91 initializes the AMS switch
settings.

9-48

Confidential

AMS01 (Printing assurance 1)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Prevention of stains on back side of
leading edge of paper in borderless
printing

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

Reduction of banding in borderless
printing
(Limit of the number of head nozzles
to be used)

0: Disable
(No limit)

1: Enable
(Limit)

3
4

Protection of platen from no-paper
printing to prevent stains
(Functional restriction on the paper
width sensor)

No. 3 4
0 0 : Enable (Determine the sensor
function depending upon the print
resolution selected) (default)
0 1 : Enable (Detect the leading edge
plus right and left edges of paper)
1 0 : Enable (Detect the leading edge
of paper)
1 1 : Disable (No paper detection)

Assurance print 1
(Printing with black and cyan inks in
monochrome copy)

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

Assurance print 2
(Printing with black and cyan inks in
monochrome FAX reception and in
list output)

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

7
8

Workaround for false jam detection
(Functional restriction on the paper
width sensor)

No. 7 8
0 0 : Detect both the leading edge and
width of paper (default)
0 1 : Detect both the leading edge and
width of paper
1 0 : Detect only the leading edge of
paper
1 1 : No detection

Selector 1: Prevention of stains on back side of leading edge of paper in borderless printing

Setting this selector to "1" reduces the protruding amount of the leading edge of recording paper to
the platen groove to minimize stains that could be caused by ink mist on the back side of the leading
edge. Enabling this function reduces the throughput than disabling it.
Selector 2: Reduction of banding in borderless printing (Limit of the number of head nozzles to be
used)

Setting this selector to "1" limits the number of head nozzles to be used in borderless printing to
reduce banding.
The default setting of this selector is "0" for models with movable platen, and "1" for models without
movable platen.
9-49

Confidential

Selectors 3 and 4: Protection of platen from no-paper printing to prevent stains (Functional
restriction on the paper width sensor)

The setting made by these selectors applies to such printing that is assumed to be at a high resolution,
that is, printing from a PC or memory card*, copying, and printing from PictBridge/USB flash
memory drive.
* For models with PhotoCapture Center
If these selectors are set to "0, 0," the machine automatically determines the functions of the paper
width sensor depending upon the print resolution selected. Therefore, in low resolution printing, e.g.
when the "Fast" print quality is selected, the paper width sensor is automatically disabled. On the
contrary, in high resolution printing, e.g. when the "Highest" print quality is selected, the sensor is
automatically enabled.
Setting these selectors to "1, 1" disables the paper width sensor to save the sensing time for higher
throughput.
Selectors 5 and 6: Assurance print 1 and 2

Enabling assurance print 1 or 2 causes the machine to mix black ink (pigment-based) and a little of
cyan ink (dye-based) to use in monochrome copy or in monochrome FAX reception and list output,
respectively.
If black ink is not jetted out normally, cyan ink can be substituted for black ink in printing. This
ensures that in list printing (in which data once printed will be deleted) the data will be preserved as
a printout.
Selectors 7 and 8: Workaround for false jam detection (Functional restriction on the paper width
sensor)

The setting made by these selectors applies to the list and index printing and test printing.
When logo printed recording paper is used, for example, the paper width sensor might misdetect the
paper present state as "no paper loaded" due to the logo's color. Limiting the paper width sensor
functions with these selectors avoids detecting such a false paper jam.

9-50

Confidential

AMS02 (Printing assurance 2)

Selector
No.

Function

Head-platen gap offset For glossy paper
(Prevention of stains
For recording paper
on recording paper)
except glossy paper

3
|
5

Setting and Specifications

Paper feed amount compensation
(for preventing banding at the leading edge
of recording paper fed from the photo tray)

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

No. 3 4 5
0 0 0 : Enable for 4 x 6
postcards (default)
1 0 0 : Enable for Photo L-size
paper in Japan
Others : Disable

Registration time offset to slipping in plain
paper feeding

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

Unidirectional print for higher print quality

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

Improvement of paper feeding reliability

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

Selectors 1 and 2: Head-platen gap offset (Prevention of stains on recording paper)

If using curled or thick recording paper results in a stained print face of the paper, increase the gap
between the head nozzles and the platen with these selectors to reduce the production of stains.
Enabling the head-platen gap offset increases the gap to 1.6 or 2.3 mm if it was 1.3 or 1.6 mm,
respectively. (The details are given in the table below.)
In borderless printing, even if enabled by these selectors, the head-platen gap offset becomes disabled
except when the Brother premium glossy photo paper is used with the "Photo" or "Highest" print
quality selected.
Recording
paper

Print quality
selected

Brother
"Highest"
premium glossy "Photo"
photo paper
"Fine"
Other glossy
"Highest"
paper
"Photo"
"Fine"
Inkjet paper
"Photo"
"Fine"
Plain paper
"Fine"
(except the
"Normal"
above)
"Fast Normal"
"Fast"

OFF

1.3 mm
1.3 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm

Head-platen gap offset (specified by selector 1 or 2)
ON for glossy paper
ON for recording paper
except glossy paper
Using A4,
In printing
Using A4,
In printing
letter, or legal with borderless letter, or
with borderless
paper in
printing OFF, legal paper printing OFF,
borderless
or using paper in
or using paper
printing
except A4,
borderless
except A4,
letter, and
printing
letter, and legal
legal paper
paper
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
----(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
----(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm
(1.6 mm)
2.3 mm

In the above table, values in parentheses are not changed since the offset is automatically disabled.

9-51

Confidential

Selectors 3 to 5:

Paper feed amount compensation (for preventing banding at the leading edge of
recording paper fed from the photo tray)

This compensation function is usually enabled for preventing banding (horizontal streaks) from
occurring at the leading edge of recording paper fed from the photo tray.
When postcards or small size paper are fed from the standard paper tray, however, this
compensation function can be counterproductive. If so, disable the function, and the print quality
may be improved.
Selector 6:

Registration time offset to slipping in plain paper feeding

Enabling the registration time offset with this selector increases the registration time (during which
the paper feed roller rotates in the reverse direction), avoiding the occurrence of a paper feeding
timeout error even if the paper cannot reach the registration sensor actuator within the predetermined
registration time due to slipping of the paper pull-in rollers against paper in the paper tray.
Selecting the "Fast" print quality disables the registration time offset even if it is enabled with this
selector.
NOTE: Selecting the "Glossy paper" automatically enables the registration time offset.
Selector 7:

Unidirectional print for higher print quality

The machine prints bidirectionally by default. To get higher print quality, set this selector to "1" to
switch to the unidirectional print mode in which printing is performed only when the head/carriage
unit travels from left to right. Note that the unidirectional print mode sacrifices the print speed.
Print object
Print FAX message received
Copy
Print from PC
Print from memory cards*, PictBridge, or USB
flash memory drive
Print memory card index*, PictBridge index, or
USB flash memory drive index
Print a list
Print a test pattern

Unidirectional print
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No

* For models with PhotoCapture Center
Selector 8:

Improvement of paper feeding reliability

Setting this selector to "1" improves the paper feeding reliability, sacrificing the print speed.

9-52

Confidential

AMS03 (Maintenance assurance 1)

Selector
No.
1

Function

Setting and Specifications

Protection of head caps from drying

0: Disable (default)
No. 2 3
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

2
3

Auto capping start time

Purge more powerful than normal
purge

5
6

Not used.

:
:
:
:

1: Enable

30 seconds (default)
5 seconds
15 seconds
300 seconds

0: Disable (default)

1: Enable

Automatic purging interval
programmed for matching the
ambient temperature (for color ink)

0: Enable (default)

1: Disable

Automatic purging interval
programmed for matching the
ambient temperature (for black ink)

0: Enable (default)

1: Disable

Selector 1:

Protection of head caps from drying

If the protection function is enabled with this selector, the head/carriage unit automatically returns to
the home position (head capping position) for flushing each time the machine prints the specified
number of pages in order to protect the inside of the head caps from drying up. This function is
useful in a dry environment or for heavy duty print per printing cycle.
Selectors 2 and 3: Auto capping start time

If data transfer from the PC stops midway through printing for some reason in the PC, the
head/carriage unit automatically returns to the home position (head capping position) after the
specified auto capping start time (default: 30 seconds) to prevent the head surface from drying up.
At the restart of printing after the auto capping operation, print image unevenness could occur. To
avoid it, increase the auto capping start time with these selectors.
Selector 4:

Purge more powerful than normal purge

Setting this selector to "1" automatically selects a purge more powerful than the normal purge from
the first if the purge is initiated immediately after printing.
Selectors 7 and 8: Automatic purging interval programmed for matching the ambient temperature

The "automatic purging interval programmed for matching the ambient temperature" is enabled by
default. If the machine is set in an excessively hot or cold place, therefore, the automatic purging
interval becomes short, resulting in increased ink waste.
Disabling this interval enables the one programmed for the ordinary temperature. In the first printing
after a long no-print period, however, the print quality may lower.

9-53

Confidential

AMS04 (Maintenance assurance 2)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

Line monitor volume

0: Normal (default)

1: Extra-high

Not used.

Black ink print mode

0: Disable
(default)

1: Enable

Automatic purging for color ink

0: Enable (default)

1: Disable

Not used.

6
7
8

No. 6
0
0
1
1

Automatic purging interval

Automatic purging for black ink

Selector 3:

7
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

30 days (black and color)
20 days (black), 30 days (color)
30 days (black), no purge (color)
No purge (black and color)

0: Enable (default)

1: Disable

Black ink print mode

If any color ink runs out, printing is no longer possible by default. Setting this selector to "1" allows
the machine to function as a monochrome printer, making it possible to print with black ink only
even in an ink empty state as listed below.
Printing FAX message received
Printing from a PC
Copying
Printing from memory cards*
Printing from PictBridge or USB flash
memory drive
Printing lists
Purge operation

Monochrome printing only possible.
Monochrome printing only possible.
Monochrome printing only possible. The Black Start
(Mono Start) key is enabled, but the Color Start key is
disabled.
No printing possible.
No printing possible.
Monochrome printing only possible.
Purge operation possible for black ink only, not possible for
all-color or any specific color.
* For models with PhotoCapture Center

Tip: Difference between selector 3 on AMS04 and selector 8 on WSW49 (See page App. 4-53.)
Both selector 3 on AMS04 and selector 8 on WSW49 specify the similar black ink print mode that
applies if any color ink runs out. The difference is that the former allows the machine to print all
data received as a monochrome printer with black ink only; the latter to ignore the ink empty state,
receive both color and black data, and print it, resulting in a printout missing color components.
Selectors 4 and 8: Automatic purging for color ink and for black ink

The machine periodically performs an automatic purge by default. The automatic purge, however,
wastes ink when no printing has occurred. To avoid it, disable the automatic purge with these
selectors. In the first printing after a long no-print period, disabling it may lower the print quality.
Setting selector 4 or 8 to "1" disables the setting made by selectors 6 and 7.
Selectors 6 and 7: Automatic purging interval

These selectors allow you to select the automatic purging interval to reduce ink consumption.
Setting these selectors to "1, 1" (No purge) disables the setting made by selectors 4 and 8.
9-54

Confidential

9.1.4.26 Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to U.S.A. models)
Function

This procedure can cancel the Pin TX lock mode. Use this procedure if the user forgets his/her
password entered when setting the Pin TX lock mode so as not to exit from the mode.
NOTE: Carrying out this procedure will lose passwords previously entered but retain FAX
messages received in the Pin TX lock mode.

Operating Procedure

(1) When the PIN TX LOCK is displayed on the LCD, press the Menu and # keys at the same time.
Within two seconds, start to press the 2, 7, 9, 0, and 0 keys.
The Pin TX lock mode will be canceled and the machine returns to the calendar clock screen.

9-55

Confidential

9.2 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS FOR CORDLESS
HANDSETS
9.2.1 Overview

Section 9.2 applies to models with a cordless handset.
Cordless handsets have the built-in maintenance functions. Their menu and operating procedures
differ depending on the shipping destination of the machines. For U.S.A. models, refer to Section
9.2.2; for European modes, Section 9.2.3.

9.2.2 Maintenance Functions for U.S.A. Models
9.2.2.1

List of Maintenance Functions

The table below lists the maintenance functions built in handsets of U.S.A. models.
To access one of these functions, press the Menu/OK, *, and # keys, enter the corresponding 3-digit
function code with the numerical keys, and then press the # key on the cordless handset.
Maintenance Functions for U.S.A. Models

Function
Code

Function

Reference
Section (Page)

086

Checking of Cordless Handset ID Code and Base ID Code

9.2.2.2 (9-57)

195

Measuring of RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator)

9.2.2.3 (9-58)

196

Measuring of BER (Bit Error Rate)

9.2.2.4 (9-59)

197

Version Information on Cordless Handset

9.2.2.5 (9-59)

198

EEPROM Parameter Initialization

9.2.2.6 (9-60)

NOTES • Pressing the Off key after entering only one or two digits restores the cordless handset to
the standby state.
• Entering an invalid function code does not display any error message so that the cordless
handset superficially appears to accept the entry. If you make a mistake in entering a
code, therefore, press the Off key to return to the standby state and then go back to the
beginning of the procedure.

9-56

Confidential

9.2.2.2

Checking of Cordless Handset ID Code and Base ID Code (Function code 086)

Function

The cordless handset and base unit (cordless PCB in the machine) each have a unique ID code.
When the machine leaves the factory, the cordless handset ID code is registered to the base unit, and
the base ID code, to the cordless handset so that the handset and base unit are exclusively paired.
Once paired, they can identify each other and initiate wireless communication between them.
Up to four cordless handset ID codes can be registered to the base unit.
Function code 086 allows you to check the cordless handset ID code and base ID code registered in
the handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, #, 0, 8, 6, and # keys in this order in the
standby state.
The cordless handset displays its ID code as shown below.
Handset
ID = XXXXXXXX
(2) To display the base ID code registered in the cordless handset, press the
cordless handset.
Base Unit
ID = YYYYYYYY

key on the

(3) To return to the standby state, press the Off key or leave the handset for one minute without
pressing any key.

9-57

Confidential

9.2.2.3

Measuring of RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) (Function code 195)

Function

This function is used to measure the RSSI (received signal strength indicator) of outside radio
frequency interference (RFI) with the frequency band in a channel selected in an environment where
the cordless handset is used.
Select a channel (001ch through 089ch) and measure the RSSI using the procedure below. Lower
measured value means less radio frequency interference and better communications state.
If noise is heard with the cordless handset due to radio frequency interference, changing the locations
of the machine and the cordless handset may avoid the noise.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, #, 1, 9, 5, and # keys in this order in the
standby state.
The following appears on the handset's LCD.
RF TEST MODE
RSSI
CH = 040
(2) To change the channel, enter a 3-digit channel number from 001 through 089 using the
numerical keys or the arrow keys ( or ) on the cordless handset.
(3) Press the Menu/OK key on the cordless handset to start measuring the RSSI.
RSSI
****H
CH = 089
Where, "H" or "L" at the end of the first line means high or low gain modulation, respectively.
Pressing the

key switches to high or low gain modulation, respectively.

Note: The higher the measured value, the higher the radio frequency interference.
(4) To measure the RSSI for other channels, repeat steps (2) and (3) above.
(5) To returns to the standby state, press the Off key.

9-58

Confidential

9.2.2.4

Measuring of BER (Bit Error Rate) (Function code 196)

Function

This function is used to measure the BER (bit error rate) in data received through the wireless
communications link between the base unit (cordless PCB in the machine) and the cordless handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, #, 1, 9, 6, and # keys in this order in the
standby state.
The following appears on the handset's LCD.
Rx Quality
C* S* P* G** (BER in base unit)
C* S* P* G** (BER in cordless handset)
Where,
C: Count of CRC errors per 100 frames
S: Count of SYNC errors per 100 frames
P: Count of Parity errors per 100 frames
G: Count of LowGain selected per 100 frames

Max. = 9
Max. = 9
Max. = 9
Max. = 99

Best = 0
Best = 0
Best = 0
Best = 99

Note: For C, S, and P, the lower value, the higher RF sensitivity; for G, the higher value, the
higher sensitivity.
(2) Bring the cordless handset into contact with the antenna on the base unit (in the machine) and
check for a while that the measured values change.
The measured values come to the best ones and stay on. If not, the wireless communication is
abnormal.
(3) To return to the standby state, press the Off key twice.

9.2.2.5

Version Information on Cordless Handset (Function code 197)

Function

This function is used to check the version information on the cordless handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, #, 1, 9, 7, and # keys in this order in the
standby state.
The following appears on the handset's LCD.
PT: 3442 3108
FW: 4567
CP: 15678901
Where,
PT indicates the 8-digit compilation date of the internal host. The higher 4 digits are fixed to
3442; the lower indicates the date (in this example, 3108 means August 31).
FW indicates the 4-digit firmware version.
CP indicates the 8-digit CP version or revision.
(2) To return to the standby state, press the Off key.

9-59

Confidential

9.2.2.6

EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 198)

Function

This function initializes the contents of the EEPROM in the cordless handset to the initial values,
erasing all personal information stored.
NOTE: This function also erases the cordless handset ID code and base ID code which have been
registered to the EEPROM in the cordless handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, #, 1, 9, 8, and # keys in this order in the
standby state.
The following appears on the handset's LCD.
E2PROM INIT
1. Yes 2. No
Number input
(2) To initialize the contents of the EEPROM in the cordless handset, press the 1 key; to cancel
initialization, press the 2 key.
If you press the 1 key, the following confirmation screen appears.
All Delete?
1. Yes 2. No
Number input
(3) To initialize it, press the 1 key again; to cancel initialization, press the 2 key.
(4) To return to the standby state, press the Off key or leave the handset for one minute without
pressing any key.

9-60

Confidential

9.2.3 Maintenance Functions for European Models
9.2.3.1

List of Maintenance Functions

The table below lists the maintenance functions built in handsets of European models.
To access one of these functions, press the keys specified below on the cordless handset.
Maintenance Functions for European Models
To access the following function:

Press:

Version Information on Cordless
Handset

Display the
following:

Reference
Section (Page)

SW VERSION

9.2.3.2 (9-61)

Checking of Cordless Handset ID
TEST IPUI
Code
Menu/OK, *, 1, 9, 3, and 7 keys
Checking of Base ID Code
TEST RFPI
EEPROM Parameter
Initialization
Initializing the Cordless Handset

Menu/OK, *, 0, 7, and 4 keys

9.2.3.3 (9-62)
9.2.3.4 (9-62)

EPROM DIRECT

9.2.3.5 (9-63)

Set Country

9.2.3.6 (9-64)

NOTE: Functions other than the above can also appear, but do not access them. They are
exclusively prepared for maintenance at the factory.
9.2.3.2

Version Information on Cordless Handset

Function

This function is used to check the version information on the cordless handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, 1, 9, 3, and 7 keys in this order in the standby
state.
The "SW VERSION" appears on the handset's LCD.
(2) Press the Menu/OK key.
The following appears on the handset's LCD.
H: XXXXXXXXXX
Pressing the or key switches the display between the items below.
F: XXXXXXXXXX
CP: XXXXXXXX
EEPROM: XXXX
DATE: XX/XX
Where,
H indicates the 10-digit internal host.
F indicates the 10-digit firmware version.
CP indicates the 8-digit CP version or revision.
EEPROM indicates the 4-digit version.
DATE indicates the month and the day in 4-digit.
(3) To return to the standby state, press the C key twice.
9-61

Confidential

9.2.3.3

Checking of Cordless Handset ID Code

Function

The cordless handset has a unique ID code. When the machine leaves the factory, the cordless
handset ID code is registered to the base unit, and the base ID code, to the cordless handset so that
the handset and base unit are exclusively paired. Once paired, they can identify each other and
initiate wireless communication between them.
Up to four cordless handset ID codes can be registered to the base unit.
This function allows you to check the cordless handset ID code registered in the handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, 1, 9, 3, and 7 keys in this order in the standby
state.
The "SW VERSION" appears on the handset's LCD.
(2) Press the

key to display "TEST IPUI" and press the Menu/OK key.

The cordless handset displays its 10-digit ID code as shown below.
Handset
ID = XXXXXXXXXX
(3) To return to the standby state, press the C key twice.

9.2.3.4

Checking of Base ID Code

Function

The base unit (cordless PCB in the machine) has a unique ID code. When the machine leaves the
factory, the cordless handset ID code is registered to the base unit, and the base ID code, to the
cordless handset so that the handset and base unit are exclusively paired. Once paired, they can
identify each other and initiate wireless communication between them.
Up to four base ID codes (Base1, Base2, Base3, and Base4) can be registered to the cordless handset.
This function allows you to check the base ID code(s) registered in the handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, choose the desired base unit (Base1, Base2, Base3, or Base4) with the
following steps in the standby state.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Press the Menu/OK key.
Press the or key to choose HS Settings. Then press the Menu/OK key.
Press the or key to choose Select BASE. Then press the Menu/OK key.
Press the or key to choose the desired base unit. Then press the Menu/OK key.

(2) Press the Menu/OK, *, 1, 9, 3, and 7 keys in this order in the standby state.
The cordless handset displays "SW VERSION."

9-62

Confidential

(3) Press the

key to display "TEST IPUI" and press the Menu/OK key.

The 10-digit base ID code appears on the handset's LCD as shown below.
Base Unit
ID = XXXXXXXXXX
Current BASE=Y
NOTE: Y indicates the base unit number selected in step (1) above.
(4) To return to the standby state, press the C key twice.
NOTE: To display the ID code of another base unit, repeat steps (1) to (3) after returning to the
standby state.

9.2.3.5

EEPROM Parameter Initialization

Function

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, 1, 9, 3, and 7 keys in this order in the standby
state.
The "SW VERSION" appears on the handset's LCD.
(2) Press the

key to display "EPROM DIRECT."

(3) To initialize the contents of the EEPROM in the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK key.
NOTE: Pressing the Menu/OK key immediately starts to initialize the EEPROM without
displaying any confirmation message.
After completion of initialization, the cordless handset automatically returns to the standby state.

9-63

Confidential

9.2.3.6

Initializing the Cordless Handset

Function

Deleting personal info from the cordless handset (see Appendix 7.2) cannot initialize all settings.
This function initializes the cordless handset. Using this function allows the cordless handset, for
example, to be able to start up in the country selection mode at the next time when the user loads a
battery to the cordless handset.
Operating Procedure

(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, 0, 7, and 4 keys in this order in the standby
state.
The "Set Country" appears on the handset's LCD.
(2) Remove the battery from the cordless handset.
When the user loads a battery to the cordless handset at the next time, the cordless handset will
start up in the country selection mode displaying the "Set Country." The default country is U.K.

9-64

Confidential

Appendix 1. Reading Labels
This appendix shows the location of labels put on some parts and describes the coding information
for serial number, property data, and manufacturing information.

Confidential

Reading Labels
An individual machine has a "serial number label" for the machine itself and "property labels" for the
head/carriage unit. An individual ink cartridge and a battery in the cordless handset also have a
"manufacturing information label."
This section lists the coding information for those serial number, property data, and manufacturing
information.

(1) Serial number label for the machine itself

(app01a)

Location

Serial number label

App. 1-1

(app01b_MFC)

Confidential

(2) Head property labels
The property code of the head/carriage unit is printed on head property labels--bar code label and
QR code label, each of which is attached to the lower cover and the head/carriage unit,
respectively.

On the lower cover

Head property code

Production lot number

Serial number (6-digit)
Production year
(Example) 6 : 2006
7 : 2007
Production month
A : January
G:
B : February H :
C : March
J:
D : April
K:
E : May
L:
F : June
M:

July
August
September
October
November
December
(bar_code_label)

(Engine bar code label)

Head property label
(Bar code label)

(app01d_MFC)

NOTE: The head property label is attached on the left side of the lower cover as shown above. The
label on the right side is for the engine bar code. When reading the head property code, take care
not to read a wrong label.

On the head/carriage unit
Head property label
(QR code label)

(app01f)

App. 1-2

Confidential

(3) Manufacturing information label for an ink cartridge

Barcode

C 06 11 A1

Product code

Factory code
Production date
(Example) 11 : 11th
20 : 20th
Production year
(Example) 06 : 2006
07 : 2007
Production month
A : January
G : July
B : February H : August
C : March
J : September
D : April
K : October
E : May
L : November
F : June
M : December
(app01g)

Location

Manufacturing information label
(app01h)

(4) Manufacturing information label for a battery (in cordless handsets)

Nickel metal-hydride battery
Production month
A : January
G:
B : February H :
C : March
I:
D : April
J:
E : May
K:
F : June
L:

$%.$6

Production year
K : 2006
L : 2007

App. 1-3

July
August
September
October
November
December

(app01i)

Confidential

Appendix 2. Firmware Installation
This appendix provides instructions on how to change firmware stored in the flash ROM on the
main PCB or load firmware to a new main PCB from the host PC.

A2.1 Loading the Programs to the Flash ROM ........................................................ App. 2-1

Confidential

A2.1 Loading the Programs to the Flash ROM
If you want to change the programs stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB or after you replace
the main PCB, load the desired programs to the flash ROM.
Loading requires a PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 98SE/Me, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP Home/Professional, or Windows Vista.
CAUTION: During loading, never turn off your PC or the machine, unplug the USB interface
cable, interrupt loading or load invalid data. If you do so, loading will fail, causing the PCB to
be unusable. You will have to replace the main PCB and load programs to a new PCB.
Preparation

You need the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver and filedg32.exe (provided by Brother Industries).
Save them in an arbitrary folder in your PC.
Installing the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver

To identify terminals connected via USB interface, a PC requires the corresponding virtual USB
devices to be implemented by driver/software. If you connect any number of machines to your PC,
therefore, the same number of virtual USB devices will be automatically configured on your PC. To
prevent virtual USB devices from being configured limitlessly, use the unique driver installation
procedure described below that enables your PC to identify terminals via a single virtual USB device.
NOTE: Once this installation procedure is carried out for a PC, no more driver/software installation
will be required for that PC to identify machines. If the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver has been
already installed to your PC according to this procedure, skip this section.
NOTE: Before proceeding to the procedure given below, make sure that the BHL2-Maintenance
Printer driver (listed in Chapter 7, Section 7.1.1) is stored in your PC.
(1) Make sure that the power cord of the machine is unplugged from the electrical outlet.
If the machine is connected to your PC, unplug the USB cable.
(2) Switch on your PC.
(3) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
(4) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the key four times to make
the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 9.)
TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the
same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this
sequence.
" on the
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in which
the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(5) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
The following window appears.

App. 2-1

Confidential

(6) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of new hardware device by the system.
Click Next to proceed.

(7) Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)" and click Next.

(8) Select "Specify a location" and click Next.

App. 2-2

Confidential

(9) Select the folder where the copy of the BHL2-Maintenance Printer driver is located (or click
Browse to specify it), then click OK.
(This sample screen is captured on the Windows 2000 desktop.)

(10) Click Next.

(11) To proceed, click Yes.

App. 2-3

Confidential

(12) If the driver is successfully installed, the following message window appears. Click Finish to
return to Windows.

App. 2-4

Confidential

Loading the programs onto the flash ROM of the machine

After replacing the main PCB with a new one
Unplug the power cord of the machine from the electrical outlet and disconnect the USB cable that
connects the machine with your PC.
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe."
The Filedrgs window will appear as shown below.

(2) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
(3) On the machine, follow the steps below to enter the firmware loading mode.
1) Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet with the (Copy Options) key held down and
keep holding it down until the following appears on the LCD.
Wide color LCD

2) Hold down the

2.0-inch color LCD

Monochrome LCD

(Enlarge/Reduce) key until the following appears on the LCD.

Wide color LCD

2.0-inch color LCD

App. 2-5

Monochrome LCD

Confidential

3) Hold down the

(Copy Quality) key until the following appears on the LCD.

Wide color LCD

2.0-inch color LCD

Monochrome LCD

4) Hold down the OK key until the following appears on the LCD.
Wide color LCD

2.0-inch color LCD

Monochrome LCD

When the black and white pattern shown above is displayed, the machine is ready to receive
programs or data for firmware installation from the connected PC.
NOTE: Pressing a wrong key or no key within the specified time in steps 1) through 4) above
causes an error. If it happens, unplug the power cord and go back to step (1) above.
(4) Drag and drop the firmware (e.g., lz0023_a.pmu) onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in
the Filedrgs window.
NOTE: To use a firmware file, extract it beforehand by double-clicking. It is a self-extracting
file having the extension .exe.
After approx. 2 to 5 minutes, the loading operation is complete and the machine automatically
reboots and returns to the standby state.
(5) Check the version of the firmware installed, with the following steps.
Press the * and # keys at the same time to display the firmware version on the LCD.
- Sample version number shown on the monochrome LCD:

A0307252244:CF30

- Sample version number shown on the color LCD:
(The top line shows the version number.)

0A63061910:FE46
P0601242005:4123
B0601242005:1C8D

If the displayed version number is identical with the firmware version you installed, the loading
operation has been successfully finished.
NOTE: If loading operation ends abnormally, turn the machine off and on. Wait for the machine to
emit a long beep and automatically enter the firmware loading mode, and then perform the loading
procedure above again.

App. 2-6

Confidential

After replacing the main PCB with the one used for any other machine or when changing programs
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and make sure that the machine is connected with
your PC using a USB cable.
While holding down the 5 key, plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
The black and white pattern appears on the LCD as shown on the previous page. The machine is
ready to receive programs or data for firmware installation from the connected PC.
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe."
The Filedrgs window will appear as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the firmware (e.g., lz0023_a.pmu) onto the BHL2-Maintenance Printer icon in
the Filedrgs window shown above.
NOTE: To use a firmware file, extract it beforehand by double-clicking. It is a self-extracting
file having the extension .exe.
After approx. 2 to 5 minutes, the loading operation is complete and the machine automatically
reboots and returns to the standby state.

App. 2-7

Confidential

(3) On the machine, check the version of the firmware installed, with the following steps.
Press the * and # keys at the same time to display the firmware version on the LCD.
- Sample version number shown on the monochrome LCD:

A0307252244:CF30

- Sample version number shown on the color LCD:
(The top line shows the version number.)

0A63061910:FE46
P0601242005:4123
B0601242005:1C8D

App. 2-8

Confidential

Appendix 3. EEPROM Customizing Codes
This appendix provides instructions on how to set up the EEPROM customizing codes for the
various preferences exclusively designed for each destination. The specified customizing code is
stored in the EEPROM mounted on the main PCB. If the main PCB is replaced, therefore, you
need to set up the proper customizing code with the machine in the maintenance mode.
NOTE: Customizing codes customize firmware for individual models, enabling the common
firmware to be used for various models. A list of EEPROM customizing codes comes with the
firmware data provided by Brother Industries.

Confidential

EEPROM CUSTOMIZING CODES
This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language, function settings, and
firmware switch settings.
Refer to the "EEPROM Customizing Codes List" on the next page.
Operating Procedure
(1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next press the
times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode.

key four

TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the
same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this
order.
" on the
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays "
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in which
the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(2) Start customizing the EEPROM (with Function code 74) as follows:
Press the 7 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The current customizing code appears on the LCD.
(3) Enter the desired customizing code.
To enter letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while holding down the # key,
respectively.
The newly entered code appears.
NOTE: If a wrong 4-digit code is entered, the machine will malfunction.
(4) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The machine saves the setting and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
If you press the Stop/Exit key or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above procedure,
the machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

App. 3-1

Confidential

EEPROM Customizing Codes List

Destination

US
Mexico

Canada

Germany

France

Italy

Spain

Portugal

Country Code

MFC235C

---

0104

0103

0105

0116

0115

0118

MFC260C

---

0204

0203

0205

0216

0215

0218

MFC265C

0301

0302

---

MFC465CN

0001

0002

0004

0003

0005

0016

0015

0018

MFC680CN

---

0004

0003

0005

0016

0015

0018

MFC685CW

0101

0102

---

MFC885CW

0201

0202

0204

0203

0205

0216

0215

0218

Destination

Country Code

Switzerland Netherlands

Belgium

Norway
Sweden
Finland
Denmark

Austria

Czech
Hungary
Poland
Rumania
Bulgaria
Turkey

Russia

MFC235C

0110

0109

0108

0157

0103

0154

0148

MFC260C

0210

0209

0208

0257

0203

0254

0248

MFC265C

---

MFC465CN

0010

0009

0008

0057

0003

0054

---

MFC680CN

0010

0009

0008

---

0003

---

MFC685CW

---

MFC885CW

0210

0209

0208

0257

---

0248

App. 3-2

Confidential

S. Africa

Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia,
Philippines, Hong Kong,
Indonesia, Vietnam, UAE,
Iran, India, Jordan, Egypt,
Lebanon, Syria, Pakistan, Kenya

Australia
New Zealand

China

MFC235C

0124

0140

0156

---

MFC260C

---

0240

0256

---

MFC265C

---

0120

MFC465CN

---

0040

0056

0020

MFC680CN

---

MFC685CW

---

0140

0156

0120

MFC885CW

0224

0240

0256

---

Destination

Country Code

The above information is as of April 30, 2007. The up-to-date information is available from your local Brother
Customer Service.

App. 3-3

Confidential

Appendix 4. Firmware Switches (WSW)
This appendix describes the functions of the firmware switches, which can be divided into two
groups: one is for customizing preferences designed for the shipping destination (as described in
Appendix 3) and the other is for modifying preferences that match the machine to the
environmental conditions. Use the latter group if the machine malfunctions due to mismatching.
NOTE: Each of the firmware switches has eight selectors. You should not allow end users to
access all of those selectors, but you can allow them to access user-accessible selectors which are
shaded in the firmware switch tables in this appendix.
NOTE: The firmware switch setting procedure is given in Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.5 (Function
code 10).

Confidential

WSW No.

Function

Refer to:

WSW01

Dial pulse setting

App. 4-3

WSW02

Tone signal setting

App. 4-4

WSW03

PBX mode setting

App. 4-5

WSW04

TRANSFER facility setting

App. 4-6

WSW05

1st dial tone and busy tone detection

App. 4-7

WSW06

Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection

App. 4-9

WSW07

Dial tone setting 1

App. 4-11

WSW08

Dial tone setting 2

App. 4-12

WSW09

Protocol definition 1

App. 4-13

WSW10

Protocol definition 2

App. 4-14

WSW11

Busy tone setting

App. 4-15

WSW12

Signal detection condition setting

App. 4-16

WSW13

Modem setting

App. 4-17

WSW14

AUTO ANS facility setting

App. 4-18

WSW15

REDIAL facility setting

App. 4-19

WSW16

Function setting 1

App. 4-20

WSW17

Function setting 2

App. 4-21

WSW18

Function setting 3

App. 4-22

WSW19

Transmission speed setting

App. 4-23

WSW20

Overseas communications mode setting

App. 4-24

WSW21

TAD setting 1

App. 4-25

WSW22

ECM and call waiting caller ID

App. 4-26

WSW23

Communications setting

App. 4-27

WSW24

TAD setting 2

App. 4-28

WSW25

TAD setting 3

App. 4-29

WSW26

Function setting 4

App. 4-30

WSW27

Function setting 5

App. 4-31

WSW28

Function setting 6

App. 4-32

WSW29

Function setting 7

App. 4-33

WSW30

Function setting 8

App. 4-34

WSW31

Function setting 9

App. 4-35

WSW32

Function setting 10

App. 4-36

WSW33

Function setting 11

App. 4-37

WSW34

Function setting 12

App. 4-38

WSW35

Function setting 13

App. 4-39

WSW36

Function setting 14

App. 4-40

WSW37

Function setting 15

App. 4-41

WSW38

V.34 transmission setting

(Not used.)

App. 4-42

WSW39

V.34 transmission speed

(Not used.)

App. 4-43

WSW40

V.34 modem settings

(Not used.)

App. 4-44

WSW41

ON-duration of the scanning light source

WSW42

Internet mail settings

WSW43

Function setting 21

WSW44

Speeding up scanning-1

App. 4-46
(Not used.)

App. 4-47
App. 4-47

(Not used.)

App. 4-48

WSW45

Speeding up scanning-2

App. 4-49

WSW46

Monitor of power ON/OFF state and parallel port kept at high

App. 4-50

App. 4-1

Confidential

WSW47
WSW48
WSW49
WSW50
WSW51
WSW52
WSW53
WSW54
WSW55
WSW56
WSW57

Switching between high- and full-speed USB
USB setup latency
End-of-copying beep and black ink print mode
SDAA settings
Function setting 16
Function setting 17
Function setting 18
Function setting 19
Function setting 20
Function setting 21
Function setting 22

WSW58
WSW59

Function setting 23
Function setting 24

(Not used.)
(Not used.)

App. 4-51
App. 4-52
App. 4-53
App. 4-54
App. 4-55
App. 4-56
App. 4-57
App. 4-58
App. 4-59
App. 4-59
App. 4-60
App. 4-61
App. 4-63

App. 4-2

Confidential

WSW01 (Dial pulse setting)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Dial pulse generation mode

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

N
N+1
10-N
N

Break time length in pulse dialing

No. 3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

60 ms
67 ms
40 ms (for 16 PPS)
64 ms (at 106-ms intervals)

Inter-digit pause

No. 5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

800 ms
850 ms
950 ms
600 ms

1
2

3
4

5
6

Switching between pulse (DP) and
tone (PB) dialing, by the function
switch

0: Yes

Default dialing mode, pulse (DP) or
tone (PB) dialing

0: PB

DP
ms: millisecond(s)

Selectors 1 and 2: Dial pulse generation mode

These selectors set the number of pulses to be generated in pulse dialing.
N:
Dialing "N" generates "N" pulses. (Dialing "0" generates 10 pulses.)
N + 1: Dialing "N" generates "N + 1" pulses.
10 - N: Dialing "N" generates "10 - N" pulses.
Selectors 3 and 4: Break time length in pulse dialing

These selectors set the break time length in pulse dialing.
(Example: If "1," "2," and "3" are dialed when N is set by selectors 1 and 2.)

Selectors 5 and 6: Inter-digit pause

These selectors set the inter-digit pause in pulse dialing.
(Example: If "1," "2," and "3" are dialed when N is set by selectors 1 and 2.)

App. 4-3

Confidential

Selector 7:

Switching between pulse (DP) and tone (PB) dialing, by the function switch

This selector determines whether or not the dialing mode can be switched between the pulse (DP) and
tone (PB) dialing by using the function switch.
Selector 8:

Default dialing mode, pulse (DP) or tone (PB) dialing

This selector sets the default dialing mode (pulse dialing or tone dialing) which can be changed by
the function switch. If the user switches it with the function switch when selector 7 is set to "0," the
setting specified by this selector will also be switched automatically.

WSW02 (Tone signal setting)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Setting and Specifications

Tone signal transmission time
length

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

70 ms
80 ms
90 ms
100 ms

Min. pause in tone dialing

No. 3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

70 ms
80 ms
90 ms
140 ms

3
4
5
|
8

Attenuator for pseudo ring
backtone to the line (selectable in
the range of 0-15 dB, in 1 dB
increments)

0:
0:
0:
0:

0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB

1:
1:
1:
1:

8 dB
4 dB
2 dB
1 dB
ms: millisecond(s)

Selectors 1 through 4: Tone signal transmission time length and Min. pause in tone dialing

These selectors set the tone signal transmission time length and minimum pause in tone dialing.
(Example: If "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5" are dialed.)

Selectors 5 through 8: Attenuator for pseudo ring backtone to the line

These selectors are used to adjust the sound volume of a ring backtone in the F/T mode, an on-hold
sound, or a beep generated as a signal during remote control operation or at the start of ICM
recording.
The larger the value specified by these selectors, the greater the attenuation.
App. 4-4

Confidential

WSW03 (PBX* mode setting)

Selector
No.

Function

CNG detection when sharing a
modular wall socket with a
telephone

2
|
4

Detection time length of
PBX* dial tone, required for
starting dialing

Setting and Specifications
0: A
No. 2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

CNG detection when sharing
a modular wall socket with a
telephone

3
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0: A
No. 6 7
0 0

0 1

Dial tone detection in PBX*

1 0

1 1
8

1: B
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

50 ms
210 ms
500 ms
800 ms
900 ms
1.5 sec.
2.0 sec.
2.5 sec.
1: B

: No detection
(3.5 sec. WAIT)
: No detection
(5 sec. WAIT)
: No detection
(7 sec. WAIT)
: Detection
(Frequency only)

Not used.
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)
* PBX: Private branch exchange

NOTE: Selectors 2 through 4, 6 and 7 are not applicable where no PBX is installed.
Selectors 1 and 5: CNG detection when sharing a modular wall socket with a telephone

These selectors determine whether or not the machine detects a CNG signal when a line is connected
to a telephone sharing a modular wall socket with the machine. Upon detection of CNG signals by
the number of cycles specified by these selectors, the machine interprets CNG as an effective signal
and then starts FAX reception.
Selector
No. 1 No. 5
0 (A)
0 (A)
1 (B)
1 (B)

0 (A)
1 (B)
0 (A)
1 (B)

Cycle
0.5 cycle
1.0 cycle
1.5 cycles
2.0 cycles

Selectors 2 through 4: Detection time length of PBX dial tone, required for starting dialing

Upon detection of the PBX dial tone for the time length set by these selectors, the machine starts
dialing.
These selectors are effective only when both selectors 6 and 7 are set to "1" (Detection).
App. 4-5

Confidential

Selectors 6 and 7: Dial tone detection in PBX

These selectors activate or deactivate the dial tone detection function which detects a dial tone when
a line is connected to the PBX.
Setting both of these selectors to "1" activates the dial tone detection function so that the machine
starts dialing upon detection of a dial tone when a line is connected.
Other setting combinations deactivate the dial tone detection function so that the machine starts
dialing after the specified WAIT (3.5, 5.0, or 7.0 seconds) without detection of a dial tone when a
line is connected.

WSW04 (TRANSFER facility setting)

Selector
No.
1

2
3

Function

Setting and Specifications

Earth function in transfer
facility (Not used.)

Dual tone detection frequency
in ICM recording

0: Provided
No. 2
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

1: Not provided

: 350 and 440 Hz (A)
: 440 and 480 Hz (B)
:
: 480 and 620 Hz (C)

Dual tone detection sensitivity
in ICM recording

0: Normal

1: High

Time to be added to the
setting specified by selectors
3 and 4 on WSW24 (Time
length from CML ON to start
of pseudo ring backtone
transmission)

0: Not added

1: +4 seconds added

6
|
8

Break time length for flash
function

No. 6
0
0
0
0
1

7
0
0
1
1
0

8
0
1
0
1
0

No. 6
: 80 ms
1
: 100 ms
1
: 110 ms
1
: 120 ms
: 200 ms

7
0
1
1

8
1 : 250 ms
0 : 500 ms
1 : 700 ms

ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1 and 5 through 8 are not applicable in those countries where no transfer facility is
supported.
NOTE: Selectors 2 through 4 are applicable to models equipped with built-in TAD.

App. 4-6

Confidential

Selector 1:

Earth function in transfer facility (Not used.)

This selector determines whether or not the earth function is added to the transfer setting menu to be
accessed by the function switch.
Selectors 2 and 3: Dual tone detection frequency in ICM recording

If the machine detects either of the frequencies specified by these selectors in ICM recording, it
disconnects the line. For example, if these selectors are set to “0, 0,” the machine disconnects the line
upon detection of 350 or 440 Hz.
Selector 4:

Dual tone detection sensitivity in ICM recording

Setting this selector to "1" increases the tone detection sensitivity in ICM recording.
Selectors 6 through 8: Break time length for flash function

These selectors set the break time length.
This setting is effective only when the flash function is selected for the Speed Dial key by using the
function switch.

WSW05 (1st dial tone and busy tone detection)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

1
|

1st dial tone detection

4
5
6

Max. pause time allowable for
remote ID code detection

Busy tone detection in automatic sending mode

Busy tone detection in automatic receiving mode

Not used.

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0 : 2 seconds
No. 5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

0 : Yes

3.5 sec. WAIT
7.0 sec. WAIT
10.5 sec. WAIT
14.0 sec. WAIT
17.5 sec. WAIT
21.0 sec. WAIT
2.5 sec. WAIT
Detection (Without WAIT)
1: 1 second

No detection
Detection only after dialing
No detection
Detection before and after dialing
1: No

sec.: second(s)

NOTE: Selectors 5 through 7 are not applicable in those countries where no busy tone detection is
supported.

App. 4-7

Confidential

Selectors 1 through 3: 1st dial tone detection

These selectors activate or deactivate the 1st dial tone detection function which detects the 1st dial
tone issued from the PSTN when a line is connected to the PSTN.
Setting all of these selectors to "1" activates the dial tone detection function so that the machine
starts dialing upon detection of a dial tone when a line is connected. (However, in those countries
which support no dial tone detection function, e.g., in the U.S.A., setting these selectors to "1" makes
the machine start dialing after a WAIT of 3.5 seconds.) For the detecting conditions of the 1st dial
tone, refer to WSW07 and WSW08.
Other setting combinations deactivate the dial tone detection function so that the machine starts
dialing after the specified WAIT (2.5, 7.0, 10.5, 14.0, 17.5, or 21.0 seconds) without detection of a
dial tone when a line is connected to the PSTN.
Selector 4:

Max. pause time allowable for remote ID code detection

This selector sets the maximum pause time allowable for detecting the second digit of a remote ID
code after detection of the first digit in remote reception.
If selector 4 is set to "0" (2 seconds), for instance, only a remote ID code whose second digit is
detected within 2 seconds after detection of the first digit will become effective so as to activate the
remote function.
Selectors 5 and 6: Busy tone detection in automatic sending mode

These selectors determine whether or not the machine automatically disconnects a line upon detection
of a busy tone in automatic sending mode.
Setting selector 6 to "0" ignores a busy tone so that the machine does not disconnect the line.
Setting selectors 5 and 6 to "0" and "1," respectively, makes the machine detect a busy tone only
after dialing and disconnect the line.
Setting both of selectors 5 and 6 to "1" makes the machine detect a busy tone before and after dialing
and then disconnect the line.
Selector 7:

Busy tone detection in automatic receiving mode

This selector determines whether or not the machine automatically disconnects the line upon
detection of a busy tone in automatic receiving mode.

App. 4-8

Confidential

WSW06 (Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
|

Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone
detection

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
0

:
:
:
:
:
:

3
1 0 1 :
1 1 1 :

4
|

Detection of international tone

No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

No pause
3.5 sec. WAIT
7 sec. WAIT
10.5 sec. WAIT
2.5 sec. WAIT
2nd dial tone detection
only in pulse dialing (DP)
system
2nd dial tone detection
both in DP and push-button
(PB) dialing system
50 ms
250 ms
500 ms
620 ms
800 ms
1.5 sec.
2.0 sec.
2.5 sec.

No. of 2nd dial tone detection
cycles

0: 1 cycle

1: 2 cycles

Allowable instantaneous interrupt
during reception of 2nd dial tone

0: 30 ms

1: 50 ms
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: Selectors 4 through 8 are not applicable in those countries where no dial tone detection is
supported, e.g., U.S.A.

App. 4-9

Confidential

Selectors 1 through 3: Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection

Selectors
1 2 3
0

No WAIT is inserted even if the Pause key is pressed.

0
0
0
1

0
1
1
0

1
0
1
0

If you press the Pause key during dialing, the machine will insert WAIT as
defined in the above table.
If the Pause key is pressed repeatedly, the machine inserts the specified WAIT
multiplied by the number of depressions. It applies also in hook-up dialing.

1
1
1

0
1
1

1
0
1

When these selectors are set to "1, 0, 1":
Each time you press the Pause key in dialing, the machine will wait for the 2nd
dial tone to be sent via the communications line regardless of pulse dialing or
tone dialing.
When these selectors are set to "1, 1, 0":
If you press the Pause key in pulse dialing, the machine will first wait for the
2nd dial tone to be sent via the communications line. After that, pressing the
Pause key will cause the machine to insert a WAIT of 3.5 seconds. In tone
dialing, the machine will insert a WAIT of 3.5 seconds.
When these selectors are set to "1, 1, 1":
If you press the Pause key, the machine will first wait for the 2nd dial tone to
be sent via the communications line regardless of pulse dialing or tone dialing.
After that, pressing the Pause key will cause the machine to insert a WAIT of
3.5 seconds.
(In those countries where no dial tone detection function is supported, setting
these selectors to "1, 0, 1," "1, 1, 0," or "1, 1, 1" inserts a WAIT of 3.5
seconds.)

Selectors 4 through 6: Detection of international tone

Upon detection of the 2nd dial tone for the time length specified by these selectors, the machine starts
dialing.
This setting is effective only when the 2nd dial tone detection function is activated by selectors 1
through 3 (Setting 101, 110, or 111).
This function does not apply in those countries where no dial tone detection function is supported.
Selector 7:

No. of 2nd dial tone detection cycles

This selector sets the number of dial tone detection cycles required for starting dialing.
Selector 8:

Allowable instantaneous interrupt during reception of 2nd dial tone

This selector sets the allowable instantaneous interrupt period that should be ignored during
reception of the 2nd dial tone.

App. 4-10

Confidential

WSW07 (Dial tone setting 1)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
1
1

Dial tone frequency band
control

Line current detection
(Not used.)

:
:
:
:

Narrows by 10 Hz
Initial value
Widens by 10 Hz
Widens by 10 Hz

0: No
No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

4
|

2
0
1
0
1

2nd dial tone detection level
(Z = 600 Ω)

Allowable instantaneous
interrupt during reception of 1st
dial tone

Not used.

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1: Yes
6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0: 30 ms

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

-21 dBm
-24 dBm
-27 dBm
-30 dBm
-33 dBm
-36 dBm
-39 dBm
-42 dBm
1: 50 ms

ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1, 2, 4 through 7 are not applicable in those countries where no dial tone or line
current detection is supported, e.g., U.S.A.
NOTE: Selector 3 is not applicable to those models having no loop current detection function.
Selectors 1 and 2: Dial tone frequency band control

These selectors set the frequency band for the 1st dial tone and busy tone (before dialing) to be
detected.
This setting is effective only when selectors 1 through 3 on WSW05 are set to "1,1,1."
Selector 3:

Line current detection (Not used.)

This selector determines whether or not to detect a line current before starting dialing.
Selectors 4 through 6: 2nd dial tone detection level

These selectors set the detection level of the 2nd dial tone.
Selector 7:

Allowable instantaneous interrupt during reception of 1st dial tone

This selector sets the allowable instantaneous interrupt period that should be ignored during
reception of the 1st dial tone.

App. 4-11

Confidential

WSW08 (Dial tone setting 2)

Selector
No.

1
|
3

4
5

6
|
8

Function

Setting and Specifications

1st dial tone detection time
length

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Time-out length for 1st and
2nd dial tone detection

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

: 10 sec.
: 20 sec.
: 15 sec.
: 30 sec.

Detection level of 1st dial
tone and busy tone before
dialing

No. 6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

50 ms
250 ms
500 ms
620 ms
800 ms
1.5 sec.
2.0 sec.
2.5 sec.

-21 dBm
-24 dBm
-27 dBm
-30 dBm
-33 dBm
-36 dBm
-39 dBm
-42 dBm
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: The WSW08 is not applicable in those countries where no dial tone detection is supported, e.g.,
U.S.A.
Selectors 1 through 3: 1st dial tone detection time length

Upon detection of the 1st dial tone for the time length set by these selectors, the machine starts
dialing.
This setting is effective only when selectors 1 through 3 on WSW05 are set to "1,1,1."
Selectors 4 and 5: Time-out length for 1st and 2nd dial tone detection

These selectors set the time-out length for the 1st and 2nd dial tone detection so that the machine
waits dial tone input for the specified time length and disconnects itself from the line when no dial
tone is inputted.

App. 4-12

Confidential

WSW09 (Protocol definition 1)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Frame length selection

256 octets

1: 64 octets

Use of non-standard commands

Allowed

1: Prohibited

No. 3
0
0
1
1

3
No. of retries
4

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

4 times
3 times
2 times
1 time

T5 timer

0: 300 sec.

60 sec.

T1 timer

0: 35 sec.

40 sec.

7
8

No. 7
0

8
0

0
1
1

1
0
1

:
:
:

Timeout for response from
the called station in
automatic sending mode

55 sec. (in U.S.A. and Canadian
models)
60 sec. (in other models)
140 sec.
90 sec.
35 sec.
sec.: second(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 5 are not applicable in those models which do not support ECM.
Selector 1:

Frame length selection

Usually a single frame consists of 256 octets (1 octet = 8 bits). For communications lines with higher
bit error rate, however, set selector 1 to "1" so that the machine can divide a message into 64-octet
frames.
Remarks: The error correction mode (ECM) is a facsimile transmission manner in which the
machine divides a message into frames for transmission so that if any data error occurs on the
transmission line, the machine retransmits only those frames containing the error data.
Selector 2:

Use of non-standard commands

If this selector is set to "0," the machine can use non-standard commands (the machine’s native-mode
commands, e.g., NSF, NSC, and NSS) for communications. If it is set to "1," the machine will use
standard commands only.
Selectors 3 and 4: No. of retries

These selectors set the number of retries in each specified modem transmission speed.
Selector 5:

T5 timer

This selector sets the time length for the T5 timer.
Selector 6:

T1 timer

This selector sets the time length for the T1 timer.
Selectors 7 and 8: Timeout for response from the called station in automatic sending mode

If the machine (calling station) receives no response (no G3 command) from the called terminal in
automatic sending mode for the period specified by these selectors, it disconnects the line.
App. 4-13

Confidential

WSW10 (Protocol definition 2)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Time length from transmission
of the last dial digit to CML
ON

0: 100 ms

1: 50 ms

Time length from CML ON to
CNG transmission

0: 2 sec.

1: 4 sec.

Time length from CML ON to
CED transmission (except for
facsimile-to-telephone
switching)

0: 0.5 sec.

1: 2 sec.

No.
5
6
7
8

No. of training retries

Encoding system
(Compression)

5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

1 time
2 times
3 times
4 times

0: Allowed

1: Not allowed

MMR

0: Allowed

1: Not allowed
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

Selector 2:

Time length from transmission of the last dial digit to CML ON

This selector sets the time length from when the machine transmits the last dial digit until the CML
relay comes on.
Selector 3:

Time length from CML ON to CNG transmission

This selector sets the time length until the machine transmits a CNG after it turns on the CML relay.
Selector 4:

Time length from CML ON to CED transmission

This selector sets the time length until the machine transmits a CED after it turns on the CML relay.
This setting does not apply to switching between facsimile and telephone.
Selectors 5 and 6: No. of training retries

These selectors set the number of training retries to be repeated before automatic fallback.
Selectors 7 and 8: Encoding system (Compression)

This selector determines whether or not to allow the use of the MR/MMR coding system.

App. 4-14

Confidential

WSW11 (Busy tone setting)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Busy tone frequency band
control

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

Narrows by 10 Hz
Initial value
Widens by 10 Hz
Widens by 10 Hz

1: 250-750/250-750 ms

4
5

Setting and Specifications

1: 400-600/400-600 ms
ON/OFF time length ranges
for busy tone
(More than one setting
allowed)

1: 175-440/175-440 ms
1: 100-1000 ms/17-660 ms

1: 110-410/320-550 ms

1: 100-660/100-660 ms
ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: WSW11 is not applicable in those countries where no busy tone detection is supported.
NOTE: The setting of WSW11 is effective only when selectors 5 and 6 on WSW05 are set to "0, 1" or
"1, 1" (Busy tone detection).
Selectors 1 and 2: Busy tone frequency band control

These selectors set the frequency band for busy tone to be detected.
Selectors 3 through 8: ON/OFF time length ranges for busy tone

These selectors set the ON and OFF time length ranges for busy tone to be detected. If more than
one selector is set to "1," the ranges become wider. For example, if selectors 4 and 5 are set to "1,"
the ON and OFF time length ranges are from 175 to 600 milliseconds.

App. 4-15

Confidential

WSW12 (Signal detection condition setting)

Selector
No.
1
2
3
4

5
6

Function

Setting and Specifications

Min. detection period required
for interpreting incoming
calling signal (CI) as OFF

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

1500 ms
500 ms
700 ms
900 ms

Max. detection period for
incoming calling signal (CI)
being OFF

No. 3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

6 sec.
7 sec.
9 sec.
11 sec.

Min. detection period required
for acknowledging incoming
calling signal (CI) as ON

No. 5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

800 ms (1000 ms*)
200 ms
250 ms
150 ms

Line connection timing

Not used.

0: Ringer-OFF
period (default)

1: Ringer-ON
period

sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)
*1000 milliseconds in Chinese models.
Selectors 1 through 4: Min. detection period required for interpreting incoming calling signal (CI)
as OFF
Max. detection period for incoming calling signal (CI) being OFF

If the machine detects the OFF state of a CI signal for the period greater than the value set by
selectors 1 and 2 and less than the value set by selectors 3 and 4, it interprets the CI signal as OFF.
Selectors 5 and 6: Min. detection period required for acknowledging incoming calling signal (CI) as
ON

These selectors set the period required to make the machine acknowledge itself to be called. That is,
if the machine continuously detects a CI signal with the frequency set by selectors 1 through 4 on
WSW14 during the period set by these selectors 5 and 6, then it acknowledges the call.
Selector 7:

Line connection timing

If a line is connected in a ringer-ON period, FAX models equipped with SDAA circuits may
malfunction due to the ringer voltage. To make the line connection stable, this selector should be set
to "0" so that a line is connected in a ringer-OFF period.

App. 4-16

Confidential

WSW13 (Modem setting)

Selector
No.
1
2

3
4

Function

Setting and Specifications

Cable equalizer

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

0 km
1.8 km
3.6 km
5.6 km

Reception level

No. 3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

-43 dBm
-47 dBm
-49 dBm
-51 dBm

0:
0:
0:
0:

5
|

Modem attenuator

0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB

1:
1:
1:
1:

8 dB
4 dB
2 dB
1 dB

The modem should be adjusted according to the user's line conditions.
Selectors 1 and 2: Cable equalizer

These selectors are used to improve the pass-band characteristics of analogue signals on a line.
(Attenuation in the high-band frequency is greater than in the low-band frequency.)
Set these selectors according to the distance from the telephone switchboard to the machine.
Selectors 3 and 4: Reception level

These selectors set the optimum receive signal level.
Selectors 5 through 8: Modem attenuator

These selectors are used to adjust the transmitting level attenuation of the modem when the reception
level at the remote station is improper due to line loss. This function applies for G3 protocol signals.
Setting two or more selectors to "1" produces addition of attenuation assigned to each selector.
If selector 8 on WSW23 is set to "0," this setting is so limited that 10 dB (1 dB in France) or higher
setting only is effective. Note that in Japan and China, 9 dB or higher and 2 dB or higher settings
only are effective, respectively, regardless of whether selector 8 on WSW23 is set to "0."

App. 4-17

Confidential

WSW14 (AUTO ANS facility setting)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Setting and Specifications
No.

Frequency band selection (lower
limit) for incoming calling signal (CI)

No.
3
4

Frequency band selection (upper
limit) for incoming calling signal (CI)

No.

5
|

No. of rings in AUTO ANS mode

1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

: 30 Hz
: 55 Hz
: 70 Hz
: 200 Hz

5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

13 Hz
15 Hz
23 Hz
20 Hz

8
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Fixed to once
1 to 6 times
1 to 8 times
2 to 8 times
1 to 2 times
1 to 3 times
1 to 4 times
1 to 5 times
2 to 3 times
2 to 4 times
2 to 5 times
2 to 6 times
1 to 10 times
2 to 10 times
3 to 5 times
4 to 10 times

Selectors 1 through 4: Frequency band selection for incoming calling signal (CI)

These selectors are used to select the frequency band of CI for activating the AUTO ANS facility.
In the French models, if the user sets the PBX to OFF from the control panel, the setting made by
selectors 1 and 2 will take no effect and the frequency's lower limit will be fixed to 32 Hz. (Even if
the setting made by these selectors does not apply, it will be printed on the configuration list.)
Selectors 5 through 8: No. of rings in AUTO ANS mode

These selectors set the number of rings to initiate the AUTO ANS facility.

App. 4-18

Confidential

WSW15 (REDIAL facility setting)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
Redial interval
2

3
|

No. of redialings

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

5 minutes
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes

No. 3
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

|
1

Not used.

CRP option

0: Disable

16 times
1 times
2 times
3 times
|
15 times

1: Enable

Selectors 1 through 6: Redial interval and No. of redialings

The machine redials by the number of times set by selectors 3 through 6 at intervals set by selectors
1 and 2.
Selector 8:

CRP option

If a command error occurs in the machine (calling station), the machine usually waits for three
seconds and then makes a retry three times. This CRP option is a request command that can be sent
from the called station for requesting the calling station to retry the failed command immediately.

App. 4-19

Confidential

WSW16 (Function setting 1)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

Not used.

ITU-T (CCITT) superfine
recommendation

3
|
6

Not used.

7
8

0: OFF

1: ON

Max. document length limitation

0: 400 cm

1: 90 cm

Stop key pressed during reception

0: Not functional

1: Functional

NOTE: Selector 7 is applicable to models equipped with ADF unit.
Selector 2:

ITU-T (CCITT) superfine recommendation

If this selector is set to "1," the machine communicates in ITU-T (CCITT) recommended superfine
mode (15.4 lines/mm). If it is set to "0," it communicates in native superfine mode.
Selector 7:

Max. document length limitation

This selector is used to select the maximum length of a document to be sent.
Selector 8:

Stop key pressed during reception

If this selector is set to "1," pressing the Stop key can stop the current receiving operation. The
received data will be lost.

App. 4-20

Confidential

WSW17 (Function setting 2)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
1
1

Off-hook alarm

3
4

Not used.

Calendar clock type

Not used.

Non-ring reception

Not used.

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

No alarm
Always valid
Valid except when
'call reservation' is selected.

U.S.A. type

1: European type

OFF

1: ON

Selectors 1 and 2: Off-hook alarm

These selectors activate or deactivate the alarm function which sounds an alarm when the
communication is completed with the handset being off the hook.
Selector 5:

Calendar clock type

If this selector is set to "0" (USA), the MM/DD/YY hh:mm format applies; if it is set to "1"
(Europe), the DD/MM/YY hh:mm format applies: DD is the day, MM is the month, YY is the last
two digits of the year, hh is the hour, and mm is the minute.
Selector 7:

Non-ring reception

Setting this selector to "1" makes the machine receive calls without ringer sound if the Ring Delay is
set to 0.

App. 4-21

Confidential

WSW18 (Function setting 3)

Selector
No.
1

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

2
3

Detection enabled time for CNG
or "no tone"

4
5

Not used.

Registration of station ID

No. 2
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

40 sec.
0 sec. (No detection)
5 sec.
80 sec.

0: Permitted

7
Tone sound monitoring
8

No. 7
0
0
1

8
0
1
0

:
:
:

1: Prohibited

No monitoring
No monitoring
Up to phase B at the
calling station only
All transmission phases
both at the calling and
called stations
sec.: second(s)

Selectors 2 and 3: Detection enabled time for CNG or "no tone"

After the line is connected via the external telephone or by picking up the handset of the machine, the
machine can detect a CNG signal or "no tone" for the time length specified by these selectors. The
setting specified by these selectors becomes effective only when selector 8 on WSW20 is set to "1."
Selector 6:

Registration of station ID

Setting this selector to "0" permits the registration of station ID for Austrian and Czech models.
Selectors 7 and 8: Tone sound monitoring

These selectors set monitoring specifications of the tone sound inputted from the line.

App. 4-22

Confidential

WSW19 (Transmission speed setting)

Selector
No.
1
|
3

Function

Setting and Specifications

First transmission speed choice
for fallback

No. 1
No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

2,400 bps
4,800 bps
7,200 bps
9,600 bps
12,000 bps

4
|
6

Last transmission speed choice
for fallback

V.34 mode (Not used.)

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

V.17 mode

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

14,400 bps

NOTE: Selector 7 takes effect only in models supporting V.34 mode.
Selectors 1 through 6: First and last choices of transmission speed for fallback

These selectors are used to set the MODEM speed range. With the first transmission speed choice
specified by selectors 1 through 3, the machine attempts to establish the transmission link via the
MODEM. If the establishment fails, the machine automatically steps down to the next lowest speed
and attempts to establish the transmission link again. The machine repeats this sequence while
stepping down the transmission speed to the last choice specified by selectors 4 through 6.
If the MODEM always falls back to a low transmission speed (e.g., 4,800 bps), set the first
transmission speed choice to the lower one (e.g., modify it from 12,000 bps to 7,200 bps) in order to
deactivate the high-speed MODEM function and reduce the training time for shorter transmission
time.
Generally, to save the transmission time, set the last transmission speed choice to a higher one.
Selector 7: V.34 mode (Not used.)

Permitting the V.34 mode with this selector makes WSW38 to WSW40, and WSW41 (selectors 5 to
8) effective.

App. 4-23

Confidential

WSW20 (Overseas communications mode setting)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

EP* tone prefix

0: OFF

1: ON

Overseas communications mode
(Reception)

0: 2100 Hz

1: 1100 Hz

Overseas communications mode
(Transmission)

0: OFF

1: Ignores DIS once.

Min. time length from reception
of CFR to start of transmission
of video signals

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

6
7

At CNG detection, elimination
of chattering noise

No. 6
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

Limitation on CNG detection

4
5

0: OFF

100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
Yes, at both ON/OFF timings
Yes, at OFF timing
No
No
1: ON
ms: millisecond(s)
* EP: Echo protection

NOTE: Selectors 6 and 7 are applicable to models equipped with an SDAA circuit.
Selector 1:

EP tone prefix

Setting this selector to "1" makes the machine transmit a 1700 Hz echo protection (EP) tone
immediately preceding training in V.29 modulation system to prevent omission of training signals.
Prefixing an EP tone is useful when the machine fails to transmit at the V.29 modem speed and
always has to fall back to 4,800 bps transmission.
The setting made by this selector takes effect only when the Overseas Mode is set to ON.
Selectors 2 and 3: Overseas communications mode

These selectors should be used if the machine malfunctions in overseas communications. According
to the communications error state, select the signal specifications.
Setting selector 2 to "1" allows the machine to use 1100 Hz CED signal instead of 2100 Hz in
receiving operation. This prevents malfunctions resulting from echoes, since the 1100 Hz signal does
not disable the echo suppressor (ES) while the 2100 Hz signal does.
Setting selector 3 to "1" allows the machine to ignore a DIS signal sent from the called station once
in sending operation. This operation suppresses echoes since the first DIS signal immediately follows
a 2100 Hz CED (which disables the ES) so that it is likely to be affected by echoes in the disabled
ES state. However, such a disabled ES state will be removed soon so that the second and the
following DIS signals are not susceptible to data distortion due to echoes. Note that some models
when called may cause error by receiving a self-outputted DIS.
The setting made by selector 3 takes effect only when the Overseas Communications Mode is set to
ON. (The setting made by selector 2 is always effective.)
App. 4-24

Confidential

Selectors 8: Limitation on CNG detection

If this selector is set to "1," the machine detects a CNG signal according to the condition preset by
selectors 2 and 3 on WSW18 after a line is connected. If it is set to "0," the machine detects a CNG
signal as long as the line is connected.

WSW21 (TAD setting 1)

Selector
No.

1
|
5

Function

Setting and Specifications

"No tone" detection period
during recording of ICM
(Max. waiting time for voice
signal)

No. 1
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

|
|

6
7

Taping the call

No. 6
0
0

7
0 :
1 :

1
1

0 :
1 :

Erasure of message stored in the
memory after the message
transfer

0: Yes

:
:
:
:

No detection
1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
|
: 6 sec. (default)
|
: 31 sec.

Enable (signaling for U.S.A.) (A)
Enable (signaling for countries
except U.S.A.) (B)
Enable (without signaling) (C)
Disable (D)
1: No
sec.: second(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 5 are applicable to models equipped with ICM recorder.
NOTE: Selectors 6 through 8 are applicable to models with a built-in TAD.
Selectors 1 through 5: "No tone" detection period during recording of ICM (Max. waiting time for
voice signal)

If the machine detects "no tone"* during recording of ICM for the time length specified by these
selectors, it automatically stops recording ICM and disconnects the line. (*Tone whose level is less
than the threshold specified by selectors 1 through 3 on WSW33 is interpreted as "no tone.")
Selectors 6 and 7: Taping the call

These selectors select whether or not to tape the call. Setting them to "1, 0" enables taping the call
without signaling to the calling station that the call is being taped.
Selector 8:

Erasure of message stored in the memory after the message transfer

Setting this selector to "0" will erase the message recorded in the memory after the document
retrieval feature transfers the message.

App. 4-25

Confidential

WSW22 (ECM and call waiting caller ID)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

ECM* in sending

0: ON

1: OFF

ECM* in receiving

0: ON

1: OFF

Call Waiting Caller ID

0: ON

1: OFF

Not used.

5
|
8

Acceptable TCF bit error rate (%)
(Only at 4,800 bps)
(Not used.)

0:
0:
0:
0:

1:
1:
1:
1:

0%
0%
0%
0%

NOTE: Selector 3 is applicable to the American models.

8%
4%
2%
1%

* ECM: Error correction mode

NOTE: Selectors 5 through 8 are applicable to the Chinese, Taiwanese and Asian models only.
Selector 3:

Call Waiting Caller ID

Setting this selector to "0" allows the user to decide whether or not to interrupt the current call when
a new call comes in. If Call Waiting Caller ID service is available in the area and the user subscribes
to it, he/she can see information about his/her incoming call on the LCD.
Selectors 5 through 8: Acceptable TCF bit error rate (%) (Not used.)

Setting two or more selectors to "1" produces addition of percent assigned to each selector. If you set
selectors 7 and 8 to "1," the acceptable TCF bit error rate will be 3%.

App. 4-26

Confidential

WSW23 (Communications setting)

Selector
No.

Function

Starting point of training check
(TCF)

Setting and Specifications
0: From the head of a series of zeros
1: From any arbitrary point

Allowable training error rate

No. 2
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

0%
0.5%
1%
2%

Decoding error rate for
transmission of RTN

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

16%
14%
10%
8%

6
7

Not used.

Limitation of attenuation level

2
3

0: Yes

1: No

NOTE: Selector 8 is not applicable to the French models.
Selector 1:

Starting point of training check (TCF)

At the training phase of receiving operation, the called station detects for 1.0 second a training check
(TCF) command, a series of zeros which is sent from the calling station for 1.5 seconds to verify
training and give the first indication of the acceptability of the line.
This selector sets the starting point from which the called station should start counting those zeros. If
this selector is set to "0," the called station starts counting zeros 100 milliseconds after the head of a
series of zeros is detected.
If it is set to "1," the called station starts counting zeros upon detection of 10-millisecond successive
zeros 50 milliseconds after the head of a series of zeros is detected. In this case, if the detection of
10-millisecond successive zeros is too late, the data counting period will become less than 1.0 second,
making the called station judge the line condition unacceptable.
Selectors 2 and 3: Allowable training error rate

The called station checks a series of zeros gathered in training (as described in Selector 1) according
to the allowable training error rate set by these selectors. If the called station judges the line
condition to be accepted, it responds with CFR; if not, it responds with FTT.
Selectors 4 and 5: Decoding error rate for transmission of RTN

The machine checks the actual decoding errors and then transmits an RTN according to the decoding
error rate (Number of lines containing an error per page ÷ Total number of lines per page) set by
these selectors.
Selector 8:

Limitation of attenuation level

Setting this selector to "0" limits the transmitting level of the modem to 10 dB (1 dB in France).
This setting has priority over the settings selected by WSW02 (selectors 5 through 8) and WSW13
(selectors 5 through 8).
App. 4-27

Confidential

WSW24 (TAD setting 2)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications
No.

1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

15 sec.
20 sec.
30 sec.
50 sec.

No.

:
:
:
:

4 sec.
3 sec.
2 sec.
1 sec.

1
2

Maximum OGM recording time

Time length from CML ON to
start of pseudo ring backtone
transmission

3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

Attenuator for playback of
ICM/OGM to the line
(Selectable from the range of
0-15 dB)

0:
0:
0:
0:

0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB

5
|
8

1:
1:
1:
1:

8 dB
4 dB
2 dB
1 dB
sec.: second(s)

Selectors 1 and 2: Maximum OGM recording time

These selectors specify the allowable maximum recording time for an OGM.
Selectors 3 and 4: Time length from CML ON to start of pseudo ring backtone transmission

These selectors specify the length of time from CML-ON up to the start of pseudo ring backtone
transmission.
In models with OGM facilities, the settings made by these selectors also apply to the length of time
from CML-ON up to the start of OGM transmission.
Selectors 5 through 8:

Attenuator for playback of ICM/OGM to the line

Setting two or more selectors to "1" produces addition of attenuation assigned to each selector.
This setting is not limited by selector 8 on WSW23.

App. 4-28

Confidential

WSW25 (TAD setting 3)

Selector
No.

Function

Delay time for starting "no tone"
detection in the external TAD
mode

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0:
1:
0:
1:

0 sec.
8 sec.
16 sec.
24 sec.

Threshold level of "no tone"
detection in the external TAD
mode

No. 3
0
0
1
1

4
0:
1:
0:
1:

-43 dB (A)
-46 dB (B)
-49 dB (C)
-51 dB (D)

Pause between paging number and
PIN

No. 5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
4

Setting and Specifications

5
|
7

7
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

2 sec.
4 sec.
6 sec.
8 sec.
10 sec.
12 sec.
14 sec.
16 sec.

Not used.
sec.: second(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 4 are not applicable to the U.S.A. models, models without "no tone"
detecting function in the external TAD mode, or models with Rockwell modem V24.
NOTE: Selectors 5 through 7 are applicable to the U.S.A. models only.
Selectors 1 and 2: Delay time for starting "no tone" detection in the external TAD mode

These selectors take effect only in the external TAD mode. The machine delays starting detection of
"no tone" by the time length specified by these selectors.
The total length of the delay time specified by these selectors and the maximum waiting time
specified by WSW21 (selectors 1 through 5) should not exceed 40 seconds.
Selectors 3 and 4: Threshold level of "no tone" detection in the external TAD mode

These selectors specify the threshold level of "no tone" detection in the external TAD mode.
Selectors 5 through 7:

Pause between paging number and PIN

These selectors set the pause time between a telephone number being paged and PIN (personal
identification number) for the paging feature.

App. 4-29

Confidential

WSW26 (Function setting 4)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
2

Not used.

Dialing during document
reading into the temporary
memory in in-memory message
transmission

4
5

6
7

0: Disable

1: Enable

No. of CNG cycles to be
detected
(when the line is connected via
the external telephone except in
the external TAD mode or via
the built-in telephone)

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

0.5
1
1.5
2

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)

No. of CNG cycles to be
detected
(when the line is connected via
the external telephone in the
external TAD mode, via the
built-in telephone in the TAD
mode, or via the machine in the
automatic reception of the F/T
mode)

No. 6
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

0.5
1
1.5
2

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)

Not used.

Selector 3: Dialing during document reading into the temporary memory in in-memory message
transmission

If this selector is set to "0," the machine waits for document reading into the memory to complete and
then starts dialing. This enables the machine to list the total number of pages in the header of the
facsimile message.
Selectors 4 and 5: No. of CNG cycles to be detected (when the line is connected via the external
telephone except in the external TAD mode or via the built-in telephone)

The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects the CNG by the number of cycles
specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone except in the
external TAD mode or via the built-in telephone.
Selectors 6 and 7: No. of CNG cycles to be detected (when the line is connected via the external
telephone in the external TAD mode, via the built-in telephone in the TAD mode,
or via the machine in the automatic reception of the F/T mode)

The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects the CNG by the number of cycles
specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone in the external TAD
mode, via the built-in telephone in the TAD mode, or via the machine in the automatic reception of
the F/T mode.

App. 4-30

Confidential

WSW27 (Function setting 5)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Ringer OFF setting

0: Yes

1: No

Automatic playback of OGM when
switched to the TAD mode

0: No

1: Yes

Detection of distinctive ringing
pattern

0: Yes

1: No

Not used.

Recording quality

0: Normal

1: High

Recording time for high recording
quality

0: Short
(9.6 kbps)

1: Long
(8.8 kbps)

Not used.

NOTE: Selectors 4 and 5 are applicable to the U.S.A. models only.
Selector 2:

Ringer OFF setting

This selector determines whether or not the ringer can be set to OFF.
Selector 3:

Automatic playback of OGM when switched to the TAD mode

This selector determines whether or not to automatically play back an OGM the moment the machine
switches to the TAD mode.
Selector 4:

Detection of distinctive ringing pattern

If this selector is set to "1," the machine detects only the number of rings; if it is set to "0," the
machine detects the number of rings and the ringing time length to compare the detected ringing
pattern with the registered distinctive one.
Selector 6:

Recording quality

This selector determines the recording quality for the OGM and ICM. Selecting "1" (High) increases
the quality, sacrificing the recording time.
Selector 7:

Recording time for high recording quality

This setting takes effect when selector 6 is set to "1" (High). Setting this selector to "0" (Short)
further increases the recording quality, sacrificing the recording time.
The recording quality and time to be applied when this selector is set to "1" (Long) are higher and
shorter than the ones to be applied when selector 6 is set to "0" (Normal).
The recording quality and time determined by this selector being set to "1" (Long) are higher and
shorter than the ones determined by selector 6 being set to "0" (Normal).

App. 4-31

Confidential

WSW28 (Function setting 6)

Selector
No.

1
|
3

4
|
6

7
8

Function

Setting and Specifications

Transmission level of DTMF
high-band frequency signal

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0 dB
+1 dB
+2 dB
+3 dB
0 dB
-1 dB
-2 dB
-3 dB

Transmission level of
DTMF low-band frequency
signal

No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0 dB
+1 dB
+2 dB
+3 dB
0 dB
-1 dB
-2 dB
-3 dB

Not used.

Selectors 1 through 6: Transmission level of DTMF high-/low-band frequency signal

These selectors are intended for the manufacturer who tests the machine for the Standard. Never
access them.

App. 4-32

Confidential

WSW29 (Function setting 7)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Compression threshold level for
voice signals inputted via the
telephone line in the built-in
TAD operation

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

-47.0 dBm
-48.5 dBm
-50.0 dBm
-51.5 dBm
-53.0 dBm
-54.5 dBm
-56.0 dBm
OFF

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)

4
|
6

Compression threshold level for
voice signals inputted via the
handset in the built-in TAD
operation

No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

-44.0 dBm
-45.5 dBm
-47.0 dBm
-48.5 dBm
-50.0 dBm
-51.5 dBm
-53.0 dBm
OFF

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)

Impedance switching control in
pulse dialing

0: OFF

1: ON

Prompt beep when the memory
area for the activity report
becomes full

0: No

1: Yes

1
|
3

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 6 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.
NOTE: Selectors 7 and 8 are applicable only to the European versions.
Selectors 1 through 6: Compression threshold level for voice signals inputted via the telephone
line in the built-in TAD operation

If voice signals inputted via the telephone line are below the level specified by these selectors, the
TAD interprets those received voice signals as no signal, compressing the recording time.
Selector 8:

Prompt beep for activity report

This selector determines whether or not to beep if the memory area for the activity report becomes
full, for prompting you to print out the report. (Printing it out will clear the memory area.)

App. 4-33

Confidential

WSW30 (Function setting 8)

Selector
No.

Function

1
|
3

Dial tone/busy tone detection
level during recording of ICM

4
|
8

Not used.

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

-38.0 dBm
-39.5 dBm
-41.0 dBm
-42.5 dBm
-44.0 dBm
-45.5 dBm
-47.0 dBm
-48.5 dBm

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.
Selectors 1 through 3: Dial tone/busy tone detection level during recording of ICM

If the machine (called station) detects dial tone (400 Hz continuously) or busy tone (400 Hz
intermittently) exceeding the detection level specified by these selectors for the period specified by
selectors 1 through 4 on WSW35, then it interprets the calling station as being disconnected. The
machine stops TAD recording and disconnects the line.

App. 4-34

Confidential

WSW31 (Function setting 9)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Default reduction rate for
failure of automatic reduction
during recording

Not used.

(Do not disturb this selector.)

Minimum ON and OFF
duration of ringer signals
effective in distinctive ringing

6
|
8

Not used.

0: 100%

1: 70%

0: 130 ms

1: 90 ms

ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: Selector 5 is applicable only to the U.S.A. models.
Selector 2:

Default reduction rate for failure of automatic reduction during recording

This selector sets the default reduction rate to be applied if the automatic reduction function fails to
record one-page data sent from the calling station in a single page of the current recording paper.
If it is set to "0," the machine records one-page data at full size (100%) without reduction; if it is set
to "1," the machine records it at 70% size.
Selector 5:

Minimum ON and OFF duration of ringer signals effective in distinctive ringing

The ringer pattern consists of short and long rings, e.g., short-short-long rings. This selector sets the
minimum ON and OFF duration of ringer signals that are required for the machine to interpret ringer
signals as being ON or OFF. This is to prevent components of a ringer pattern from being
misinterpreted due to chattering in distinctive ringing.
The machine monitors ringer signals at 10-millisecond intervals. If the signal is ON, the machine
counts +1; if it is OFF, it counts -1. If the counter increments up to +5 or +13 when this selector is
set to "1" (90 milliseconds) or "0" (130 milliseconds), respectively, the machine interprets the current
signal as being ON.
If the counter returns to zero, the machine interprets the signal as being OFF.
If the Distinctive Ring is set to OFF, this selector is not effective.

App. 4-35

Confidential

WSW32 (Function setting 10)

Selector
No.
1
|
4
5
6

7
8

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Default resolution

No. 5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

Standard
Fine
Super fine
Photo

Default contrast

No. 7
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

Automatic
Automatic
Super light
Super dark

Selectors 5 and 6: Default resolution

These selectors set the default resolution which applies when the machine is turned on or completes a
transaction.
Selectors 7 and 8: Default contrast

These selectors set the default contrast which applies when the machine is turned on or completes a
transaction.

App. 4-36

Confidential

WSW33 (Function setting 11)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
|
3

Threshold level of "no tone"
detection during recording of
ICM

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

FAX receiving speed to be kept
within the transmission speed
limit to the PC

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
6
7
8

Report output of polled
transmission requests

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

14,400 bps
12,000 bps
9,600 bps
7,200 bps

0: Yes
No. 7
0
0
1
1

Comfortable noise level

8
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

-48 dBm
-50 dBm
-52 dBm
-54 dBm
-56 dBm
-58 dBm
-60 dBm
-62 dBm

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G) (default)
(H)

1: No
OFF
Low
Medium
High

(A)
(B)
(C)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.
Selectors 1 through 3: Threshold level of "no tone" detection during recording of ICM

If the tone level during recording of ICM is less than the threshold setting made by these selectors,
the tone is interpreted as "no tone." When the "no tone" state is kept for the period specified by
selectors 1 through 5 on WSW21, the machine stops recording ICM and disconnects the line.
Selectors 4 and 5: FAX receiving speed to be kept within the transmission speed limit to the PC

To transmit FAX data being received from other machine to the connected PC, you may need to keep
the FAX receiving speed within the transmission speed limit specified for the PC. In an initial
negotiation sequence for transmission, the machine responds to the calling station with the allowable
FAX receiving speed specified by these selectors.
Selectors 7 and 8: Comfortable noise level

These selectors set the level of noise to be added during playing-back of voice signals recorded with
no-signal compression.
If they are set to "0, 0," no noise will be added.

App. 4-37

Confidential

WSW34 (Function setting 12)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Erasing time length of ICM tone
recorded preceding the tone
detection starting point in the
case of automatic line
disconnection due to no voice
signal received

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

No. of CNG cycles to be
detected
(when the line is connected via
the external telephone in the
external TAD mode or via the
machine in F/T mode)

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

6
7

Number of DTMF tone signals
for inhibiting the detection of
CNG during external TAD
operation

No. 6
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

Not used.

1
|
3

4
5

:
:
:
:

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0 sec.
1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
4 sec.
5 sec.
6 sec.
7 sec.
0.5
1
1.5
2

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)

3
2
1
OFF
sec.: second(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 5 are applicable to models equipped with built-in TAD.
Selectors 1 through 3: Erasing time length of ICM tone recorded preceding the tone detection
starting point in the case of automatic line disconnection due to no voice
signal received

If the machine has disconnected the line after detection of disconnection tone in ICM recording, it
erases tone recorded preceding the tone detection starting point for the time length set by these
selectors.
Selectors 4 and 5: No. of CNG cycles to be detected (when the line is connected via the external
telephone in the external TAD mode or via the machine in F/T mode)

The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects a CNG signal by the number of
cycles specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone in the
external TAD mode or via the machine in F/T mode.
Selectors 6 and 7: Number of DTMF tone signals for inhibiting the detection of CNG during external
TAD operation

If the machine receives this specified number of DTMF tone signals during external TAD operation,
it will not detect CNG afterwards.
If these selectors are set to "1, 1," the CNG detection will not be inhibited.

App. 4-38

Confidential

WSW35 (Function setting 13)

Selector
No.

1
|
4

5
|
8

Function

Setting and Specifications

Max. detection period of dial
tone/busy tone during recording of
ICM

No. 1
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
0
1

3
0
0
1
0
|
1

4
0
1
0
0

:
:
:
:

No detection
1 sec.
2 sec.
4 sec.
|
15 sec.

Not used.
sec.: second(s)

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 4 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.
Selectors 1 through 4: Max. detection period of dial tone/busy tone during recording of ICM

If the machine (called station) detects dial tone or busy tone exceeding the detection level specified
by selectors 1 through 3 on WSW30 for the period specified by these selectors, then it interprets the
state as the calling station's breaking the connection, stops recording the ICM, and disconnects the
line.

App. 4-39

Confidential

WSW36 (Function setting 14)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

ECP mode*

0: ON

OFF

Recovery from Inactive PC
Interface

0: Disable

Enable

PC Power-off Recognition Time

0: Normal

Long

Not used.

Escape from phase C

0: Yes

6
|
8

Extension of incoming calling
signal (CI) frequency band
specified by selectors 1 through 4
on WSW14

No. 6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0 (Ignored)
4 (448 Hz)
8 (244 Hz)
12 (162 Hz)
16 (122 Hz)
20 (97 Hz)
24 (81 Hz)
28 (69 Hz)
*ECP (Enhanced Capabilities Port)

NOTE: Selectors 2 and 3 on WSW36 take effect only when the "Monitoring the PC ON/OFF state" is
enabled with selectors 1 and 2 on WSW46.
Selector 1:

ECP mode

The ECP mode enhances the normal bidirectional communications between the machine and the
connected PC for higher transmission speed.
Selector 2:

Recovery from Inactive PC Interface

If the machine recognizes via the STB signal line that the connected PC is powered off, it will turn
the PC interface outputs Low to protect the PC from hazards that could be caused by weak electric
current accidentally flown from the machine.
This selector determines whether or not the machine should recover from the inactive PC interface to
normal interfacing state upon receipt of data from the PC.
Selector 3:

PC Power-off Recognition Time

This selector sets the time length from when the machine detects the PC powered off until it
recognizes the detected state as power-off.
If selector 2 is set to "0," it is recommended that selector 3 be set to "1"; otherwise, the machine may
mistakenly detect PC powered off.
Selector 5:

Escape from phase C

This selector determines whether or not the machine will escape from phase C when it detects an
RTC (Return to Control) in non-ECM mode or an RCP (Return to Control Partial page) in ECM
mode.

App. 4-40

Confidential

Selectors 6 through 8: Extension of incoming calling signal (CI) frequency band specified by
selectors 1 through 4 on WSW14

At the start of reception, if the machine detects the frequency of a CI signal specified by selectors 1
through 4 on WSW14, it starts the ringer sounding. However, the machine may fail to detect the CI
signal normally due to noise superimposed at the time of reception. To prevent it, use selectors 6
through 8 on WSW36.
If the machine detects higher frequencies than the setting made here, it regards them as noise and
interprets the detecting state as being normal, allowing the ringer to keep sounding according to the
preset number of ringers (until it starts automatic reception of FAX data in the FAX mode or enters
the TAD mode in the TEL mode).

WSW37 (Function setting 15)

Selector
No.

Function

Printout of the stored image data of an unsent
document onto an error report

0: No

Yes

Erasure of the stored image data of an unsent
document at the time of the subsequent inmemory message transmission

0: No

Yes

3
|
8

Selector 1:

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Printout of the stored image data of an unsent document onto an error report

This selector determines whether or not to print out the 1st-page image data of a document onto the
error report if the document image data stored in the temporary memory cannot be transmitted
normally.
Selector 2:

Erasure of the stored image data of an unsent document at the time of the
subsequent in-memory message transmission

If in-memory message transmission fails repeatedly when selector 1 is set to "1," the temporary
memory will be occupied with image data. Setting selector 2 to "1" will automatically erase the
stored 1st-page image data of an unsent document at the time of the subsequent in-memory message
transmission only when recording paper or toner runs out.

App. 4-41

Confidential

WSW38 (V.34 transmission settings) (Not used.)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
1
1

Setting of the equalizer

2
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

Automatic
Automatic
Fixed to 4 points
Fixed to 16 points

Sending level of guard tone at phase
2

0: Normal - 7 db

1: Normal

Stepping down the transmission
speed at fallback each

0: 2,400 bps

1: 4,800 bps

5
6

No. 5
0

6
0

Automatic control of modem's
EQM gain for proper transmission
speed choice

: For higher transmission speed
than the current setting
: No change from the current
setting
: For lower transmission speed
than the current setting
: For further lower transmission
than the setting made by 1, 0

Redialing when a communications
error occurs

0: ON

OFF

Detection of CED for stopping
CNG

0: ON

OFF

NOTE: WSW38 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in models
supporting V.34 mode.
Selectors 1 and 2: Setting of the equalizer

These selectors set the equalizer's training level to be applied if the machine fails to send training due
to weak line connection. If these selectors are set to "0, 0" or "0, 1," the modem will automatically
set the appropriate training level.
Selector 3:

Sending level of guard tone at phase 2

This selector sets the sending level of guard tone for 1800 Hz to be sent at Phase 2 in the V. 34 mode.
Selector 4:

Stepping down the transmission speed at fallback each

This selector determines how much the modem steps down the transmission speed at fallback when
called by the remote station. If this selector is set to "1," the modem may step down the transmission
speed from 33,600 bps to 28,800 bps by one-time fallback.
Selectors 5 and 6: Automatic control of modem's EQM gain for proper transmission speed choice

These selectors determine how the modem controls the EQM (Eye Quality Monitor) gain for proper
choice of the transmission speed, which applies if the modem selects higher transmission speed than
the possible speed so that it always repeats falling back.
Selector 8:

Detection of CED for stopping CNG

If this selector is set to "0," the detection time of CED specified by WSW43, selectors 4 and 5 will
apply.

App. 4-42

Confidential

WSW39 (V.34 transmission speed) (Not used.)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
|
4

First transmission speed choice for
fallback

5
|
8

Last transmission speed choice for
fallback

No. 1
No. 5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

3
7
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

4
8
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

2,400 bps
4,800 bps
7,200 bps
9,600 bps
12,000 bps
14,400 bps
16,800 bps
19,200 bps
21,600 bps
24,000 bps
26,400 bps
28,800 bps
31,200 bps
33,600 bps
33,600 bps
33,600 bps

NOTE: WSW39 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in models
supporting V.34 mode. For the transmission speed setting in other modes, refer to WSW19.
Selectors 1 through 8: First and last choices of transmission speed for fallback

These selectors are used to set the modem speed range. With the first transmission speed choice
specified by selectors 1 through 4, the machine attempts to establish the transmission link via the
modem. If the establishment fails, the machine automatically steps down to the next highest speed
and attempts to establish the transmission link again. The machine repeats this sequence while
stepping down the transmission speed to the last choice specified by selectors 5 through 8.
If the modem always falls back to a low transmission speed (e.g., 24,000 bps), set the first
transmission speed choice to the lower one (e.g., modify it from 31,200 bps to 26,400 bps) in order
to deactivate the high-speed modem function and reduce the training time for shorter transmission
time.
WSW39 will be limited by selectors 3 through 8 on WSW40.

App. 4-43

Confidential

WSW40 (V.34 modem settings) (Not used.)

Selector
No.
1
2

3
|
8

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8

Masking of symbol rate(s)

Not masking

Masking

0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1

3429 symbols/sec
3200 symbols/sec
3000 symbols/sec
2800 symbols/sec
Not used.
2400 symbols/sec
sec: second(s)

NOTE: WSW40 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in models
supporting V.34 mode.
Selectors 3 through 8: Masking of symbol rate(s)

These selectors allow you to limit the transmission speed range in V.34 mode by masking the desired
symbol rate(s). Transmission speeds assigned to the symbol rates are listed on the next page. The
setting made by these selectors will limit the setting made by selectors 1 through 4 on WSW39.
If selector 3 is set to "1" to mask the 3429 symbols/second when the first transmission speed choice
is 33,600 bps (specified by selectors 1 through 4 on WSW39), for example, then the allowable
maximum transmission speed will be limited to 31,200 bps. If selector 8 is set to "1" to mask the
2400 symbols/second when the first transmission speed choice is 33,600 bps, then the allowable
maximum transmission speed remains 33,600 bps.
If selector 8 is set to "1" to mask the 2400 symbols/second when the first transmission speed choice
is 21,600 bps (specified by selectors 1 through 4 on WSW39), then the allowable maximum
transmission speed remains 21,600 bps but the minimum transmission speed will be limited to 4,800
bps.

App. 4-44

Confidential

Symbol rate Transmission speed Symbol rate Transmission speed Symbol rate Transmission speed
(bps)
(bps)
(bps)
2400
2,400
3000
4,800
3429
4,800
4,800
7,200
7,200
7,200
9,600
9,600
9,600
12,000
12,000
12,000
14,400
14,400
14,400
16,800
16,800
16,800
19,200
19,200
19,200
21,600
21,600
21,600
24,000
24,000
2800
4,800
26,400
28,800
7,200
28,800
31,200
9,600
3200
4,800
33,600
12,000
7,200
14,400
9,600
16,800
12,000
19,200
14,400
21,600
16,800
24,000
19,200
26,400
21,600
24,000
26,400
28,800
31,200

App. 4-45

Confidential

WSW41 (ON-duration of the scanning light source)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
|
3

ON-duration of the scanning light
source at room temperature

I-FAX relay report

5
|
8

(Not used.)

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0: ON
No. 5
0
0
0
0
0

Modem attenuator

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

16 hours
24 hours
12 hours
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
10 minutes
0 minute

1: OFF
6
0
0
0
0
1

7
0
0
1
1
0

8
0
1
0
1
0

:
:
:
:
:

|
1

-10 dBm
-11 dBm
-12 dBm
-13 dBm
-14 dBm
|
-25 dBm

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to CCD models.
Selectors 1 through 3: ON-duration of the scanning light source at room temperature (Not used.)

If the scanning operation is started when the scanning light source is off, then it will come on for
scanning. These selectors determine how long the light source is ON after scanning.
If these selectors are set to "1, 1, 1," the light source goes off immediately after the scanning
sequence.
Selectors 5 through 8: Modem attenuator

These selectors are used to adjust the transmitting level of the modem when the reception level at the
remote station is improper due to line loss. This function applies to super G3 protocol signals.

App. 4-46

Confidential

WSW42 (Internet mail settings) (Not used.)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Access to the incoming mail
(POP3) server
(Periodical or on-demand)

0: Disable

1: Enable

Access to the outgoing mail
(SMTP) server

0: Disable

1: Enable

I-FAX relay

0: Disable

1: Enable

4
|
8

Not used.

NOTE: WSW42 is applicable to models equipped with LAN interface.

WSW43 (Function setting 21)

Selector
No.
1

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Wait time for PC-Fax reception (Class 2)
and FPTS command transmission

No. 2
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

50 ms
100 ms
150 ms
0 ms

4
5

Detection time of 2100 Hz CED or ANSam

No. 4
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms

Not used.

Automatic start of remote maintenance

0: No

1: Yes

JPEG coding

0: Disable

1: Enable

2
3

ms: millisecond(s)
z

Selector 8:

JPEG coding

Setting this selector to "0" disables the machine from sending/receiving JPEG color images and from
receiving JPEG monochrome images.

App. 4-47

Confidential

WSW44 (Speeding up scanning-1) (Not used.)

Selector
No.
1
|
5

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 :

6
|
8

Effective time length of the
white level compensation data
obtained beforehand

0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Obtained compensation data
ineffective
1 min.
3 min.
5 min.
10 min.
15 min.
20 min.
30 min.
min.: minute(s)

Selectors 6 through 8: Effective time length of the white level compensation data obtained
beforehand

If you set documents in the ADF and the document front sensor detects them, the controller will
make correction of the reference voltage to be applied to white level compensation for document
scanning before the Copy key is pressed.
These selectors determine how long compensation data obtained beforehand will keep effective.

App. 4-48

Confidential

WSW45 (Speeding up scanning-2)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

Delay time from when
documents are set until the
ADF starts drawing them in
(Not used.)

1
|
3

4
|
6

Periodical correction intervals
of the reference voltage to be
applied to white level
compensation for document
scanning, during standby
(Not used.)

Standby position of the CIS unit

Line polarity reversal detector

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 :
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

No automatic drawing-in
1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
4 sec.
5 sec.
6 sec.
7 sec.
No correction of reference
voltage during standby
10 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
3 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.

0: CIS home position

1: Location of
the white reference
film

0: Disable

1: Enable
sec.: second(s), min: minute(s)

Selectors 1 through 3: Delay time from when documents are set until the ADF starts drawing them in
(Not used.)

These selectors determine how long the ADF will delay automatic drawing-in of documents (to the
scanning standby position) after you set them in the ADF, as well as determining whether or not the
ADF automatically draws in documents.
Selectors 4 through 6: Periodical correction intervals of the reference voltage applied to white level
compensation for document scanning, during standby (Not used.)

These selectors set the correction intervals (in seconds) of the reference voltage to be applied to white
level compensation for document scanning during standby, as well as determining whether or not the
controller makes the reference voltage correction during standby. (Conventionally, the correction has
been made immediately before the start of actual scanning)
This function takes effect in copying. Making the correction during standby may shorten the
preparation time for copying.
NOTE: Do not access these selectors.
Selector 7:

Standby position of the CIS unit

This selector determines whether the standby position of the CIS unit should be the home position or
the location of the white reference film (attached to the inside of the scanner top cover). If the
location of the reference film is selected, the CIS unit will not return to the home position so as to
shorten the travel time, decreasing the preparation time for copying.

App. 4-49

Confidential

Selector 8:

Line polarity reversal detector

When the remote station breaks the connection, a line polarity reversal occurs. Enabling the polarity
reversal detector with this selector allows the machine to detect the polarity reversal if detected when
the user is leaving a message on the station's answering machine.

WSW46 (Monitor of power ON/OFF state and parallel port kept at high)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

: Disable
: Monitor SELECT IN
: Monitor STROBE
: Monitor both SELECT IN and
STROBE

1
2

Monitoring the PC ON/OFF
state

Parallel port output pins kept at
high level

0: Enable

1: Disable

Previous filtering parameters for
white level compensation
(Not used.)

0: Enable

1: Disable

5
|
8

Not used.

NOTE: Selector 4 is not applicable to models equipped with flat-bed scanner.
Selectors 1 and 2: Monitoring the PC ON/OFF state

For the related functions, refer to WSW36, selectors 2 and 3.
Selector 3:

Parallel port output pins kept at high level

Setting this selector to "0" will keep all parallel output pins of the machine at high level. Use this
setting if Resource Manager (bundled with MFC models) installed to WindowsNT running on the
connected PC fails to monitor the power ON/OFF state of the machine.
Selector 4:

Previous filtering parameters for white level compensation (Not used.)

At the start of scanning operation, the machine usually initializes white and black level data stored in
the EEPROM by scanning the white reference film attached to the inside of the scanner top cover.
After long use of the machine, however, the film may be contaminated with dust or dirt. Accordingly,
incorrect white level data will be set up so that white vertical streaks will be brought on the scanning
result.
Setting this selector to "0" (Enabled) will apply previously saved white level data instead of new
incorrect compensation.

App. 4-50

Confidential

WSW47 (Switching between high- and full-speed USB)

Selector
No.

Function

Handling paper at the
occurrence of a paper feed
timing error

Not used.

3
4

Setting and Specifications
0: Eject paper w/o print

No. 3
0
Delay of FAX line disconnection
0
when switching to the pseudoringing external telephone
1
1

Disable the ringer of external
telephone at non-ring reception

Not used.

Disable the ringer of external
telephone with CAR signal
when caller ID service is
available

Switching between high-speed
USB and full-speed USB

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

1: Print on the current
paper

200 ms
400 ms
700 ms
1000 ms

0: No

1: Yes

0: No

1: Yes

0: Auto switching between
1: Fixed to full-speed
high-speed USB (ver. 2.0)
USB (ver. 1.1)
and full-speed USB (ver. 1.1)
ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE: Selector 1 is applicable only to models equipped with flat-bed scanner.
NOTE: Selectors 3 and 4 are applicable only to models supporting pseudo-ringing of a connected
external telephone.
Selector 1: Handling paper at the occurrence of a paper feed timing error

When feeding paper to the print start position, the machine might cause a feed timing error so that
the registration sensor goes ON signaling the presence of paper. This selector determines whether the
machine prints on the current paper or ejects the current paper without printing and prints on the
next paper.
Selectors 3 and 4: Delay of FAX line disconnection when switching to the pseudo-ringing external
telephone

When the machine receives a phone call, it can make the connected external telephone ring (so called
pseudo-ringing). During pseudo-ringing, if you pick up the handset of the external telephone, the line
might be disconnected due to cut-off of the line current.
To hold the line, the machine may supply line current by making use of the pulse generator circuit
that forms a parallel loop. This way the FAX line disconnection may be delayed. These selectors
determine the delay period.

App. 4-51

Confidential

WSW48 (USB setup latency)

Selector
No.
1
2

3
|
5

6
|
8

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

Number of PCs registrable to each of
TWAIN-enabled applications over a
network

No. 3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200

USB setup latency

No. 6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Default period
Shorter 1
Longer 1
Longer 2
Longer 3
Longer 4
Shorter 2
Shorter 3

Selectors 6 through 8:

USB setup latency

These selectors should not be disturbed.

App. 4-52

Confidential

WSW49 (End-of-copying beep and black ink print mode)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

1
2

Not used.

End-of-copying beep
(Not used.)

0: Yes

Command flag detection time

No. 4
0
0
1
1

4
5

6
7

CCD warmup time adjustment
(Not used.)

Black ink print mode

1: No
5
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

150 ms
350 ms
550 ms
750 ms

No. 6 7
0 0 : No adjustment
0 1 :
80%
1 0 : 120%
1 1 : 150%
0: Disable (default)

1: Enable
ms: millisecond(s)

Selectors 4 and 5: Command flag detection time

After receiving a command flag, the machine will wait for the command that should follow for the
time length specified by these selectors.
Selector 8: Black ink print mode

If any color ink runs out, printing is no longer possible by default. Setting this selector to "1" allows
the machine to ignore the ink empty state and print data with black ink only, resulting in a printout
missing color components.
Note: The assurance mode switch setting made by selector 3 on AMS04 (triggered with function
code 88 described in Chapter 9, Section 9.1.4.25) allows the machine to print all color and black
data as a monochrome printer with black ink only.

App. 4-53

Confidential

WSW50 (SDAA settings)

Selector
No.
1
2

5
6

7
8

Setting and Specifications

Function
Percentage voltage for
interpreting the external
telephone as being hooked up
(based on the network's standard
voltage)

No. 1
0
0
1
1

2
0
1
0
1

DC mask curve table to be
applied when the line is
connected

0:
1:

Apply the initial value specified by local
regulations
Apply table DC5 prepared specially

AC impedance to be applied
when the line is connected

0:
1:

600Ω termination
ZR termination

Current control to be applied
immediately after connection
of the line

No. 5 6
0 0 : Standard
0 1 : Increase start-up current for
termination
1 0 : Fine current control for termination
1 1 : Not used. (equal to "0, 0")

AC voltage threshold for
detection of ring

No. 7
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

50%
80%
30%
No detection

19 V
11 V
25 V
31 V

NOTE: WSW50 is applicable to models equipped with an SDAA circuit.
Selectors 5 and 6: Current control to be applied immediately after connection of the line

FAX models equipped with an SDAA circuit (on which an NTU chip is mounted) might not be
connected to a broad band line such as an ADSL (Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line) in a stable
condition. If those models fail to connect to such a line, try to change the current control to be
applied immediately after connection of the line by using selectors 5 and 6.
If selectors 5 and 6 are set to "0" and "1," respectively, the SDAA draws more current, decreasing
the period required to terminate the current control. If they are set to "1" and "0," the SDAA finely
controls precision of the termination current against the voltage to approach nearer to the specified
DC curve that specifies the current vs. voltage characteristics of the network termination. Selecting
either control may solve an unstable connection problem.

App. 4-54

Confidential

WSW51 (Function setting 16)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

Output of communications error
report when transmission
verification report is disabled

0: Enable

1: Disable

CR motor control for reducing
torque fluctuation

0: Activate

1: Deactivate

Cordless handset transmitter volume

No. 3
0
0
1
1

3
4

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

Middle (default)
Low
High
Very high

No. 5 6 7
0 0 0 :

Transmitter level 0 &
echo suppression OFF
0 0 1 : Transmitter level 1 &
echo suppression ON
0 1 0 : Transmitter level 2 &
echo suppression ON
0 1 1 : Transmitter level 3 &
echo suppression ON

5
|
7

Transmitter level and echo
suppression

Switching from ink near-empty to
ink empty when opening the scanner
cover

0: Yes

1: No
(No change from ink nearempty)

NOTE: Selectors 3 and 4 are applicable to models equipped with cordless handset.
Selector 2: CR motor control for reducing torque fluctuation

When the CR motor runs, the motor torque may vary so as to cause the head/carriage unit travel
velocity to fluctuate, affecting the print quality. Setting this selector to "0" activates the CR motor
control that regulates the motor drive current to reduce torque fluctuation, running the CR motor
smoothly.
Selectors 5 through 7: Transmitter level and echo suppression

Transmitter level 0 sets the transmitter volume to a maximum. As the level increases, the volume
decreases. The transmitter level can also be changed by the user switch and its setting is interlocked
with the setting made by these selectors.
Enabling the echo suppression suppresses echoes in both the receiver and transmitter.
Selector 8: Switching from ink near-empty to ink empty when opening the scanner cover

If this selector is set to "0," opening the scanner cover switches from ink near-empty (if detected) to
ink empty state, prompting the user to replace the near-empty ink cartridge(s) immediately.

App. 4-55

Confidential

WSW52 (Function setting 17)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 :

1
|
3

Transmitter level and echo suppression
for cordless handsets

Transmitter level 0 &
echo suppression OFF
0 0 1 : Transmitter level 1 &
echo suppression ON
0 1 0 : Transmitter level 2 &
echo suppression ON
0 1 1 : Transmitter level 3 &
echo suppression ON

4
|
6

External telephone pseudo ring signal
frequency

No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Caller ID display (number display) being
kept ON even after switching back to
TEL from FAX mode

0: Enable

1: Disable

Dial number being displayed during
faxing
(Not used.)

0: Enable

1: Disable

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

16 Hz
20 Hz
24 Hz
28 Hz
32 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz

Selectors 4 through 6: External telephone pseudo ring signal frequency

These selectors provide a choice of pseudo ring sounds of the external telephone.
Selector 7: Caller ID display (number display) being kept ON even after switching back to TEL from
FAX mode

Enabling this function keeps the caller ID display ON even after the machine switches back to the
TEL mode from the FAX mode.
Selector 8: Dial number being displayed during faxing (Not used.)

Setting this selector to "0" enables the machine to keep displaying the dial number of the FAX
receiver on the LCD until the end of faxing.

App. 4-56

Confidential

WSW53 (Function setting 18)

Selector
No.
1
2

Function

Setting and Specifications

Not used.

FSK receive timing delay
for caller ID

No. 3
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

0 ms
100 ms
150 ms
200 ms

Allowable instantaneous interrupt
period during reception of caller ID

No. 5
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

20 ms
10 ms
30 ms
0 ms

CNG detection retry after detection of
invalid CNG

0: Yes

1: No

JPEG decompressor

0: ASIC (default)

1: Software

3
4

NOTE: Selector 8 is applicable to models equipped with PhotoCapture Center.
Selectors 3 through 6: FSK receive timing delay for caller ID
Allowable instantaneous interrupt period during reception of caller ID

If a communications error occurs during a telephone conversation when the user has subscribed to
the caller ID service, change the settings of these selectors, and it may improve the communications
state. First, change the settings of selectors 3 and 4. If the error persists, change the settings of
selectors 5 and 6.
Selector 8: JPEG decompressor

By default, the ASIC (Application specified integrated circuit) in the machine decompresses the
compressed JPEG data in a memory card inserted. If it fails to decompress the data and reproduce
the image normally, switch from the ASIC to any proven decompressor software with this selector.

App. 4-57

Confidential

WSW54 (Function setting 19)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

PictBridge command delay time

No. 1
0
0
1
1

Extension of the "No. of CNG cycles
to be detected" for Easy Receive
mode

0: No

1: + 2 cycles

Recovery of cordless handset ID

0: Enable

1: Disable

1
2

2
0
1
0
1

Caller ID tone alert detection period

No. 5
0
0
1
1

:
:
:
:

10 ms (default)
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms

Transmission of caller ID wetting
pulse

0: Enable
(default)

1: Disable

Switching between DTMF and FSK
for caller ID

0: DTMF
(default)

1: FSK

5
6

6
0
1
0
1

: 100 ms (default)
:
0 ms
: 50 ms
: 200 ms

ms: millisecond(s)

NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

Selectors 1 and 2 are applicable to PictBridge-enabled models.
Selector 4 is applicable to models with cordless handset.
Selectors 5 through 7 are applicable to the UK models.
Selector 8 is applicable to the Chinese models.

Selectors 1 and 2: PictBridge command delay time

These selectors specify the PictBridge command delay time that applies when the machine responds
to the digital camera connected via PictBridge during negotiation. If the machine fails to receive data
from the digital camera, change the delay time.
Selector 3: Extension of the "No. of CNG cycles to be detected" for Easy Receive mode

In Easy Receive mode, if the machine fails to detect the CNG even after the setting made by selectors
4 and 5 on WSW26, extend the "No. of CNG cycles to be detected" by two cycles.
Selector 4: Recovery of cordless handset ID

Enabling this function automatically writes the cordless handset ID registered on the main PCB onto
the cordless PCB when the power is turned on if the ID on the cordless PCB is discrepant with the
one on the main PCB.
Selectors 5 and 6: Caller ID tone alert detection period

If the machine misdetects a tone alert for a caller ID, adjust the detection period with these selectors.

App. 4-58

Confidential

Selector 7: Transmission of caller ID wetting pulse

If the machine fails to display a caller ID due to a wetting pulse transmitted after the detection of a
tone alert, disable the transmission of caller ID wetting pulse.
Selector 8: Switching between DTMF and FSK for caller ID

If the machine fails to receive a caller ID, switch from DTMF to FSK. This setting is equivalent to
the DTMF/FSK setting made from the menu.

WSW55 (Function setting 20) (Not used.)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

1
|
8

WSW56 (Function setting 21) (Not used.)

Selector
No.

Setting and Specifications

Function

1
|
8

App. 4-59

Confidential

WSW57 (Function setting 22)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

Caller ID judgment voltage level to
discriminate caller ID event from
ring event

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0V
5 V (default)
10 V
15 V
20 V
25 V
30 V
Maximum

4
|
6

Caller ID judgment voltage level to
detect line polarity reversal

No. 4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0V
5 V (default)
10 V
15 V
20 V
25 V
30 V
Maximum

Time limit for judging a caller ID
burst ring

0: Enable
(default)

1: Disable

Start key on the machine
after dialing with cordless handset

0: Disable
(default)

1: Enable

1
|
3

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 7 are applicable to the European models.
Selectors 1 through 3: Caller ID judgment voltage level to discriminate caller ID event from ring
event

If the machine misdetects a caller ID event as a ring event due to voltage variation, it fails to display
a caller ID. If it happens, increase the judgment voltage level provided that the setting made by these
selectors is equal to or more than the setting made by selectors 4 through 6.
Selectors 4 through 6: Caller ID judgment voltage level to detect line polarity reversal

If the machine fails to detect a line polarity reversal for a caller ID due to a great difference between
the line voltage when a polarity reversal occurs and the one at the steady state, it fails to display a
caller ID. If it happens, increase the judgment voltage level provided that the setting made by these
selectors is equal to or less than the setting made by selectors 1 through 3.
Selector 7: Time limit for judging a caller ID burst ring

The time limit for judging a caller ID burst ring is enabled by default so that receiving a burst ring
out of the specified time limit causes the machine to interpret it as an ordinary call involving no
caller ID signal, resulting in no caller ID display.
When the machine fails to display a caller ID if you have the caller ID subscriber service from your
telephone company, disable the time limit with this selector to receive a caller ID burst ring
independent of the burst ring time.
App. 4-60

Confidential

Selector 8: Start key on the machine after dialing with cordless handset

Pressing the Start key on the machine to send a fax during a telephone conversation with the
cordless handset cannot start a sending operation by default. Setting this selector to "1" enables the
Start key pressed even after dialing with cordless handset.

WSW58 (Function setting 23)

Selector
No.

Function

Setting and Specifications

1
|
3

Prevention against line disconnection
during ICM recording
(Percentage of guard tone response time
relative to end-of-call tone ON time)

No. 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

Trimming of R key signal issued from
cordless handset--For connection to base
unit with PBX OFF

0: Disable
(default)

1: Enable

Call transfer to cordless handset from
telephone(s) connected in parallel with the
machine (base unit)

0: Enable
(default)

1: Disable

Extension of the "No. of CNG cycles to
be detected"
(which allows two cycles to be added to
the cycles specified by selectors 6 and 7
on WSW26 and selectors 4 and 5 on
WSW34)

0: No

1: +2 cycles

No. of busy tone detection cycles

No. 7
0
0
1
1

7
8

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1

3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

:
:
:
:

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Disable
10%
20%
30% (default)
40%
50%
60%
70%

-1 cycles
+0 cycles (default)
+1 cycles
+2 cycles

NOTE: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to models equipped with TAD.
NOTE: Selector 4 is applicable to European models with a cordless handset.
NOTE: Selector 5 is applicable to U.S.A. models with a cordless handset.

App. 4-61

Confidential

Selectors 1 through 3: Prevention against line disconnection during ICM recording (Percentage of
guard tone response time relative to end-of-call tone ON time)

If the machine misdetects an ICM tone as an end-of-call tone, it disconnects the line even during
recording of the ICM. If it happens, change the percentage of the guard tone response time relative to
the end-of-call tone ON time with these selectors.
If the percentage of the actual guard tone response time is more than the setting made by these
selectors, the machine interprets it as no detection of end-of-call tone, continuing recording the ICM.
Selector 4: Trimming of R key signal issued from cordless handset--For connection to base unit
with PBX OFF

For European models, a cordless handset can be registered to up to four base units.
On the cordless handset registered to more than one base unit, if you have programmed an R key
press as part of a number stored in a Speed-Dial location, you can dial using a Speed-Dial location
stored in the handset when connected to the base unit in which PBX is set to ON.
When the cordless handset is connected to any other base unit in which PBX is set to OFF, however,
using a Speed-Dial location may dial an unintended telephone number or cause a malfunction due to
the programmed R key signal preceding the intended number. To avoid such problems, enable the R
key signal trimming function with this selector so that the base unit dials trimming the received R
key signal.
Selector 5: Call transfer to cordless handset from telephone(s) connected in parallel with the
machine (base unit)

Enabling this function allows the machine (base unit) to transfer a call transferred from telephone(s)
connected in parallel with the machine to the cordless handset.

App. 4-62

Confidential

WSW59 (Function setting 24)

Selector
No.
1

Transmission of USB serial
number to PC

Not used.

3
|
5

6
7
8

Setting and Specifications

Function
0: Enable
(default)

1: Disable

No. 3 4 5
0 0 0 : No checking
(default for USA/European models)
0 0 1 : SJIS (default for Japanese model)
0 1 0 : Simplified Chinese
(default for Chinese/Asia & Pacific
models)
0 1 1 :
|
Reserved.
1 1 1 :

Checking of the specified
character code set when
displaying or printing the
folder/file names stored in
memory cards or USB flash
memory drives

Not used.
Improvement of DTMF
detection function (to minimize
the effects of momentary power
failure or noise)

0: Disable

1: Enable
(default)

Selector 1: Transmission of USB serial number to PC

By default, the machine transmits the USB serial number to the connected PC.
If Windows Vista is running on the PC, the transmission of the USB serial number to the PC might
cause a problem. If it happens, disable the transmission with this selector.
Selectors 3 through 5: Checking of the specified character code set when displaying or printing the
folder/file names stored in memory cards or USB flash memory drives

When folder/file names stored in memory cards or USB flash memory drives contain Chinese
characters, for example, those characters may get garbled in displaying on the color LCD or printing
indexes. If it happens, select the character code set of the used language with these selectors.

App. 4-63

Confidential

Appendix 5. Wiring Diagrams
This appendix provides the wiring diagrams that help you understand the connections between
PCBs.

Confidential

-1
CSEN

GND

SENPOW

4.2-/3.3-inch wide color LCD
Control panel PCB

Scanner/ink cartridge
cover sensor
Carriage
motor
Paper
feed
motor
PF
encorder
sensor
Registration
sensor
Purge
cam
Speaker
switch

Media 1
xD/SD
/MS

CN7

Main PCB

BATCHK

CN6

-1

CN12

BAT_P

MFC885CW only

-2

BAT_N

S0V

+31V
P0V

TELSL1

TELRL

M0V

TELSL2

CN16a-1

CN16a-2

-2
-1

-3

-4

CN16-6
-5

Hook
switch
PCB

-3

LEDV
HOOK

-1

-2

-3

-4

MFC685CW/680CN only

CN11-4

-1

VOUT2
VOUT1

Media 2
CF

CN2-2

S0V

PURGE

POR

+3.3V

DATA+

DATA-

WLAN
PCB

-1

RESI

S0V

LED_PWR

FG
S0V

-1

-2

-3

CN20-4

-1

-2

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

-19

-20

-21

-22

-23

-24

-25

-26

-27

CN1-28

MFC885CW/685CW only

CN3-2

-1

-2

-3

SLP5V

S0V

ENC1

ENC2

OUT_B
OUT_B

OUT_A

FSEN

CN21-3

-1

-2

CN23-3

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

CN4-9

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

ADF
motor

-4

-5

-6

CN15-7

LF+

LF-

CR+

S0V

+5V

RSEN

S0V

SLP5V

EMP_THM_IN

EMP_THM

YCNT

BCNT

S0V

EMP

LEDPWR

MCNT

CCNT

VSS1

VDD2

-7

-8

COM

VSS2

VDD2

VSS1

CLK

VDD1

FIRE1_5

FIRE0_6

FIRE1_5

FIRE0_5

FIRE1_4

FIRE0_4

SIN3

SIN2

SIN1

SIN0

VTEMP

FIRE1_3

FIRE0_3

FIRE1_2

FIRE0_2

FIRE1_1

Document
front
sensor

-1

CN17-2

-1

CR-

S0V
CLK
+5V
SDOUT

SDIN

MICP

MICN

DB15

DB14

DB13

DB12

VDD

VSS

DB11

DB10

DB9

T_M

MEDIACNTL

-9

-10

-11

CN26-12

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

CN27-13

-1

-2

-3

-4

VDD2

VSS2

COM

FIRE0_1

Document
rear
sensor

CN18-2

-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

-6

CN10-7

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

DB8

CS1B

MCNT5V

MEDIA

CNT5V

ENC1

ENC2

T_M_IN

VSS2

FIRE13

FIRE03

FIRE12

FIRE02

FIRE11

FIRE01

VSS1

CLK

VDD1

SIN0

SIN1

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

CN28-14

HEAD 2

-9

-10

RSTB

WDB

RDB

DB0

DB1

DB2

DB3

DB4

DB5

DB6

DB7

LED-VSS

VSS

VDD

LED-V

PictBridge/
USB flash
memory drive

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

-19

-20

-21

-22

-23

-24

-25

-26

-27

VSS

OUT_B
OUT_B
OUT_A
OUT_A

MODE/VAD

SIN2

SIN3

VTEMP

FIRE16

FIRE06

FIRE15

FIRE05

FIRE14

FIRE04

Ink cartridge PCB

-2

CIS
motor
CN8-28

CN19-4
-3
-2
-1

-1

-2

VREF/RS
VCC/VDD
GND

TG/TR

CLK/M

VLED

B-GND

G-GND

FG/GND
R-GND

Carriage PCB

CN2-3

CIS unit
-3

-5
-4

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

CN29-12

MFC885CW/685CW/680CN

Head

MFC885CW only

Charge
PCB

HEAD 1
HEAD 3

Antenna

TXD
RTS
RST
S0V
S0V
RING
HSMIPD
MIPD

LIN0D
CI
M0V
LOUT0D
HSSPOUTP
+3.3V
+3.3V
SPOUTPD
CTS
RXD

USB
La
Lb

LAN
CN32-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

CN1-2
-1

Cordless
PCB

CN30

Main-MJ
(LINE)

CN25b-2
RELAY
-1
S0V

Main-MJ
(EXT)

CN13-4
+31V -3
+31V
-2
P0V
-1
P0V

Power
supply
PCB

Line

CN31

MJ PCB
Ext

Microphone

Battery

Confidential

CSEN

GND

SENPOW

2.0-inch color LCD
Control panel PCB

Scanner/ink cartridge
cover sensor
Carriage
motor
Paper
feed
motor

S0V

PF
encorder
sensor
Registration
sensor

-1

CN3-2

PURGE
S0V

RESI

S0V

LED_PWR

+5V

-1

-2

CN21-3

CN20-4
OUT_A
OUT_A -3
-2
OUT_B
OUT_B -1

FSEN

S0V

-1

-2

CN23-3

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

CN4-9

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

COM

VSS2

VDD2

VSS1

CLK

VDD1

FIRE1_6

FIRE0_6

FIRE1_5

FIRE0_5

FIRE1_4

FIRE0_4

SIN3

SIN2

SIN1

SIN0

VTEMP

FIRE1_3

FIRE0_3

FIRE1_2

FIRE0_2

FIRE1_1

Document
front
sensor

-1

-2

-3

SLP5V

ENC1
-5
-4

ENC2

RSEN

S0V

SLP5V

CN26-12
-11

VDD2

VSS2

COM

FIRE0_1

Document
rear
sensor

-6

LF+

LF-

EMP_THM_IN

EMP_THM

YCNT

BCNT

S0V

EMP

LEDPWR

MCNT

CCNT

VSS1

VDD2

T_M

MEDIACNTL

MCNT5V

MEDIA

CNT5V

ENC1

ENC2

VSS2 -4
-3
VSS2
-2
VSS2
-1
T_M_IN

VSS2 -6
VSS2 -5

Ink cartridge PCB

CN15-7

-1

CN17-2

CR-1 CR+

CN18-2

SDOUT

+5V

CLK

S0V

SDIN

CS1B

RSTB

WDB

RDB

DB0

DB1

DB2

DB3

DB4

DB5

DB6

DB7

LED-VSS

VSS

VDD

LED-V

FIRE13 -8
VSS2 -7

FIRE12 -10
FIRE03 -9

FIRE11 -12
FIRE02 -11

FIRE01 CN27-13

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

CN28-14

Carriage PCB

-1

-2

-3

-4

CN10b-5

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

VSS

OUT_A

PictBridge/
USB flash
memory drive

-1

CIS
motor
CN8a-18

-1

VSS1

CLK

VDD1

SIN0

SIN1

SIN2

SIN3

VTEMP

FIRE16

FIRE06

FIRE15

FIRE05

FIRE14

FIRE04

HEAD 2

-2

MODE

GND

VCC

VREF

CLK

VLED

B-GND

G-GND

OUT_B
-3 OUT_B
-2 OUT_A

CN19-4

-1

-2

-3

FG/GND
R-GND

HEAD 1

CN2-3

CIS unit
-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

CN29-12

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

-19

-20

-21

-22

-23

-24

-25

-26

-27

CN1-28

MFC465CN

Head

ADF
motor

HEAD 3

CN6

Media 1
xD/SD
/MS

CN7

Media 2
CF
La

CN1-2

Main PCB
RELAY

USB
VOUT2

CN31

LAN
+31V
+31V
P0V
P0V

-1

CN25b-2

S0V

-1

VOUT1

-1

-2

-3

-1

Main-MJ
(LINE)

CN12

Main-MJ
(EXT)

Line

MJ PCB
Ext

CN30

CN2-2

Speaker

CN13-4

Power
supply
PCB

Purge
cam
switch

Confidential

CN2-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
FG
FG
VSS
VDD
VREF
STB
SCK
DATA
-1 CSEN

GND

Control panel
PCB

Scanner/ink cartridge
cover sensor
SDOUT

+5V

CLK

S0V

SDIN

OUT_A

Carriage
motor
Paper
feed
motor
PF
encorder
sensor
Registration
sensor

PURGE
S0V

CN21-3

-1

-2

-1

-2

COM

VSS2

VDD2

VSS1

CLK

VDD1

FIRE1_6

FIRE0_6

FIRE1_5

FIRE0_5

FIRE1_4

FIRE0_4

SIN3

SIN2

SIN1

SIN0

VTEMP

FIRE1_3

FIRE0_3

FIRE1_2

FIRE0_2

FIRE1_1

FIRE0_1

VDD2

CN22-3

CN2-4
OUT_A
OUT_A -3
-2
OUT_B
OUT_B -1

FSEN

S0V

+5V

RSEN

S0V

SLP5V

COM

VSS2

Document
front
sensor

-1

RESI

S0V

LED_PWR

SLP5V

S0V

ENC1

HEAD 3

Document
rear
sensor

CN8-2

-1

-2

-3

-4

Carriage PCB

-5

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

CN9-9

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

CN16-12

-1

-2

-3

-4

Ink cartridge PCB

-6

ENC2

EMP_THM

YCNT

BCNT

S0V

EMP

LEDPWR

MCNT

CCNT

VSS1

VDD2

T_M

MEDIACNTL

MCNT5V

MEDIA

CNT5V

ENC1

ENC2

T_M_IN

VSS2

VSS2 -6
VSS2 -5

FIRE13 -8
VSS2 -7

FIRE03 -9

FIRE12 -10

FIRE11 -12
FIRE02 -11

EMP_THM_IN

CN6

CN23-7

LF-1 LF+

CN4-2

CN3-2 CR-1 CR+

-1

-2

-3

-4

CN18-5

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

FIRE01 CN14-13

VSS1

CLK

VDD1

SIN0

SIN1

SIN2

SIN3

VTEMP

FIRE16

FIRE06

FIRE15

FIRE05

FIRE14

-13

CN15-14

HEAD 2

-2

CIS
motor
16 x 1
monochrome
LCD
SENPOW

OUT_B

MODE

GND

-3 OUT_B
-2 OUT_A

CN12-4

-1

-2

-3

VCC

VREF

CLK

VLED

B-GND

G-GND

R-GND

FG/GND

FIRE04

HEAD 1

CN4-3

CIS unit
-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

CN13-12

MFC265C/260C only

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

-19

-20

-21

-22

-23

-24

-25

-26

-27

CN1-28

MFC265C/260C/235C

Head

MFC265C/260C only

ADF
motor

Media 1
xD/SD
/MS

Media 2
CF
CN5

CN20

Main PCB
Lb

PictBridge/
USB flash
memory drive
RDPS

+31V

+31V
+31V

CN1-2
-1

CN19-2
-1

P0V -2
P0V -1

Main-MJ
(LINE)
MJ PCB

Main-MJ
(EXT)

Line

CN11

Ext

USB

CN24-4
-3

Power supply PCB

Purge
cam
switch

Confidential

Appendix 6. Circuit Diagrams
This appendix provides the circuit diagrams of the MJ PCB and power supply PCB.

A. MJ PCB (U.S.A., Canadian, and Asian models)
MJ PCB (European and Oceanian models)
MJ PCB (S. African models)
B. Power supply PCB (U.S.A. and Canadian models)
Power supply PCB (European, Asian and Oceanian models)

Confidential

A. MJ PCB (U.S.A., Canadian, and Asian models)

MJ PCB
JW2

to
Line
MJ-66J-RD315(LF)

Lb 4
NC

C473

C153

RA-302M-C6

PH1

PS2521-1

POL

1SS120

FG 7
FG 8
CN3

C8
L6
DL-6503C

L2
DL-6503C

to
EXT

2 Lb
CN1

C153

E 6

1 La

C4
C682

C221

Tb 5

C221

La 3

RCH-855 332K
RCH-855 332K L1

B2B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)

Ta 2

P3100ECL

TVB270SC-L

S 1

L4
DL-6503C

JW4

to
MAIN
SDAA

S0V
FG
A5X-G-24E-908

FG 7

2
12

SW1

330

FG 8

JW3

RELAY
C474

CN4

S0V

L5
DL-6503C

1SS120

MJ-62J-RD315(LF)

39k

Ta 3

Tb 4

C3
C104
S0V

JW1
NC

NC
0

S0V

CN2a
2 S0V

CN2b
3 S0V

RELAY

1 RELAY

2 RELAY

POL

B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

to Main PCB
Confidential

A. MJ PCB (European and Oceanian models)

MJ PCB
JW2

to
Line
MJ-66J-RD315(LF)

Lb 4
NC

RA-302M-C6

C153

POL
A

L2
DL-6503C

to
EXT

PH1

FG 8
CN3

C473

1SS120

FG 7

2 Lb
CN1

E 6

C153

C8
L6
DL-6503C

1 La

C4
C682

C221

Tb 5

B2B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)

C221

La 3

RCH-855 332K
RCH-855 332K L1

Ta 2

P3100ECL

TVB270SC-L

S 1

L4
DL-6503C

JW4

to
MAIN
SDAA

PS2521-1
S0V

FG
A5X-G-24E-908

FG 7

2
12

SW1

330

FG 8

JW3

RELAY
C474

CN4

S0V

L5
DL-6503C

1SS120
R3

Ta 3

MJ-62J-RD315(LF)

39k

Tb 4

C3
C104
S0V

JW1
NC

NC
0

S0V
RELAY
POL

CN2a
2 S0V

CN2b
3 S0V

1 RELAY

2 RELAY

B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

to Main PCB
Confidential

A. MJ PCB (S.African models)

MJ PCB
JW2

to
Line
MJ-66J-RD315(LF)

Lb 4
NC

C473

C153

RA-302M-C6

PH1

PS2521-1

POL

1SS120

FG 7
FG 8
CN3

C8
L6
DL-6503C

L2
DL-6503C

to
EXT

2 Lb
CN1

C153

E 6

1 La

C4
C682

C221

Tb 5

C221

La 3

RCH-855 332K
RCH-855 332K L1

B2B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)

Ta 2

P3100ECL

TVB270SC-L

S 1

L4
DL-6503C

JW4

to
MAIN
SDAA

S0V
FG
A5X-G-24E-908

FG 7

2
12

SW1

330

FG 8

JW3

RELAY
C474

CN4

S0V

L5
DL-6503C

1SS120

MJ-62J-RD315(LF)

39k

Ta 3

Tb 4

C3
C104
S0V

JW1
NC

NC
0

S0V

CN2a
2 S0V

CN2b
3 S0V

RELAY

1 RELAY

2 RELAY

POL

B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

to Main PCB
Confidential

B. Power supply PCB (U.S.A. and Canadian models)

Confidential

B. Power supply PCB (European, Asian and Oceanian models)

Confidential

Appendix 7. Deletion of Personal Information
This appendix provides instructions on how to delete personal information recorded in the
machine and cordless handset(s).

A7.1 Deleting Personal Info from the Machine..................................................... App. 7- 1
A7.2 Deleting Personal Info from the Cordless Handset(s).................................. App. 7- 2

Confidential

A7.1 Deleting Personal Info from the Machine
The personal information in the machine is recorded in the EEPROM on the main PCB. It cannot be
deleted all by a single operation. Use Function code 01 in the maintenance mode, unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the backup battery*.
*For models with backup battery

[1]

Using Function code 01

Using Function code 01 (EEPROM parameter initialization) in the maintenance mode deletes the
following data that have been recorded in the main PCB:
- Activity report
- Station ID data
- Outside line number
- One-touch dialing
- Speed dialing
- Group dialing
- Call transfer data
Operating Procedure
(1) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next press
the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode.
TIP: FAX models equipped with a numerical keypad can enter the maintenance mode in the
same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this
order.
(2) Press the 0 and 1 keys in this order.
Parameter initialization starts and the "PARAMETER INIT" appears on the LCD.
(3) Upon completion of parameter initialization, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

[2]

Unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnecting the backup battery*
*For models with backup battery

Unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnecting the backup battery* deletes
the Caller ID list, fax data received into memory, transmission verification report (for image),
broadcasting report and batch transmission data (in the memory).
Operating Procedure
(1) Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
(2) For models with backup battery, disconnect the backup battery harness from the main PCB (see
Chapter 6).
(3) Leave the machine for approx. 24 hours.

App. 7- 1

Confidential

A7.2 Deleting Personal Info from the Cordless
Handset(s)
The personal information recorded in the cordless handset can be deleted all at once by a single
operation. The following procedure deletes the records of sent/received calls and telephone
directory recorded in the cordless handset.
Operating Procedure
------------------------------------------------ USA models ------------------------------------------------------(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK, *, Menu/OK, and * keys in this order. The
cordless handset displays the following.
Initialize
Settings?
1. Yes 2. No
(2) Press the 1 key. The cordless handset displays the following.
All Delete?
1. Yes 2. No
(3) Press the 1 key again.
All personal information recorded in the cordless handset will be deleted.
(4) Press the Off key.
NOTE: Each cordless handset has individual personal information. If two or more cordless
handsets are used, carry out steps (1) through (4) on each of them.
----------------------------------------------- European models ------------------------------------------------(1) On the cordless handset, press the Menu/OK key.
(2) Press the

key to choose "HS Settings," then press the Menu/OK key.

(3) Press the

key to choose "HS Default," then press the Menu/OK key.

(4) Press the 1 key.
All personal information recorded in the cordless handset will be deleted.

App. 7- 2

Confidential

May '07
SM-FAX067
8CAE03(1)
Printed in Japan
Confidential

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
About                           : uuid:6fcc165b-5656-49c6-b612-61fe80d032d0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2006:04:28 02:45:30Z
Modify Date                     : 2007:09:14 16:59+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:09:14 16:59+09:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Document ID                     : uuid:d289e1af-1f0e-4ec7-9be6-ff82ab83590b
Instance ID                     : uuid:d3125fef-5f02-432e-9134-d86fa76dfda5
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 453
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

SM_MFC465CN_MFC685CW_MFC885CW SM MFC465CN MFC685CW MFC885CW

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation